Hitachi Welding System Sj300 037Hfe Users Manual Series Inverter Instruction

SJ300-037HFE to the manual c88dbdc4-787c-4d2d-b3f1-7341546bb418

2015-01-24

: Hitachi Hitachi-Welding-System-Sj300-037Hfe-Users-Manual-314307 hitachi-welding-system-sj300-037hfe-users-manual-314307 hitachi pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 289

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Cover

HITACHI
SJ300 Series Inverter
Instruction Manual
• Three-phase Input
• Three-phase Input

UL Version Models

Manual Number: NB613XH
December 2003

200V Class
400V Class

CE Version Models

After reading this manual,
keep it handy for future reference.

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

SJ300 Inverter

Safety Messages
For the best results with the SJ300 Series inverter, carefully read this manual and all of the
warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it, and follow the instructions exactly. Keep this manual handy for quick reference.

Definitions and
Symbols

A safety instruction (message) includes a hazard alert symbol and a signal word, WARNING or
CAUTION. Each signal word has the following meaning:
This symbol indicates HIGH VOLTAGE. It calls your attention to items or operations
that could be dangerous to you and other persons operation this equipment. Read the
message and follow the instructions carefully.
This symbol is the “Safety Alert Symbol.” It occurs with either of two signal words:
CAUTION or WARNING, as described below.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in serious injury or death.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in minor to moderate injury, or serious damage to the product. The situation described
in the CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results. Important safety
measures are described in CAUTION (as well as WARNING), so be sure to observe
them.
STEP: A step is one of a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal. The
number of the step will be contained in the step symbol.

NOTE: Notes indicate an area or subject of special merit, emphasizing either the
product’s capabilities or common errors in operation or maintenance.

TIP: Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits
while installing or using the product. The tip calls attention to an idea that may not
be obvious to first-time users of the product.

Hazardous High Voltage
HIGH VOLTAGE: Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to hazardous line voltages. When servicing drives and electronic controllers, there may be exposed
components with housings or protrusions at or above line potential. Extreme care should be
taken to protect against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking components. Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect power before
checking controllers or performing maintenance. Be sure equipment is properly grounded.
Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or rotating machinery.

General Precautions - Read These First!
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified electrical
maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the
hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
WARNING: The user is responsible for ensuring that all driven machinery, drive train mechanism not supplied by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd., and process line material
are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150% of the maximum selected
frequency range to the AC motor. Failure to do so can result in destruction of equipment and
injury to personnel should a single-point failure occur.
WARNING: For equipment protection, install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast
response circuit capable of handling large currents. The ground fault protection circuit is not
designed to protect against personal injury.
HIGH VOLTAGE: HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT INCOMING
POWER BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
CAUTION: These instructions should be read and clearly understood before working on
SJ300 series equipment.
CAUTION: Proper grounds, disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their location
are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems
Co., Ltd.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to the
SJ300 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an overload or
an overheated motor.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF. Wait at least 5 minutes
after input power is disconnected before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently (fixed) hardwired to earth ground via two independent cables.
WARNING: Rotating shafts and above-ground electrical potentials can be hazardous. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to the National Electrical
Codes and local regulations. Installation, alignment and maintenance should be performed only
by qualified personnel.
Factory-recommended test procedures included in the instruction manual should be followed.
Always disconnect electrical power before working on the unit.

SJ300 Inverter

CAUTION:
a) Motor must be connected to protective ground via low resistive path (< 0.1Ω)
b) Any motor used must be of a suitable rating.
c) Motors may have hazardous moving parts. In this event suitable protection must be provided.
CAUTION: Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is
disconnected. When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection, confirm that
incoming power for alarm connection is completely disconnected.
CAUTION: Hazardous (main) terminals for any interconnection (motor, contact breaker, filter,
etc.) must be inaccessible in the final installation.
CAUTION: The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204-1. Refer to the
section “Step-by-Step Basic Installation” on page 2–6. The diagram dimensions are to be
suitably amended for your application.
CAUTION: Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two independent means of mechanical support. Using a termination with cable support (figure below), or
strain relief, cable clamp, etc.

Terminal (ring lug)

Cable support

Cable

CAUTION: A three-pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main power
supply close to the inverter. Additionally, a protection device meeting IEC947-1/IEC947-3
must be fitted at this point (protection device data shown in “Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes”
on page 2–14).

NOTE: The above instructions, together with any other requirements are highlighted in this
manual, and must be followed for continued LVD (European Low Voltage Directive) compliance.

iii

Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
Installation—Cautions for Mounting Procedures
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a
steel plate. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the
inverter housing, such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal
shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight
according to the specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables).
Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not
subject to vibration. Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or
has missing parts. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that
does not have direct exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature,
high humidity or dew condensation, high levels of dust, corrosive gas,
explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt air, etc. Otherwise,
there is the danger of fire.

............... 2–6

CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the
inverter and to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may
overheat and cause equipment damage or fire.

............... 2–7

Wiring—Warnings for Electrical Practices and Wire Specifications
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.

............. 2–13

WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–
1500H.

............. 2–13

WARNING: “A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire” or equivalent.

............. 2–13

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with
suffix L.

............. 2–13

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with
suffix H.

............. 2–13

SJ300 Inverter

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger
of electric shock and/or fire.

............. 2–13

HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified
personnel. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.

............. 2–13

HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply
is OFF. Otherwise, you may incur electric shock and/or fire.

............. 2–13

HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an
inverter that is not mounted according the instructions given in this manual.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.

............. 2–13

Wiring—Cautions for Electrical Practices
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications: • Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz • Three phase 380 to 480V 50/
60Hz

............. 2–19

CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single
phase power. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter
and the danger of fire.

............. 2–19

CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the
danger of injury and/or fire.

............. 2–19

Power Input

Power Output

NOTE:
L1, L2, L3:

Three-phase 200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50/60 Hz

vi
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the
table below. Check for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.

............. 2–16

CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main
power supply: Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFI-filter)
and shielded (screened) motor cables have a higher leakage current toward
Earth GND. Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an
inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers. Because of the rectifier
on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off
function through small amounts of DC current. Please observe the following: • Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault
interrupter breakers with higher trigger current. • Other components should
be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers. • Ground fault
interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an
absolute protection against electric shock.

............. 2–19

CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply
to the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

............. 2–19

CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must
have the capacity for rated current and voltage). Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.

............. 2–19

CAUTION: Failure to remove all vent opening covers before electrical
operation may result in damage to the inverter.

............. 2–20

Powerup Test Caution Messages
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not
to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

............. 2–21

CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low
speed to high speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the
motor and machine before operating the inverter. Otherwise, there is the
danger of injury.

............. 2–21

............. 2–22

CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage. • Is the shorting bar between
the [P] and [PD] terminals installed? DO NOT power or operate the inverter
if the jumper is removed. • Is the direction of the motor rotation correct? •
Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration? • Were the rpm and
frequency meter readings as expected? • Were there any abnormal motor
vibrations or noise?

............. 2–22

SJ300 Inverter

Warnings for Operations and Monitoring
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing
the front case. While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front
case. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.

............... 4–3

WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands.
Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.

............... 4–3

WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the
inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the
danger of electric shock.

............... 4–3

WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart
after a trip stop. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine
(be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if
it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

............... 4–3

WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the
inverter may restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run
command is active. If a restart may pose danger to personnel, so be sure to
use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

............... 4–3

WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is
enabled. Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency
stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

............... 4–3

WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to
put any conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or fire.

............... 4–3

WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already
active, the motor will automatically start and injury may result. Before
turning ON the power, confirm that the RUN command is not present.

............... 4–3

WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key
does not stop the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.

............... 4–3

WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop
switch when the application warrants it.

............... 4–3

WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already
active, the motor starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON,
confirm that the external Run command is not active.

............. 4–12

WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs,
the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be
sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run command is OFF to
prevent injury to personnel.

............. 4–27

WARNING: You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before
performing auto-tuning. The inverter runs the motor forward and backward
for several seconds without regard to load movement limits.

............. 4–67

vii

viii
Cautions for Operations and Monitoring
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not
to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

............... 4–2

CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low
speed to high speed. Be sure check the capability and limitations of the
motor and machine before operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.

............... 4–2

CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your
application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a
connection point.

............... 4–7

CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator
sum when the inverter is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise,
this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.

............. 4–30

CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower speeds, the cooling effect of the
motor’s internal fan decreases.

............. 4–55

CAUTION: If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the
motor in use, the inverter may not achieve its full performance specifications.

............. 4–70

CAUTION: You must use a carrier frequency of more than 2.1kHz. The
inverter cannot operate in vector control mode at less than 2.1 kHz carrier
frequency.

............. 4–70

Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power
supply before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.

............... 6–2

WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance, inspection, and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove
any metallic objects from your person (wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure
to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or injury to personnel.

............... 6–2

WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires
for cooling fan and logic P.C. board). Otherwise, there is danger of fire due
to wire breakage and/or injury to personnel.

............... 6–2

CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such
as intelligent I/O, analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the
inverter.

............. 6–11

CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The
inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and
the chassis ground.

............. 6–11

SJ300 Inverter

............. 6–13

CAUTION: Do not operate the inverter unless you have replaced the two
screws that connect the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC bus.
Otherwise, damage to the inverter may occur.

............. 6–13

CAUTION: Remove the fan assembly carefully, since it is attached to the
unit via connecting wires.

............. 6–14

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals
when working with the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place
the measurement circuitry above in an insulated housing before using them.

............. 6–16

General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING: Never modify the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or
injury.
CAUTION: Withstand voltage tests and insulation resistance tests (HIPOT) are executed
before the units are shipped, so there is no need to conduct these tests before operation.
CAUTION: Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied. Also, do not
check signals during operation.
CAUTION: Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the
primary or secondary sides of the inverter.
Power
Input
MCCB

Ground fault
interrupter
Inverter
GFI
R, S, T

U, V, W

Motor

L1, L2, L3

When there has been a sudden power failure while a Run command is active, then the unit may
restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended. If there is a possibility that
such an occurrence may harm humans, then install an electromagnetic contactor on the power
supply side, so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recovers. If an optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected, this will also
allow automatic restarting when a Run command is active. So, please be careful.

x
CAUTION: Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between the
output terminals of the inverter and motor.
Ground fault
interrupter
Power
Input

Surge absorber
Inverter

GFI
R, S, T

L1, L2, L3

Motor

U, V, W
GND lug

Leading power
factor capacitor

CAUTION: Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground.

CAUTION: When inspecting the unit, be sure to wait five minutes after tuning OFF the power
supply before opening the cover.
CAUTION: SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER
The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transistors and IGBTs.
Thus, a radio receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is susceptible to noise
interference.
To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interference, they should be
used well away from the inverter. It is also effective to shield the whole inverter structure.
The addition of an EMI filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of noise
from the commercial power line on external devices.
Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be minimized by connecting
an EMI filter on the primary side of inverter.
EMI filter
L1
Power
source

L2
L3

Inverter

Motor

noise
EMI filter

Inverter

Motor

Grounded frame
Completely ground the enclosed
panel, metal screen, etc. with as
short a wire as possible.

Remote
operator

Conduit or shielded cable—
to be grounded

SJ300 Inverter

CAUTION: MOTOR TERMINAL VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION FILTER
(For 400 V CLASS Inverters)
In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system, a voltage surge caused by
the cable constants such as the cable length (especially when the distance between the motor
and inverter is 10 m or more) and cabling method may occur at the motor terminals. A
dedicated filter of the 400 V class for suppressing this voltage surge is available. Be sure to
install a filter in this situation. (See “LCR filter” on page 5–2, part type HRL–xxxC.)

CAUTION: EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ON INVERTERS
In the cases below involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current can flow on the
power supply side, sometimes destroying the converter module:
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (or the
power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable, you
MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current) with respect to
the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an indirect lightning
strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.

CAUTION: Do not install inverters in a corner-grounded Delta distribution system. The resulting line imbalance will cause premature line fuse failure and failure of the inverter input bridge
rectifier. Install in a balanced Delta or Wye distribution system only.
CAUTION: When the EEPROM error E8 occurs, be sure to confirm the setting values again.

CAUTION: When using normally closed active state settings (C011 to C019) for externally
commanded Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV], the inverter may start automatically
when the external system is powered OFF or disconnected from the inverter! So, do not use
normally closed active state settings for Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV] unless
your system design protects against unintended motor operation.

General Caution
CAUTION: In all the illustrations in this manual, covers and safety devices are occasionally
removed to describe the details. While operating the product, make sure that the covers and
safety devices are placed as they were specified originally and operate it according to the
instruction manual.

xii

UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions
Wiring Warnings
for Electrical
Practices and
Wire Sizes

The Cautions, Warnings, and instructions in this section summarize the procedures necessary to
ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories® guidelines.

WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.

WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–1500H.

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix L.

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.

Terminal Tighten- The wire size range and tightening torque for field wiring terminals are presented in the table
below.
ing Torque and
Wire Size
Input
Voltage

200V

Motor
Output

200V
Inverter Model

1/2

0.4

SJ300-004LFU

0.75

2
3

Torque
Wire Size Range (AWG)
ft-lbs

(N-m)

1.1

1.5

SJ300-007LFU

1.1

1.5

SJ300-015LFU

1.1

1.5

2.2

SJ300-022LFU

1.1

1.5

3.7

SJ300-037LFU

1.1

1.5

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055LFU

1.8

2.5

7.5

SJ300-075LFU

1.8

2.5

SJ300-110LFU

3.6

4.9

SJ300-150LFU

3.6

4.9

18.5

SJ300-185LFU

4 || 4 AWG

3.6

4.9

SJ300-220LFU

4 || 4 AWG

6.5

8.8

SJ300-300LFU

2 || 2 AWG

6.5

8.8

SJ300-370LFU

2 || 2 AWG

6.5

8.8

SJ300-450LFU

1 || 1 AWG (75°C)

10.1

13.7

SJ300-550LFU

2/0 || 2/0 AWG

10.1

13.7

TIP: AWG = American Wire Gauge. Smaller numbers represent increasing wire thickness.
kcmil = 1,000 circular mils, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
mm2 = square millimeters, a measure of wire cross-sectional area

xiii

SJ300 Inverter

Input
Voltage

400V

Motor
Output

400V
Inverter Model

0.75

SJ300-007HFU/E

1.5

Torque
Wire Size Range (AWG)
ft-lbs

(N-m)

1.1

1.5

SJ300-015HFU/E

1.1

1.5

2.2

SJ300-022HFU/E

1.1

1.5

4.0

SJ300-040HFU/E

1.1

1.5

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055HFU/E

1.8

2.5

7.5

SJ300-075HFU/E

1.8

2.5

SJ300-110HFU/E

3.6

4.9

SJ300-150HFU/E

3.6

4.9

18.5

SJ300-185HFU/E

3.6

4.9

SJ300-220HFU/E

3.6

4.9

SJ300-300HFU/E

3.6

4.9

SJ300-370HFU/E

4 || 4 AWG

3.6

4.9

SJ300-450HFU/E

1 (75°C)

6.5

8.8

SJ300-550HFU/E

2 || 2 AWG

6.5

8.8

100

SJ300-750HFU/E

1 || 1 AWG (75°C)

6.5

8.8

125

SJ300-900HFU/E

1 || 1 AWG (75°C)

10.1

13.7

150

110

SJ300-110HFU/E

1/0 || 1/0 AWG

10.1

13.7

175

132

SJ300-1320HFE

3/0 || 3/0

10.1

13.7

200

150

SJ300-1500HFU

3/0 || 3/0

10.1

13.7

xiv
Circuit Breaker
and Fuse Sizes
Input
Voltage

200V

Motor
Output
HP

1/2

0.4

The inverter’s connections to input power must include UL Listed inverse time circuit breakers
with 600V rating, or UL Listed fuses as shown in the table below.

200V
Inverter Model
SJ300-004LFU

Circuit
Breaker
(A)
10

Fuse
(A)

Motor
Output

Input
Voltage

HP
10

400V
Inverter Model

kW
0.75 SJ300-007HFU/E

Circuit
Breaker
(A)

Fuse

(A)
10

0.75 SJ300-007LFU

1.5

SJ300-015HFU/E

1.5

SJ300-015LFU

2.2

SJ300-022HFU/E

2.2

SJ300-022LFU

4.0

SJ300-040HFU/E

3.7

SJ300-037LFU

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055HFU/E

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055LFU

7.5

SJ300-075HFU/E

7.5

SJ300-075LFU

SJ300-110HFU/E

SJ300-110LFU

SJ300-150HFU/E

SJ300-150LFU

18.5 SJ300-185HFU/E

18.5 SJ300-185LFU

100

400V

SJ300-220HFU/E

SJ300-220LFU

125

SJ300-300HFU/E

SJ300-300LFU

150

SJ300-370HFU/E

SJ300-370LFU

175

SJ300-450HFU/E

125

SJ300-450LFU

225

SJ300-550HFU/E

125

SJ300-550LFU

250

100

SJ300-750HFU/E

—

175

125

SJ300-900HFU/E

—

200

150

110

SJ300-110HFU/E

—

250

175

132

SJ300-1320HFE

—

300

200

150

SJ300-1500HFU

—

300

Wire Connectors
WARNING: Field wiring connections must
be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified
ring lug terminal connector sized for the
wire gauge being used. The connector must
be fixed using the crimping tool specified by
the connector manufacturer.

Motor Overload
Protection

Terminal (ring lug)

Cable support

Cable

Hitachi SJ300 inverters provide solid state motor overload protection, which depends on the
proper setting of the following parameters:
• B012 “electronic overload protection”
• B212 “electronic overload protection, 2nd motor”
• B312 “electronic overload protection, 3rd motor”
Set the rated current [Amperes] of the motor(s) with the above parameters. The setting range is
0.2 * rated current to 1.2 * rated current.
WARNING: When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected
by the electronic overload protection. Install an external thermal relay on each motor.

SJ300 Inverter

Table of Contents
Safety Messages
Hazardous High Voltage
General Precautions - Read These First!
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
General Warnings and Cautions
UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions

i
ii
iv
ix
xii

Table of Contents
Revisions
Contact Information

xvii
xviii

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
Frequently Asked Questions

1–2
1–6
1–13
1–17

Chapter 2: Inverter Mounting and Installation
Orientation to Inverter Features
Basic System Description
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Powerup Test
Using the Front Panel Keypad

2–2
2–5
2–6
2–21
2–23

Chapter 3: Configuring Drive Parameters
Choosing a Programming Device
Using Keypad Devices
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
“A” Group: Standard Functions
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions
“U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions
Programming Error Codes

3–2
3–3
3–6
3–8
3–9
3–29
3–47
3–62
3–65
3–67
3–68

Chapter 4: Operations and Monitoring
Introduction
Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Analog Input Operation
Analog Output Operation
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
PID Loop Operation
Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors

4–2
4–4
4–7
4–11
4–42
4–59
4–62
4–65
4–71
4–72

xvi
Chapter 5: Inverter System Accessories
Introduction
Component Descriptions
Dynamic Braking

5–2
5–3
5–6

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Restoring Factory Default Settings
Maintenance and Inspection
Warranty

6–2
6–5
6–9
6–10
6–18

Appendix A: Glossary and Bibliography
Glossary
Bibliography

A–2
A–6

Appendix B: Serial Communications
Introduction
Communications Protocol
Communications Reference Information

B–2
B–5
B–17

Appendix C: Drive Parameter Settings Tables
Introduction
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

C–2
C–2

Appendix D: CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
Hitachi EMC Recommendations

Index

D–2
D–4

SJ300 Inverter

Revisions
Revision History Table

Date of Issue

Operation
Manual No.

Initial release of manual NB613X

March 2001

NB613X

Add three higher-horsepower models:
Model # convention update, page 1–5
Specs table, pages 1–6 to 1–10
Derating curves, pages 1–11 to 1–12
Dimension drawings, page 2–12
Update wire and fuse size table, pages 2–14, 2–15
Update terminal dimensions table, pages 2–16, 2–17
Update braking tables, pages 5–8, 5–12
Add function P044 to P049, page 3–66, pages C–15, C–16
Add programming error codes, pages 3–67, 3–68
Update keypad navigation map, pages 2–25, 3–4
Add Appendix D: CE-EMC Installation Guidelines
Moved Hitachi EMC Recommendations from page iv to D–4
Contents, Revisions, Index updates
Front cover update

August 2001

NB613XA

Added default terminal symbols to tables on 3–47, 3–53
Updated intelligent I/O wiring examples throughout Chapter 4 to
use default terminals or otherwise least-used terminals
Corrected alarm relay symbols in multiple pages in Chapter 4
Contents, Revisions, Index updates
Front cover update

December 2001

NB613XB

Updated company name on cover, contact page, and
nameplate photo
Corrected graphs on pages 3–29 and 3–43
Made a few minor edits throughout

May 2002

NB613XC

Corrected [FM] common terminal to [L] in Chapter 4 Analog
Input section
Updated wire and fuse sizes for larger horsepower models in
Safety section tables and Chapter 2 tables
Enhanced Chapter 5 text and diagrams for dynamic braking
Contents, Revisions, Index, Cover updates

August 2002

NB613XD

Enhanced sink/source input descriptions in Chapter 4
Added jumper descriptions throughout Chapter 4
Updated keypad navigation map in Chapters 2 and 3
Contents, Revisions, Index, Cover updates

March 2003

NB613XE

Corrected table heading on page 5–7 (external resistor topic)
Revisions, Cover updates

March 2003

NB613XF

Minor miscellaneous edits
Revisions, Cover updates

July 2003

NB613XG

Minor miscellaneous edits
Revisions, Cover updates

December 2003

NB613XH

No.

Revision Comments

xvii

xviii

Contact Information
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Power and Industrial Division
50 Prospect Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-914-631-0600
Fax: +1-914-631-3672

Hitachi Australia Ltd.
Level 3, 82 Waterloo Road
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-4100
Fax: +61-2-9888-4188

Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
D-40547 Düsseldorf
Germany
Phone: +49-211-5283-0
Fax: +49-211-5283-649

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co, Ltd.
International Sales Department
WBG MARIVE WEST 16F
6, Nakase 2-chome
Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi,
Chiba 261-7116 Japan
Phone: +81-43-390-3516
Fax: +81-43-390-3810

Hitachi Asia Ltd.
16 Collyer Quay
#20-00 Hitachi Tower, Singapore 049318
Singapore
Phone: +65-538-6511
Fax: +65-538-9011

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co, Ltd.
Narashino Division
1-1, Higashi-Narashino 7-chome
Narashino-shi, Chiba 275-8611
Japan
Phone: +81-47-474-9921
Fax: +81-47-476-9517

Hitachi Asia (Hong Kong) Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower
World Finance Centre, Harbour City
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2735-9218
Fax: +852-2735-6793

NOTE: To receive technical support for the Hitachi inverter you purchased, contact the Hitachi
inverter dealer from whom you purchased the unit, or the sales office or factory contact listed
above. Please be prepared to provide the following inverter nameplate information:
1. Model
2. Date of purchase
3. Manufacturing number (MFG No.)
4. Symptoms of any inverter problem
If any inverter nameplate information is illegible, please provide your Hitachi contact with any
other legible nameplate items. To reduce unpredictable downtime, we recommend that you
stock a spare inverter.

Getting Started

In This Chapter....

1
page

— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— SJ300 Inverter Specifications ........................................................... 6
— Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives...................................... 13
— Frequently Asked Questions........................................................... 17

Geting Started

1–2

Introduction

Introduction
Main Features

Congratulations on your purchase of an SJ300
Series Hitachi inverter! This inverter drive features
state-of-the-art circuitry and components to provide
high performance. The housing footprint is exceptionally small, given the size of the corresponding
motor. The Hitachi SJ300 product line includes
more than twenty inverter models to cover motor
sizes from 1/2 horsepower to 200 horsepower, in
either 230 VAC or 480 VAC power input versions.
The main features are:
• 200V Class and 400V Class inverters
• UL or CE version available
• Sensorless vector control
• Regenerative braking circuit
• Different operator keypads available for RUN/
STOP control and setting parameters
• Built-in RS-422 communications interface to
allow configuration from a PC and for field bus
external modules
• Sixteen programmable speed levels

Model SJ300-037HFU (UL version)

• Motor constants are programmable, or may be set
via auto-tuning
• PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to
maintain a process variable value
The design of Hitachi inverters overcomes many of
the traditional trade-offs between speed, torque and
efficiency. The performance characteristics are:
• High starting torque of 150% rating or greater
• Continuous operation at 100% rated torque
within a 1:10 speed range (6/60 Hz / 5/50 Hz)
without motor derating
• Models from 0.4–11kW (1/2 to 15hp) have builtin dynamic braking units
• Cooling fan has ON/OFF selection to provide
longer life

Model SJ300-037HFE (CE version)
A full line of accessories from Hitachi is available to complete your motor control application.
These include:
• Digital remote operator keypad
• Expansion card for sensor feedback
• Braking resistors
• Radio noise filters
• CE compliance filters
• Additional factory I/O network interface cards
(to be announced)

Expansion Card - Encoder Input

SJ300 Inverter

The SJ300 Series inverters have a detachable keypad (called a digital operator) on the front
panel of the housing. The particular keypad that comes with the inverter depends on the
country or continent corresponding to the particular model number. The standard digital operators occupy just part of the keypad recess in the panel. Therefore, the inverter comes with a
snap-in panel filler plate that mounts below the keypad as shown.
These detachable keypads can be mounted in a NEMA cabinet panel door cut-out, for example.
Threaded metal inserts on the rear of the keypads facilitate this external mounting configuration. A short cable then connects the keypad unit to the connector in the inverter keypad recess.
See Chapter 3 for information on how to install and use these keypads and cables.

Digital Operator OPE-SRE
standard for -LFU and -HFU models

Digital Operator OPE-S
standard for -HFE models

The digital operator / copy unit is optional, and
occupies the entire keypad recess when mounted. It
has the additional capability of reading (uploading)
the parameter settings in the inverter into its memory.
Then you can install the copy unit on another inverter
and write (download) the parameter settings into that
inverter. OEMs will find this unit particularly useful,
as one can use a single copy unit to transfer parameter settings from one inverter to many.
Other digital operator interfaces may be available
from your Hitachi distributor for particular industries
or international markets. Contact your Hitachi
distributor for further details.

Optional Digital Operator / Copy Unit
SRW-0EX

Getting Started

Digital Operator
Interface
Components

1–3

Geting Started

1–4

Introduction

Removable
Components

The SJ300 Series inverters are designed for long life and ease of service. Several components
are removable as shown below, aiding installation or parts replacement. Details on how and
when to remove these parts are in the referenced chapters.

Fan Unit
(See Chapter 6 for servicing)

Digital Operator and Panel Filler Plate
(See Chapter 3 for instructions)

Auxiliary fan (on some models)

Control Signal Terminal Block
(See Chapter 4 for wiring)

Capacitor Bank for DC Link
(See Chapter 6 for servicing)

Cable entry/exit plate
(See Chapter 2 for instructions)

SJ300 Inverter

1–5

Getting Started

Specifications
The Hitachi SJ300 inverters have product specifiLabel and Agency cations labels located on the front and the right
side of the housing, as pictured to the right. Be
Approvals
sure to verify that the specifications on the labels
match your power source, motor, and application
safety requirements.

Product Labels
Regulatory agency approvals

Specifications
Inverter model number
Motor capacity for this model
Power Input Rating:
frequency, voltage, phase, current
Output Rating:
frequency, voltage, current
Manufacturing codes:
lot number, date, etc.

Model Number
Convention

The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating
characteristics. Refer to the model number legend below:
SJ300

004

2
Version number (_, 2, 3, ...)
Restricted distribution:
E=Europe, U=USA

Series
name

Configuration type
F = with digital operator (keypad)
Input voltage:
H = three-phase 400V class
L = three phase only, 200V class

Applicable motor capacity in kW
004 = 0.4 kW
007 = 0.75 kW
015 = 1.5 kW
022 = 2.2 kW
037 = 3.7 kW
040 = 4.0 kW
055 = 5.5 kW

075 = 7.5 kW
110 = 11 kW
150 = 15 kW
185 = 18.5 kW
220 = 22 kW
300 = 30 kW
370 = 37 kW

450 = 45 kW
550 = 55 kW
750 = 75 kW
900 = 90 kW
1100 = 110 kW
1320 = 132 kW
1500 = 150 kW

Geting Started

1–6

SJ300 Inverter Specifications

SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Tables for 200V
class inverters

Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–9 covers all SJ300 inverters, followed by
footnotes for all specifications tables. The 200V models in the upper table below (1/2 to 15 hp)
include internal dynamic braking units (see “Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6).

Item

200V Class Specifications

SJ300 inverters, 200V models, UL version
Applicable motor size, 4-pole *2

004LFU

007LFU

015LFU

022LFU

037LFU

055LFU

075LFU

110LFU

1/2

7.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

1.0 / 1.2

1.7 / 2.0

2.5 / 3.1

3.6 / 4.3

5.7 / 6.8

8.3 / 9.9

11 / 13.3

15.9/
19.1

3.8

5.5

Rated capacity (200/240V) kVA
Rated input voltage

3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

Rated input current (A)
Rated output voltage *3

8.3

3-phase (3-wire) 200 to 240V (corresponding to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

3.0

5.0

7.5

10.5

16.5

Efficiency at 100% rated output, %

85.1

89.5

92.3

93.2

94.0

94.4

94.6

94.8

at 70% output

102

127

179

242

312

435

at 100% output

125

160

235

325

425

600

Watt loss,
approximate (W)
Starting torque *6
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7

200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
internal res. only

50%

with external res.

200%

DC braking

20%
160%

100%

10%
80%

70%

Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

Weight

kg / lb

3.5 / 7.7

Item

3.5 / 7.7

5 / 11

200V Class Specifications, continued

SJ300 inverters, 200V models, UL version
Applicable motor size *2

3.5 / 7.7

150LFU

185LFU

220LFU

300LFU

370LFU

450LFU

550LFU

18.5

22.1 / 26.6

26.3 / 31.5

32.9 / 39.4

41.9 / 50.2

50.2/60.2

63 / 75.6

76.2/91.4

Rated capacity (200/240V) kVA
Rated input voltage

3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

Rated input current (A)

Rated output voltage *3
Rated output current (A)

105

133

160

200

242

3-phase (3-wire) 200 to 240V (corresponding to input voltage)
64

121

145

182

220

Efficiency at 100% rated output, %

94.9

95.0

95.1

Watt loss,
approximate (W)

at 70% output

575

698

820

1100

1345

1625

1975

at 100% output

800

975

1150

1550

1900

2300

2800

Starting torque *6
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7

200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
w/o braking unit

10%

with braking unit

30–200%

25–170%

kg / lb

12 / 26.4

DC braking
Weight

25–150%

55–110%

45–90%

35–75%

30–60%

Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
12 / 26.4

20 / 44

30 / 66

50 / 110

1–7

SJ300 Inverter

Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–9 covers all SJ300 inverters, followed by
footnotes for all specifications tables. The 400V models in the upper table below (1 to 15 hp)
include internal dynamic braking units (see “Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6).

Item
SJ300 inverters,
400V models

400V Class Specifications
UL version
CE version

Applicable motor size *2

007HFU

015HFU

022HFU

040HFU

055HFU

075HFU

110HFU

007HFE

015HFE

022HFE

040HFE

055HFE

075HFE

110HFE

7.5

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

1.7 / 2.0

2.6 / 3.1

3.6 / 4.4

5.9 / 7.1

8.3 / 9.9

11 / 13.3

15.9/19.1

Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA
Rated input voltage

3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

Rated input current (A)

2.8

4.2

Rated output voltage *3

5.8

9.5

3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

2.5

3.8

5.3

8.6

Efficiency at 100% rated output, %
Watt loss,
approximate (W)

89.5

92.3

93.2

94.0

94.4

94.6

94.8

at 70% output

102

127

179

242

312

435

at 100% output

125

160

235

325

425

600

Starting torque *6
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7

200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
internal res. only

50%

with external res.

20%
200%

DC braking

10%

140%

100%

70%

Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

Weight

kg / lb

3.5 / 7.7

Item
SJ300 inverters,
400V models

3.5 / 7.7

55 / 121

400V Class Specifications
UL version

150HFU

185HFU

220HFU

300HFU

370HFU

450HFU

550HFU

CE version

150HFE

185HFE

220HFE

300HFE

370HFE

450HFE

550HFE

18.5

Applicable motor size *2

Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA

22.1 / 26.6 26.3 / 31.5 33.2 / 39.9 40.1 / 48.2 51.9 / 62.3 62.3 / 74.8

Rated input voltage

76.2/91.4

3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

Rated input current (A)

Rated output voltage *3
Rated output current (A)

121

3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)
32

Efficiency at 100% rated output, %

94.9

95.0

95.1

Watt loss,
approximate (W)

at 70% output

575

698

820

1100

1345

1625

1975

at 100% output

800

975

1150

1550

1900

2300

2800

Starting torque *6
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7

110

200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
w/o braking unit
with braking unit

10%
40–200%

DC braking
Weight

40–200%

35–200%

110–170%

90–150%

70–120%

60–100%

Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
kg / lb

12 / 26.4

20 / 44

30 / 66

50 / 110

Getting Started

Tables for 400V
class inverters

1–8

SJ300 Inverter Specifications

Geting Started

Tables for 400V class inverters, continued...
Item
SJ300 inverters,
400V models

400V Class Specifications
UL version

750HFU

900HFU

1100HFU

—

1500HFU

CE version

750HFE

900HFE

1100HFE

1320HFE

—

100

125

150

175

200

Applicable motor size *2

HP
kW

Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA

110

132

150

103.2 / 123.8

121.9 / 146.3

150.3 / 180.4

180.1 / 216.1

Rated input voltage

3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

Rated input current (A)

164

Rated output voltage *3

194

239

286

3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

149

176

217

260

Efficiency at 100% rated output, %

95.2

Watt loss,
approximate (W)

at 70% output

2675

3375

3900

4670

at 100% output

3800

4800

5550

6650

Starting torque *6
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7

180% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 130% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
w/o braking unit
with braking unit

10%
45–70%

DC braking
Weight

40–60%

30–50%

25–40%

20–35%

Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
kg / lb

60 / 132

80 / 176

Footnotes for the preceding tables and the table that follows:
Note 1: The protection method conforms to JEM 1030.
Note 2: The applicable motor refers to Hitachi standard 3-phase motor (4-pole). When using
other motors, care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current (50/60 Hz) from
exceeding the rated output current of the inverter.
Note 3: The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases (except when
using the AVR function). In any case, the output voltage cannot exceed the input
power supply voltage.
Note 4: To operate the motor beyond 50/60 Hz, consult the motor manufacturer for the
maximum allowable rotation speed.
Note 5: When SLV is selected, please set the carrier frequency higher than 2.1 kHz.
Note 6: At the rated voltage when using a Hitachi standard 3-phase, 4-pole motor (when
selecting sensorless vector control—SLV).
Note 7: The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque at the
shortest deceleration (stopping from 50/60 Hz as indicated). It is not continuous
regenerative braking torque. The average decel torque varies with motor loss. This
value decreases when operating beyond 50 Hz. If a large regenerative torque is
required, the optional regenerative braking resistor should be used.
Note 8: The frequency command will equal the maximum frequency at 9.8V for input voltage
0 to 10 VDC, or at 19.6 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA. If this characteristic is not
satisfactory for your application, contact your Hitachi sales representative.
Note 9: The storage temperature refers to the short-term temperature during transport.
Note 10: Conforms to the test method specified in JIS C0911 (1984). For the model types
excluded in the standard specifications, contact your Hitachi sales representative.
Note 11: NEMA 1 applies up to 22kW. An optional wire-entry conduit box is required for
30kW to 55kW models to meet NEMA 1 rating.

SJ300 Inverter

General
Specifications

1–9

The following table (continued on next page) applies to all SJ300 inverter models.

General Specifications

Protective enclosure *1, *11

IP20 (NEMA 1)

Control method

Line-to-line sine wave pulse-width modulation (PWM) control

Output frequency range *4

0.1 to 400 Hz

Frequency accuracy

Digital command: ± 0.01% of the maximum frequency
Analog command: ± 0.2% (25°C ± 10°C)

Frequency setting resolution

Digital: ± 0.01 Hz; Analog: (max. frequency)/4000, [O] terminal: 12-bit 0 to 10V;
[OI] terminal: 12-bit, 4-20mA; [O2] terminal: 12-bit -10 to +10V

Volt./Freq. characteristic *5

V/F optionally variable (30 to 400Hz base frequency), V/F control (constant torque,
reduced torque), sensorless vector control

Speed fluctuation

± 0.5% (sensorless vector control)

Overload capacity (output current)

150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 0.5 seconds

Acceleration/deceleration time

0.01 to 3600 sec., (linear curve profiles, accel./decel. selection), two-stage accel./decel.

Input
signal

Operator keypad

Up and Down keys / Value settings

Potentiometer

Analog setting via potentiometer on operator keypad

Freq.
setting

External signal *8 0 to 10 VDC (input impedance 10k Ohms), 4 to 20 mA (input impedance 250 Ohms),
Potentiometer (1k to 2k Ohms, 2W)
Serial port
FW/RV
Run

Output
signal

RS485 interface

Operator panel

Run key / Stop key (change FW/RV by function command)

External signal

FW Run/Stop (NO contact), RV set by terminal assignment (NC/NO),
3-wire input available

Intelligent Input
terminals (assign eight
functions to terminals)

RV (reverse run/stop), CF1~CF4 (multi-speed select), JG (jogging), DB (external DC
braking), SET (set 2nd motor data), 2CH (2-stage accel./decel.), FRS (free-run stop),
EXT (external trip), USP (unattended start protection), CS (commercial power source),
SFT (software lock), AT (analog input voltage/current select), SET3 (set 3rd motor
data), RS (reset inverter), STA (start, 3-wire interface), STP (stop, 3-wire interface),
F/R (FW/RV 3-wire interface), PID (PID ON/OFF), PIDC (PID reset), CAS (control
gain setting), UP (remote control Up function, motorized speed pot.), DWN (remote
control Down function, motorized speed pot.), UDC (remote control data clearing),
OPE (Operator control), SF1-SF7 (Multispeed bits 0-7), OLR (Overload limit change),
TL (torque limit enable), TRQ1 (torque limit selection bit 1, LSB), TRQ2 (torque limit
selection bit 2, MSB), PPI (Proportional / Proportional/Integral mode selection), BOK
(Brake confirmation signal), ORT (Orientation – home search), LAC (LAC: LAD
cancel), PCLR (Position deviation reset), STAT (pulse train position command input
enable), NO (not selected)

Thermistor input

One terminal (PTC characteristics)

Intelligent Output terminals
(assign six functions to five
open collector outputs and
one relay NO-NC contact)

RUN (run signal), FA1 (Frequency arrival type 1 – constant speed), FA2 (Frequency
arrival type 2 – over-frequency), OL (overload advance notice signal 1), OD (Output
deviation for PID control), AL (alarm signal), FA3 (Frequency arrival type 3 – atfrequency), OTQ (over-torque signal), IP (Instantaneous power failure signal), UV
(Under-voltage signal), TRQ (In torque limit), RNT (Run time over), ONT (Power-ON
time over), THM (thermal alarm), BRK (Brake release signal), BER (Brake error
signal), ZS (Zero speed detect), DSE (speed deviation maximum), POK (Positioning
completion), FA4 (Frequency arrival type 4 – over-frequency 2), FA5 (Frequency arrival
type 5 – at-frequency 2), OL2 (Overload notice advance signal 2), Terminals 11-13 or
11-14 automatically configured as AC0-AC2 or AC0-AC3 per alarm code output selection)

Intelligent monitor output
terminals

Analog voltage monitor, analog current monitor (8-bit resolution), and PWM output, on
terminals [AM], [AMI], [FM]

Display monitor

Output frequency, output current, motor torque, scaled value of output frequency, trip
history, I/O terminal condition, input power, output voltage

Getting Started

Item

1–10

SJ300 Inverter Specifications

Geting Started

Item

General Specifications

Other user-settable parameters

V/F free-setting (up to 7 points), frequency upper/lower limit, frequency jump, accel/
decel curve selection, manual torque boost value and frequency adjustment, analog
meter tuning, start frequency, carrier frequency, electronic thermal protection level,
external frequency output zero/span reference, external frequency input bias start/end,
analog input selection, retry after trip, restart after instantaneous power failure, various
signal outputs, reduced voltage start, overload restriction, default value setting (US,
Europe, Japan), deceleration and stop after power failure, AVR function, fuzzy accel/
decel, auto-tuning (on-line/off-line), high-torque multi-operation, automatic energysaving operation

Carrier frequency range

0.5 to 15 kHz

Protective functions

Over-current, overload, braking resistor overload, over voltage, EEPROM error, undervoltage error, CT (current transformer) error, CPU error, external trip, USP error,
ground fault, input over voltage, instantaneous power failure, expansion card 1 error,
expansion card 2 error, inverter thermal trip, phase failure detection, IGBT error,
thermistor error

Environment

Temperature (*9)

Operating (ambient): -10 to 50°C / Storage: -20 to 65°C

Humidity

20 to 90% humidity (non-condensing)

Vibration *10

Models SJ300–004xxx to 220xxx: 5.9 m/s2 (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
Models SJ00–300xx to 1500xxx: 2.94 m/s2 (0.3G), 10 to 55 Hz

Location

Altitude 1,000 m or less, indoors (no corrosive gasses or dust)

Coating color

Gray

Accessories Feedback PCB

SJ-FB (vector control loop speed sensor)

Digital input PCB

SJ-DG (4-digit BCD / 16-bit binary)

Others

EMI filters, input/output reactors, DC reactors, radio noise filters, braking resistors,
braking units, LCR filter, communication cables, factory I/O network interface cards

Operator input devices

Signal Ratings

OPE–SRE (4-digit LED with potentiometer) / OPE–S (4-digit LED w/o potentiometer),
Optional: OPE-SR (4-digit LED with potentiometer, Japanese/English overlay),
SRW–0EX Multilingual operator with copy function (English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Portuguese)

Detailed ratings are in “Specifications of Control and Logic Connections” on page 4–9.

Signal / Contact

Ratings

Built-in power for inputs

24VDC supply, 100 mA maximum

Intelligent (programmable) logic inputs

27VDC maximum, 4.7kΩ input impedance

Intelligent (programmable) logic outputs

Open collector type, 50mA max. ON state current, 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage

Thermistor input

Minimum thermistor power 100mW

PWM output

0 to 10VDC, 1.2 mA max., 50% duty cycle

Voltage analog output

0 to 10VDC, 2 mA max.

Current analog output

4-20 mA, nominal load impedance 250Ω

Analog input, current

4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal

Analog input, voltage

0 to 9.6 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, 12VDC max., input impedance 10 kΩ

+10V analog reference

10VDC nominal, 10 mA maximum

Alarm relay, normally closed contacts

Maximum loads: 250VAC, 2A; 30VDC, 8A resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.6A inductive load
Minimum loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA

Alarm relay, normally open contacts

250VAC, 1A; 30VDC 1A max. resistive load /
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.2A max. inductive load
Min. loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA

SJ300 Inverter

Use the following derating curves to help determine the optimal carrier frequency setting for
your inverter, and to find the output current derating. Be sure to use the proper curve for your
particular SJ300 inverter model number.

SJ300 1.5 to 22 kW at 50 deg. C ambient

004 to 150L

% of Drive’s Rated Amps

100%
95%
90%
85%

185L

80%
75%
70%

220L

65%
0.5

14 15

Carrier Frequency (kHz)

SJ300 30 to 55 kW at 50 deg. C ambient
550L 450L
100%
95%
90%

370L

85%
80%

300L

75%
450L

70%

550L

65%
0.5

Carrier Frequency (kHz)

14 15

Getting Started

The maximum available inverter current output is limited by the carrier frequency and ambient
temperature. The carrier frequency is the inverter’s internal power switching frequency, settable
from 0.5 kHz to 12 kHz. Choosing a higher carrier frequency tends to decrease audible noise,
but it also increases the internal heating of the inverter, thus decreasing (derating) the maximum
current output capability. Ambient temperature is the temperature just outside the inverter
housing—such as inside the control cabinet where the inverter is mounted. A higher ambient
temperature decreases (derates) the inverter’s maximum current output capacity.

% of Drive’s Rated Amps

Derating Curves

1–11

1–12

SJ300 Inverter Specifications

Geting Started

Derating curves, continued...
SJ300 30 to 55 kW at 50 deg. C ambient, continued
015 to 185H

% of Drive’s Rated Amps

100%
95%

370H

90%
450H

85%
80%

220H

75%

300H

70%
65%
60%

550H
0.5

14 15

Carrier Frequency (kHz)

SJ300 75 to 150 kW at 50 deg. C ambient

% of Drive’s Rated Amps

100%
95%

750H

90%
85%
80%

900H

75%
70%

1100H

65%
1320H
1500H

60%
0.5

Carrier Frequency (kHz)

14 15

SJ300 Inverter

1–13

The Purpose of
Motor Speed
Control for
Industry

Hitachi inverters provide accurate speed control for 3-phase AC induction motors. You connect
AC power to the inverter, and connect the inverter to the motor. Many applications can benefit
from the use of variable-speed drives in several ways:
• Energy savings - HVAC
• Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process - textiles and printing presses
• Need to control acceleration and deceleration (torque)
• Sensitive loads - elevators, food processing, pharmaceuticals

What is an
Inverter?

The term inverter and variable-frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable. An
electronic drive for an AC motor controls the motor’s speed by varying the frequency of the
power sent to the motor.
An inverter, in general, is a device that converts DC power to AC power. The figure below
shows how the variable-frequency drive employs an internal inverter. The drive first converts
incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge, creating an internal DC bus voltage. Then
the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the motor. The special inverter
can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the desired motor speed.
Variable-frequency Drive

Power
Input
L1/R

Converter

Inverter

Internal DC Bus

Motor

+
+

L2/S

U/T1

Rectifier

V/T2

L3/T

W/T3
–

The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double-throw switches. In Hitachi inverters,
the switches are actually IGBTs (isolated gate bipolar transistors). Using a commutation
algorithm, the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs ON and OFF at a very high
speed to create the desired output waveforms. The inductance of the motor windings helps
smooth out the pulses.

Torque and
Constant Volts/
Hertz Operation

In the past, AC variable speed drives used an
open loop (scalar) technique to control speed.
The constant-volts-per-hertz operation
maintains a constant ratio between the applied
voltage and the applied frequency. With these
conditions, AC induction motors inherently
delivered constant torque across the operating
speed range. For some applications, this scalar
technique was adequate.

Output
voltage
V
100%
Constant torque

f
Today, with the advent of sophisticated micro0
processors and digital signal processors
100%
Output frequency
(DSPs), it is possible to control the speed and
torque of AC induction motors with unprecedented accuracy. The SJ300 utilizes these devices to perform complex mathematical calculations required to achieve superior performance. The technique is referred to as sensorless
vector control. It allows the drive to continuously monitor its output voltage and current, and
their relationship to each other. From this it mathematically calculates two vector currents. One

Getting Started

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

Geting Started

1–14

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

vector is related to motor flux current, and the other to motor torque current. The ability to
separately control these two vectors is what allows the SJ300 to deliver extraordinary lowspeed performance and speed control accuracy.

Inverter Input and The Hitachi SJ300 Series of inverters includes two sub-groups: the 200V class and the 400V
class inverters. The drives described in this manual may be used in either the United States or
Three-Phase
Europe, although the exact voltage level for commercial power may be slightly different from
Power

country to country. Accordingly, a 200V class inverter requires (nominal) 200 to 240VAC, and
a 400V class inverter requires from 380 to 480VAC. All SJ300 inverters require three-phase
input power, whether 200V or 400V class.
TIP: If your application only has single phase power available, refer to the Hitachi SJ100
Series inverters. SJ100 inverters of 3HP or less can accept single phase input power.

The common terminology for single phase power is Line (L) and Neutral (N). Three-phase
power connections are usually labeled Line 1 (L1), Line 2 (L2) and Line 3 (L3). In any case,
the power source should include a ground connection. That ground connection will need to
connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor frame (see “Wire the Inverter Output to Motor”
on page 2–20).

Inverter Output to The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter’s
output terminals. The output terminals are uniquely
the Motor
labeled (to differentiate them from the input terminals)
with the designations U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This
corresponds to typical motor lead connection designations T1, T2, and T3. It is often not necessary to connect
a particular inverter output to a particular motor lead for
a new application. The consequence of swapping any
two of the three connections is the reversal of the motor
direction. In applications where reversed rotation could
cause equipment damage or personnel injury, be sure to
verify direction of rotation before attempting full-speed
operation. For safety to personnel, you must connect the
motor chassis ground to the ground connection at the
bottom of the inverter housing.

3-Phase
AC Motor
U/T1

V/T2

Earth
GND
W/T3

Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked “Neutral” or “Return.”
The motor represents a balanced “Y” impedance to the inverter, so there is no need for a
separate return. In other words, each of the three “Hot” connections serves also as a return for
the other connections, because of their phase relationship.
The Hitachi inverter is a rugged and reliable device. The intention is for the inverter to assume
the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations. Therefore, this manual
instructs you not to switch OFF power to the inverter while the motor is running (unless it is an
emergency stop). Also, do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring from the inverter
to the motor (except thermal disconnect). Of course, safety-related devices such as fuses must
be in the design to break power during a malfunction, as required by NEC and local codes.

1–15

SJ300 Inverter

Much of this manual is devoted to describing
how to use inverter functions and how to configure inverter parameters. The inverter is microprocessor-controlled, and has many independent
functions. The microprocessor has an on-board
EEPROM for parameter storage. The inverter’s
front panel keypad provides access to all
functions and parameters, which you can access
through other devices as well. The general name
for all these devices is the digital operator, or
digital operator panel. Chapter 2 will show you
how to get a motor running, using a minimal set
of function commands or configuring parameters.

Getting Started

Intelligent
Functions and
Parameters

The optional read/write programmer will let you
read and write inverter EEPROM contents from
the programmer. This feature is particularly
useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a particular inverter’s settings in many other inverters in
assembly-line fashion.

Braking

In general, braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation. So it is associated
with motor deceleration, but may also occur even when the load attempts to drive the motor
faster than the desired speed (overhauling). If you need the motor and load to decelerate
quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting, we recommend installing a braking
resistor. The dynamic braking unit (built into certain SJ300 models) sends excess motor energy
into a resistor to slow the motor and load (see “Introduction” on page 5–2 and “Dynamic
Braking” on page 5–6 for more information). For loads that continuously overhaul the motor
for extended periods of time, the SJ300 may not be suitable (contact your Hitachi distributor).
The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration, which you can set to match the
needs of the application. For a particular inverter, motor, and load, there will be a range of
practically achievable accelerations and decelerations.

Velocity Profiles

The SJ300 inverter is capable of sophisticated speed control. A graphical representation of that capability will help you
understand and configure the associated
parameters. This manual makes use of the
velocity profile graph used in industry
(shown at right). In the example, the acceleration is a ramp to a set speed, and the deceleration is a decline to a stop.

Speed

Fixed speed
Accel

Decel

Velocity Profile

Geting Started

1–16

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

Acceleration and deceleration settings
specify the time required to go from a stop to
maximum frequency (or visa versa). The
Speed
resulting slope (speed change divided by
time) is the acceleration or deceleration. An
increase in output frequency uses the acceleration slope, while a decrease uses the
deceleration slope. The accel or decel time a
particular speed change depends on the
starting and ending frequencies. However,
0
the slope is constant, corresponding to the
full-scale accel or decel time setting.
For example, the full-scale acceleration
setting (time) may be 10 seconds—the time
required to go from 0 to 60 Hz.
The SJ300 inverter can store up to 16 preset
speeds. And, it can apply separate acceleration and deceleration transitions from any
preset to any other preset speed. A multispeed profile (shown at right) uses two or
more preset speeds, which you can select via
intelligent input terminals. This external
control can apply any preset speed at any
time. Alternatively, the selected speed is
infinitely variable across the speed range.
You can use the potentiometer control on the
keypad for manual control. The drive
accepts analog 0-10V signals and 4-20 mA
control signals as well.
The inverter can drive the motor in either
direction. Separate FW and RV commands
select the direction of rotation. The motion
profile example shows a forward motion
followed by a reverse motion of shorter
duration. The speed presets and analog
signals control the magnitude of the speed,
while the FW and RV commands determine
the direction before the motion starts.

Maximum speed

Acceleration

Acceleration (time) setting

Speed
Speed 2
Speed 1

Multi-speed Profile

Speed

Forward move

t
Reverse move

Bi-directional Profile

NOTE: The SJ300 can move loads in both directions. However, it is not designed for use in
servo-type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that determines direction.

SJ300 Inverter

1–17

What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor, compared to alternative
solutions?
A.

The term “inverter” is a little confusing, since we also use “drive” and “amplifier” to
describe the electronic unit that controls a motor. What does “inverter” mean?
A.

A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range particular
to the destination country for that model. The model specifications are on the label on
the side of the inverter. A European 200V class inverter (“EU” marking) has different
parameter settings than a USA 200V class inverter (“US” marking). The initialization
procedure (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9) can set up the
inverter for European or US commercial voltage ranges.

Why doesn’t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter?
A.

Yes. However, note first that the same set of parameters and functions are equally
accessible from either the unit’s keypad or from remote devices. The DOP Professional PC software lets you save or load inverter configurations to or from a disk file.
And, the hand-held digital operator provides hard-wired terminals, a safety requirement for some installations.

Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as “200V class”
instead of naming the actual voltage, such as “230 VAC?”
A.

That depends on the required precision, and the slowest speed the motor must turn
and still deliver torque. The SJ300 inverter will deliver 200% rated torque while
turning the motor at only 0.5 Hz. DO NOT use an inverter if you need the motor to
stop and hold the load position without the aid of a mechanical brake (use a servo or
stepper motion control system).

Does the optional digital operator interface or the PC software (DOP Professional)
provide features beyond what is available from the keypad on the unit?
A.

Yes, sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a “soft-start” device, providing
controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed. Other functions of the
SJ300 may be useful in such applications, as well. However, using a variable speed
drive can benefit many types of industrial and commercial motor applications, by
providing controlled acceleration and deceleration, high torque at low speeds, and
energy savings over alternative solutions.

Can I use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application?
A.

The terms are used somewhat interchangeably in industry. Nowadays, the terms
drive, variable-frequency drive, variable-speed drive, and inverter are generally used
to describe electronic, microprocessor-based motor speed controllers. In the past,
variable speed drive also referred to various mechanical means to vary speed. Amplifier is a term almost exclusively used to describe drives for servo or stepper motors.

Although the SJ300 inverter is a variable speed drive, can I use it in a fixed-speed application?
A.

An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little energy loss, unlike mechanical
or hydraulic speed control solutions. The resulting energy savings can often pay for
the inverter in a relatively short time.

The motor theoretically represents a “balanced Y” load if all three stator windings
have the same impedance. The Y connection allows each of the three wires to alternately serve as input or return on alternate half-cycles.

Does the motor need a chassis ground connection?
A.

Yes, for several reasons. Most importantly, this provides protection in the event of a
short in the motor that puts a hazardous voltage on its housing. Secondly, motors
exhibit leakage currents that increase with aging. Lastly, a grounded chassis generally
emits less electrical noise than an ungrounded one.

Getting Started

Frequently Asked Questions

1–18

Frequently Asked Questions
Q.

What type of motor is compatible with the Hitachi inverters?

Geting Started

Motor type – It must be a three phase AC induction motor. Use an inverter-grade
motor that has 800V insulation for 200V class inverters, or 1600V insulation for
400V class.
Motor size – In practice, it’s better to find the right size motor for your application;
then look for the inverter to match the motor.

NOTE: There may be other factors that will affect motor selection, including heat dissipation,
motor operating speed profile, enclosure type, and cooling method.
Q.

How many poles should the motor have?
A.

Will I be able to add dynamic (resistive) braking to my Hitachi SJ300 drive after the
initial installation?
A.

For new applications, it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a motor/drive
solution. In general, some applications can rely on system losses such as friction to
serve as the decelerating force, or otherwise can tolerate a long decel time. These
applications will not need dynamic braking. However, applications with a combination of a high-inertia load and a required short decel time will need dynamic braking.
This is a physics question that may be answered either empirically or through extensive calculations.

Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Hitachi inverters. How can I know if my application will require any of these options?
A.

Yes. Models SJ300-004XXX through SJ300-110XXX have built-in dynamic braking
units. You can add an external resistor to these models to improve braking performance. Models SJ300-150XXX through SJ300-1500XXX require you to add an
external braking unit. The braking resistor connects to the external braking unit for
those models. More information on dynamic braking is located in Chapter 5.

How will I know if my application will require resistive braking?
A.

Hitachi inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles. The
greater the number of poles, the slower the top motor speed will be, but it will have
higher torque at the base speed.

The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so the
operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected. Some applications are governed
by particular regulatory agencies, and noise suppression is mandatory. In those cases,
the inverter must have the corresponding noise filter installed. Other applications may
not need noise suppression, unless you notice electrical interference with the operation of other devices.

The SJ300 features a PID loop feature. PID loops are usually associated with chemical
processes, heating, or process industries in general. How could the PID loop feature be
useful in my application?
A.

You will need to determine the particular main variable in your application the motor
affects. That is the process variable (PV) for the motor. Over time, a faster motor
speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor speed will. By using the
PID loop feature, the inverter commands the motor to run at the optimal speed
required to maintain the PV at the desired value for current conditions. Using the PID
loop feature will require an additional sensor and other wiring, and is considered an
advanced application.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation
In This Chapter....

2
page

— Orientation to Inverter Features ........................................................ 2
— Basic System Description ................................................................. 5
— Step-by-Step Basic Installation ......................................................... 6
— Powerup Test .................................................................................. 21
— Using the Front Panel Keypad ........................................................ 23

2–2

Orientation to Inverter Features

Orientation to Inverter Features
Unpacking and
Inspection

Please take a few moments to unpack your new SJ300 inverter and perform these steps:
1. Look for any damage that may have occurred during shipping.
2. Verify the contents of the box include:

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

a. One SJ300 inverter
b. One Instruction Manual (supplied by printed book for –FU/–FR models, supplied on
CR-ROM for –FE models)
c. One SJ300 Quick Reference Guide
d. One packet of desiccant—discard (not for human consumption)
3. Inspect the specifications label on the front or side of the inverter. Make sure it matches the
product part number you ordered.

Main Physical
Features

The SJ300 Series inverters vary in size according to the current output rating and motor size for
each model number. All feature the same basic keypad and connector interface for consistent
ease of use. The inverter construction has a heat sink at the back of the housing. The fans
enhance heat sink performance. Mounting holes are pre-drilled in the heat sink for your convenience. Never touch the heat sink during or just after operation; it can be very hot.
The electronics housing and front panel are built onto the front of the heat sink. The front panel
has three levels of physical access designed for convenience and safety:
• First-level access – for basic use of inverter and editing parameters during powered operation (power is ON)
• Second-level access – for wiring the inverter power supply or motor (power is OFF)
• Third-level access – for accessing the expansion bay for adding/removing expansion boards
(power is OFF)
1. First-level Access - View the unit just as it
came from the box as shown. The
OPE-SRE or OPE-S digital operator
keypad comes installed in the inverter. The
four-digit display can show a variety of
performance parameters. LEDs indicate
whether the display units are Hertz, Volts,
Amperes, or kW. Other LEDs indicate
Power (external), and Run/Stop Mode and
Program/Monitor Mode status. Membrane
keys Run and Stop/Reset, and a Min/Max
frequency control knob (OPE-SRE only)
control motor operation. These controls
and indicators are usually the only ones
needed after the inverter installation is
complete.
The FUNC., 1 , 2 , and STR keys
allow an operator to change the inverter’s
functions and parameter values, or to select
the one monitored on the 4-digit display.
Note that some parameters may not be
edited if the inverter is in Run mode.

SJ300 Inverter

Press here and slide cover downward

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2. Second-level access - First, ensure no
power source of any kind is connected to
the inverter. If power has been
connected, wait five minutes after
powerdown and verify the Charge Lamp
indicator is OFF to proceed. Then locate
the recessed retention screw at the
bottom of the main front panel. Use a
small Phillips screwdriver to remove the
screw. Press the two latch release areas
near the “SJ300” label as shown, and
simultaneously slide the lower front
downward to release for removal.

2–3

Retention screw

Notice the large power terminals at the bottom of the wiring area. The rubber grommets
below the power terminals are for wire entry/exit to the power source and motor. Never
operate the inverter with the front panel removed.
The control terminals connect logic or analog signals for control and monitoring of the
inverter. The nearby alarm relay provides both normally-open and normally-closed logic for
interface to an external alarm. The alarm circuit may carry hazardous live voltages even
when the main power to the inverter is OFF. So, never directly touch any terminal or circuit
component.

Logic Connector

Power terminals

Wire entry/exit plate

Charge lamp indicator

WARNING: Be sure to wait five minutes after powerdown and verify the charge lamp indicator is OFF to proceed. Otherwise there is the risk of electric shock.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2–4

Orientation to Inverter Features
3. Third-level access - The SJ300
provides for field installation of
interface circuits. These circuits are
on expansion cards, to be installed in
the expansion bay. To access the
expansion bay, you will need to
remove the upper front panel. Use
the latch to release the digital
operator (the panel filler plate may
remain). Remove the two retention
screws the bottom corners of the
upper front panel. Lift up at the
bottom, then disengage the two
hinge latches at the top.

Latch to release digital operator

Retention screws

The expansion bay has two sites for
adding expansion cards. Each card
connects via the interface connector,
and mounts using three standoff
screw locations. Further details on
accessories are in Chapter 5. You
may also refer to the instruction
manual that comes with each type of
expansion card.

Expansion bay

Expansion connectors

The following sections will describe the system design and guide you through a step-by-step
installation process. After the section on wiring, this chapter will show how to use the front
panel keys to access functions and edit parameters.

SJ300 Inverter

2–5

Basic System Description
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as a breaker or
fuses for safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started,
that’s all you may need for now. But a system can also have a variety of additional components.
Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the inverter’s braking performance. The figure and table below show a system with all the optional components you may
need in your finished application.

Name
L1

Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI

PD(+1)

Inverter
P(+)

N(–)

Breaker / disconnect

A molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground
fault interrupter breaker (GFI), or a fused
disconnect device. NOTE: The installer must
refer to the NEC and local codes to ensure safety
and compliance.

Input side
AC Reactor

Radio noise filter

Electrical noise interference may occur on
nearby equipment such as a radio receiver. This
magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise
(can also be used on output).

EMI filter (for CE
applications, see
Appendix D)

This filter reduces the conducted noise in the
power supply wiring between the inverter and
the power distribution system. Connect it to the
inverter primary (input side).

Radio noise filter
(use in non-CE
applications)

This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from
the main power wires in the inverter input side.

DC link choke

The choke suppresses harmonics generated by
the inverter. However, it will not protect the
input diode bridge rectifier.

Braking resistor

Braking components are useful for increasing
the inverter’s control torque for high duty-cycle
(ON-OFF) applications, and improving the
decelerating capability.

Braking unit

GND
U

Function

Radio noise filter

Electrical noise interference may occur on
nearby equipment such as a radio receiver. This
magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise
(can also be used at input).

Output side
AC reactor

This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor
caused by the inverter’s switching waveform, by
smoothing the waveform to approximate
commercial power quality. It is also useful to
reduce harmonics when wiring from the inverter
to the motor is more than 10m in length.

LCR filter

Sine wave shaping filter for output side.

Motor
Thermal switch

NOTE: Some components are required for regulatory agency compliance (see Chapter 5 and
Appendix D).

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Power source

2–6

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Step-by-Step Basic Installation
This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation:
1. Study the warnings associated with mounting the inverter.
2. Select a suitable mounting location.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

NOTE: If the installation is in an EU country, study the EMC installation guidelines in
Appendix D.
3. Cover the inverter’s top ventilation openings to prevent debris from falling inside.
4. Check the inverter mounting dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations.
5. Study the caution and warning messages associated with wiring the inverter.
6. Connect wiring for the inverter power input.
7. Connect wiring to the motor.
8. Uncover the inverter’s ventilation openings that were covered in Step 3.
9. Perform a powerup test.
10. Make observations and check your installation.

1
Choosing a
Mounting
Location

Step 1: Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter. This is the
time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive rework, equipment
damage, or personal injury.

CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a steel plate. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter. Otherwise, there is
the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter housing,
such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the
specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables). Otherwise, it may fall and cause
injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibration.
Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that does not have direct
exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew condensation, high
levels of dust, corrosive gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt air, etc.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

SJ300 Inverter

2
Ensure Adequate
Ventilation

2–7

Step 2: To summarize the caution messages—you will need to find a solid, non-flammable,
vertical surface that is in a relatively clean and dry environment. In order to ensure enough
room for air circulation around the inverter to aid in cooling, maintain the specified clearance
around the inverter specified in the diagram.

Clear area

10 cm (3.94”)
minimum

Exhaust
Inverter Mounting
and Installation

5 cm (1.97”)
minimum

SJ300

Air intake
10 cm (3.94”)
minimum

CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to provide
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage or fire.

3
Keep Debris Out
of Inverter Vents

Step 3: Before proceeding to the wiring section, it’s a
good time to temporarily cover the inverter’s ventilation openings. Paper and masking tape are all that is
needed. This will prevent harmful debris such as wire
clippings and metal shavings from entering the
inverter during installation.

Cover the fan outlet vents

Please observe this checklist while mounting the
inverter:
1. The ambient temperature must be in the range of
-10 to 40°C. If the range will be up to 50°C
(maximum rating), you will need to refer to
“Derating Curves” on page 1–11.
2. Keep any other heat-producing equipment as far
away from the inverter as possible.
3. When installing the inverter in an enclosure,
maintain the clearance around the inverter and
verify that its ambient temperature is within specification when the enclosure door is closed.
4. Do not open the main front panel door at any time
during operation.

Cover the ventilation slots,
both sides

2–8

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

4
Check Inverter
Dimensions

Step 4: Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter.
Dimensions are given in millimeters (inches) format. Larger models come equipped with
NEMA1 adapter for wire entry for U.S. models only as shown (LFU and HFU).

Model
SJ300 -004LFU

2 − φ 6(0.24)

Exhaust

150(5.91)
130(5.12)

-015LFU/HFE, HFU
-022LFU/HFE, HFU
-037LFU/HFE, HFU

241(9.49)
255(10.04)

-055LFU/HFE, HFU

2 − 6(0.24)
130(5.12)

3 − φ 20(0.79)

Model

140(5.51)

210(8.27)
189(7.44)

Exhaust
2 − φ 7(0.28)

246(9.69)
260(10.24)

SJ300 -075LFU/HFE, HFU
-110LFU/HFE, HFU

7(0.28)

143(5.63)

62(2.44)

Air intake

2 − 7(0.28)
189(7.44)

3 − φ 25(0.98)
Air intake

7(0.28)
82(3.23)
170(6.69)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

-007LFU/HFE, HFU

203(7.99)

NOTE: Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen
due to vibration.

SJ300 Inverter

2–9

Dimensional drawings, continued...
Model

2 − φ 7(0.28)
250(9.84)
229(9.02)

Exhaust

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

376(14.80)
390(15.35)

SJ300 -150LFU/HFE, HFU
-185LFU/HFE, HFU
-220LFU/HFE, HFU

2 − 7(0.28)
229(9.02)

4 − φ 29.5(1.16)

190(7.48)

Air intake

9.5(0.37)
83(3.27)

244(9.61)

2 - f 10(0.39)

Model

Exhaust

2 - 10(0.39)

130(5.12)

540(21.26)
100(3.94)

510(20.08)

SJ300 -300LFU/HFE, HFU

265(10.43)
74(2.91)
Optional adapterfor NEMA1
rating

307(12.09)

195(7.68)

310(12.20)

Air intake

2–10

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Dimensional drawings, continued...

Model

2 − φ 12(0.47)

Exhaust

SJ300 -370LFU/HFE, HFU
-450LFU/HFE, HFU

2 − 12(0.47)
300(11.81)
386(15.20)

110(4.33)

80(3.15)

550(21.65)

520(20.47)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

-550HFE, HFU

Air intake

Optional adapter 90(3.54)
for NEMA1 rating
250(9.84)

390(15.35)

Model

2 − φ 12(0.47)

Exhaust

2 − 12(0.47)
380(14.96)

100(3.94)

70(2.76)

700(27.56)

670(26.38)

SJ300 -550LFU

Optional adapter 104(4.09)
for NEMA1 rating

476(18.74)

250(9.84)

480(18.90)

Air intake

SJ300 Inverter

2–11

Dimensional drawings, continued...

Exhaust

2 − φ 12(0.47)
Model

670(26.38)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

700(27.56)

SJ300 -750HFE, HFU
-900HFE, HFU

270(10.63)

2 − 12(0.47)
300(11.81)
390(15.34)

Air intake

2–12

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Dimensional drawings, continued...

2 − φ 12(0.47)

Exhaust

Model
SJ300 -1100HFE, HFU
-1320HFE

710(27.95)

740(29.13)

2 − 12(0.47)

380(14.96)
480(18.90)

270(10.63)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

-1500HFU

Air intake

SJ300 Inverter

5
Prepare for
Wiring

2–13

Step 5: The wiring enters the inverter through
the entry/exit plate as shown to the right. The
rubber grommets have a solid, thin membrane,
so that unused ones continue to seal the opening.
To create an opening, use a sharp knife and
carefully cut an “X” in the center of the
grommet as shown. Be especially careful to
avoid cutting into the thick outer ring, so that the
wiring will have a cushion from contacting the
metal plate.
Cut grommet(s) for
use as shown

Before proceeding, please study the caution and warning messages below.
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.

WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–1500H.

WARNING: “A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire” or equivalent.

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix L.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock
and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel. Otherwise,
there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF. Otherwise,
you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is not
mounted according the instructions given in this manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

NOTE: Some inverter models will have a
wiring box for NEMA rating compliance. Make
sure the wire entry to the NEMA box also has
protective cushion from chaffing of insulation.

2–14

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Determining Wire This section includes tables for 200V class and 400V class inverters (on the next page). The
following notes will help you read the tables in this section:
and Fuse Sizes
• Locate the row corresponding to the motor size and particular inverter in your application.
The maximum motor current determines the recommended wire sizes.
• The length column specifies that some inverters can optionally use a smaller wire gauge if
the wires are shorter than 10m and the inverter is located in an enclosure.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

• Power Lines columns include wires connecting to terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, P, PD, and N].
Only power input and motor leads will be fused: [R, S, T, U, V, and W]. The breaker ratings
(GFI—ground fault interrupter) are slightly higher than fuse ratings to allow for nominal
surges without tripping.
• The chassis ground columns list the Hitachi-recommended AWG and the minimal AWG for
UL conformity.
• The optional external braking resistor wiring only applies to a few models that have a builtin braking unit. The other models use an optional external braking unit.
• Parallel wires increase effective wire gauge, and are denoted by “||” in the tables.
• Signal Lines, not listed in these tables, connect to the removable logic connector. The recommended wire gauge for all wiring to the logic connector is 28 AWG (0.75 mm2). Be sure to
use shielded wire for any analog signals.
Wiring *1

Motor
Output

Power Lines *3

200V
Inverter
Models

Chassis Ground

AWG

mm2

Fuse
(ULrated,
class J,
600V)

SJ300–004LFU

1.25

10A

0.75

SJ300–007LFU

1.25

10A

1.5

SJ300–015LFU

10A

2.2

SJ300–022LFU

3.7

SJ300–037LFU

3.5

7.5

5.5

SJ300–055LFU

7.5

SJ300–075LFU

Breaker
AWG, AWG,
(GFI
rec.
UL
type) *2

Brake Res.

mm2

AWG

mm2

1.25

15A

1.25

15A

20A

1.25

20A

30A

3.5

5.5

30A

50A

5.5

40A

60A

5.5

SJ300–110LFU

60A

75A

5.5

SJ300–150LFU

80A

100A

—

18.5

SJ300–185LFU

4 || 4

14 || 14

100A

—

SJ300–220LFU

4 || 4

14 || 14

125A

150A

—

SJ300–300LFU

2 || 2

22 || 22

150A

200A

—

SJ300–370LFU

2 || 2

30 || 30

175A

225A

1/0

—

SJ300–450LFU

1 || 1
(75°C)

38 || 38

225A

3/0

—

SJ300–550LFU

2/0 || 2/0

60 || 60

250A

350A

3/0

—

1/2

0.4

* See notes for wiring tables on the following page.

2–15

SJ300 Inverter

Determining wire and fuse sizes, continued...
Wiring *1

Motor
Output

Power Lines *3

400V
Inverter
Models

Chassis Ground

mm2

SJ300–007HFU/E

1.25

10A

1.5

SJ300–015HFU/E

10A

2.2

SJ300–022HFU/E

10A

0.75

Breaker
AWG, AWG,
( GFI
rec.
UL
type) *2

mm2

AWG

mm2

1.25

4.0

SJ300–040HFU/E

15A

1.25

7.5

5.5

SJ300–055HFU/E

15A

30A

7.5

SJ300–075HFU/E

3.5

20A

30A

3.5

SJ300–110HFU/E

5.5

30A

50A

5.5

SJ300–150HFU/E

40A

60A

—

18.5

SJ300–185HFU/E

50A

60A

—

SJ300–220HFU/E

60A

75A

—

SJ300–300HFU/E

70A

100A

—

SJ300–370HFU/E

4 || 4

14 || 14

90A

100A

—

SJ300–450HFU/E

1 (75°C)

125A

150A

—

SJ300–550HFU/E

2 || 2

22 || 22

125A

175A

—

100

SJ300–750HFU/E

1 || 1
(75°C)

30 || 30

175A

225A

1/0

—

125

SJ300–900HFU/E

1 || 1
(75°C)

38 || 38

200A

225A

3/0

—

150

110

SJ300–1100HFU/E

1/0 || 1/0

50 || 50

250A

350A

3/0

—

175

132

SJ300–1320HFE

3/0 || 3/0

80 || 80

300A

350A

4/0

100

—

200

150

SJ300–1500HFU

3/0 || 3/0

80 || 80

300A

350A

4/0

100

—

Note 1: Field wiring must be made by a UL-listed and CSA certified ring lug terminal
connector sized for the wire gauge involved. The connector must be fixed by using
the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
Note 2: Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used.
Note 3: Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66 ft (20m).

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

AWG

Fuse
(ULrated,
class J,
600V)

Brake Res.

2–16

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Terminal
Dimensions and
Torque Specs

The following tables list the screw size of terminal and recommended torque for tightening for
each of the SJ300 inverter models (400V models are on the next page).

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below. Check for
any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

Input
Voltage

200V

Motor
Output

200V
Inverter Models

Screw size
of terminal

Ring lug connector *1

Torque

(AWG-bolt)

(mm2–bolt)

ft-lbs

(N-m)

20–#10

1.25–4

1.1

1.5

SJ300-007LFU

20–#10

1.25–4

1.1

1.5

SJ300-015LFU

14–#10

2–4

1.1

1.5

2.2

SJ300-022LFU

14–#10

2–4

1.1

1.5

3.7

SJ300-037LFU

10–#10

3.5–4

1.1

1.5

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055LFU

8–#12

5.5–5

1.8

2.5

7.5

SJ300-075LFU

8–#12

8–5

1.8

2.5

SJ300-110LFU

4–1/4

14–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-150LFU

2–1/4

22–6

3.6

4.9

18.5

SJ300-185LFU

4–1/4

14–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-220LFU

4–5/16

14–8

6.5

8.8

SJ300-300LFU

2–5/16

22–8

6.5

8.8

SJ300-370LFU

1–5/16

30–8

6.5

8.8

SJ300-450LFU

M10

1/0–1/2

38–10

10.1

13.7

SJ300-550LFU

M10

2/0–1/2

60–10

10.1

13.7

1/2

0.4

SJ300-004LFU

0.75

1.5

Note 1: The recommended ring lug connector listing consists of wire size – screw size
format. The wire sizes are in AWG or mm2 format. For AWG wire sizes, bolt sizes
for the ring lug centers are: #10, #12, 1/4”, 5/16”, and 1/2”. For metric wire sizes,
bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are: 6 = 6M, 8 = 8M, 10 = 10M.
TIP: AWG = American Wire Gauge. Smaller numbers represent increasing wire thickness.
kcmil = 1,000 circular mils, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
mm2 = square millimeters, a measure of wire cross-sectional area

2–17

SJ300 Inverter

Terminal dimensions and torque specs, continued...

Input
Voltage

400V
Inverter Models

Screw size
of terminal

Ring lug connector *1

Torque

(AWG-bolt)

(mm2–bolt)

ft-lbs

(N-m)

20–#10

1.25–4

1.1

1.5

SJ300-015HFU/E

14–#10

2–4

1.1

1.5

2.2

SJ300-022HFU/E

14–#10

2–4

1.1

1.5

0.75

SJ300-007HFU/E

1.5

3
5

4.0

SJ300-040HFU/E

14–#10

2–4

1.1

1.5

7.5

5.5

SJ300-055HFU/E

14–#12

2–5

1.8

2.5

7.5

SJ300-075HFU/E

10–#12

3.5–5

1.8

2.5

SJ300-110HFU/E

8–1/4

5.5–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-150HFU/E

6–1/4

8–6

3.6

4.9

18.5

SJ300-185HFU/E

4–1/4

14–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-220HFU/E

4–1/4

14–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-300HFU/E

2–1/4

22–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-370HFU/E

4–1/4

14–6

3.6

4.9

SJ300-450HFU/E

1/0–5/16

38–8

6.5

8.8

SJ300-550HFU/E

2–5/16

22–8

6.5

8.8

100

SJ300-750HFU/E

1–1/2

30–10

6.5

8.8

125

SJ300-900HFU/E

M10

1/0–1/2

38–10

10.1

13.7

150

110

SJ300-110HFU/E

M10

1/0–1/2

50–10

10.1

13.7

175

132

SJ300-1320HFE

M10

2/0–1/2

80–10

10.1

13.7

200

150

SJ300-1500HFU

M10

2/0–1/2

80–10

10.1

13.7

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

400V

Motor
Output

2–18

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Wire the Inverter
Input to a Supply

Step 6: In this step, you will connect wiring to
the input of the inverter. All models have the
same power connector terminals [R(L1)],
[S(L2)], and [T(L3)] for three-phase input. The
three phases may be connected in any order, as
they are isolated from chassis ground and do
not determine motor direction of rotation.
Please refer to the specifications label (on
the front or side of the inverter) for the
acceptable input voltage ranges!
NOTE: The wiring example to the right shows
an SJ300-037LFU inverter. The terminal
locations will vary, depending on the inverter
model (see below). Note the use of ring lug
connectors for a secure connection.

Please use the terminal arrangement below
corresponding to your inverter model.
–004LFU, –007 to –055LFU/ HFE, HFU

R0
(R0)

T0
(T0)

(L1)

(L2)

(L3)

(T1)

(T2)

(T3)

(G)

R0
(R0)

T0
(T0)

PD P

N RB

(+1)

(–)

(+)

(RB)

Jumper
bar

–075LFU/HFE, HFU
–110LFU/HFE, HFU

(L1)

(L2)

(L3)

(T1)

(T2)

(T3)

(G)

PD P

N RB

(+1)

(–)

(+)

(RB)

Jumper
bar

–150LFU, 185LFU, –300LFU, –370LFU,
–150 to –550HFE, HFU

(G)

(L1)

(L2)

R0
(R0)

T PD P
(L3)

(+1)

(+)

T0
(T0)

(–)

(T1)

(T2)

(T3)

R0
(R0)

T0
(T0)

(G)

Jumper
bar

–220LFU, –450LFU, –550LFU,
–750 to –1100HFE, HFU
–1320HFE, –1500HFU

(L1)

(L2)

T PD P
(L3)

(+1)

(+)

(–)

(T1)

(T2)

(T3)

Jumper
bar
(G)

(G)

SJ300 Inverter

2–19

NOTE: An inverter powered by a portable or emergency diesel power generator may result in a
distorted power waveform, overheating the generator. In general, the generator capacity should
be at least five times that of the inverter (kVA).
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications:
• Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz
• Three phase 380 to 480V 50/60Hz

CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals. Otherwise,
there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and/or fire.
Power Input

Power Output

NOTE:
L1, L2, L3:

Three-phase 200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50/60 Hz

CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply:
Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFI-filter) and shielded (screened) motor
cables have a higher leakage current toward Earth GND. Especially at the moment of switching
ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers. Because of the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off function
through small amounts of DC current. Please observe the following:
• Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault interrupter
breakers with higher trigger current.
• Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers.
• Ground fault interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an
absolute protection against electric shock.
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the inverter.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must have the capacity for rated current
and voltage). Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single phase power. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire.

2–20

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

7
Wire the Inverter
Output to Motor

Step 7: The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual. However, it must be
a three-phase AC induction motor. It should also come with a chassis ground lug. If the motor
does not have three power input leads, stop the installation and verify the motor type. Other
guidelines for wiring the motor include:
• Use an inverter-grade motor for maximum motor life (1600V insulation).
• For standard motors, use an output filter if the wiring between the inverter and motor
exceeds 10 meters in length.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Simply connect the motor to the terminals
[U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3] indicated on
the inverter to the right. This is a good time
to connect the chassis ground lug on the
drive as well. The motor chassis ground
must also connect to the same point. Use a
star ground (single-point) arrangement, and
never daisy-chain the grounds (point-topoint).
Use the same wire gauge on the motor and
chassis ground wiring as you used on the
power input wiring in the previous step.
After completing the wiring:
• Check the mechanical integrity of each
wire crimp and terminal connection.
• Replace the front panel and secure the
retention screw firmly.

To Power
Source

Logic Control
Wiring

8
Uncover the
Inverter Vents

To Chassis
Ground

To Motor

After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter, you may need to wire
the logic signal connector for your application. For new inverter users/applications, we highly
recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without adding any logic
control wiring. Then you will be ready to set the required parameters for logic control as
covered in Chapter 4, Operations and Monitoring.
Step 8: After mounting and wiring the inverter,
remove any protective material covering the
inverter ventilation openings from Step 3. This
includes covers over the side ventilation ports
as well as the fan outlet area.

Uncover the fan outlet vents

CAUTION: Failure to remove all vent opening
covers before electrical operation may result in
damage to the inverter.

Uncover the ventilation slots,
both sides

SJ300 Inverter

2–21

Powerup Test
9
Perform the
Powerup Test

Step 9: After wiring the inverter and motor, you’re ready to do a powerup test. The procedure
that follows is designed for the first-time use of the drive. Please verify the following conditions
before conducting the powerup test:
• You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step.
• The inverter is new, and is securely mounted to a non-flammable vertical surface
• The inverter is connected to a power source and motor.
• The power supply is reliable, and the motor is a known working unit, and the motor
nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings.
• The motor is securely mounted, and is not connected to any load.

Goals for the
Powerup Test

If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step, please take a moment to take any
measures necessary to reach this basic starting point. The specific goals of this powerup test
are:
1. Verify that the wiring to the power supply and motor is correct.
2. Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible.
3. Give a brief introduction to the use of the built-in operator keypad.
The powerup test gives you an important starting point to ensure a safe and successful application of the Hitachi inverter. We highly recommend performing this test before proceeding to the
other chapters in this manual.

Pre-test and
Operational
Precautions

The following instructions apply to the powerup test, or to any time the inverter is powered and
operating. Please study the following instructions and messages before proceeding with the
powerup test.
1. The power supply must have fusing suitable for the load. Check the fuse size chart
presented in Step 5, if necessary.
2. Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary.
However, do not turn OFF power to the inverter during its operation unless it is an
emergency.
3. Turn the inverter’s front panel potentiometer (if it exists) to the MIN position (fully counterclockwise).
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed.
Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the
inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of injury.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

• No additional wiring of inverter connectors or terminals has been done.

2–22

Powerup Test

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage and/or injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test. Otherwise, there is the
danger of equipment damage.
• Is the shorting bar between the [P] and [PD] terminals installed? DO NOT power or
operate the inverter if the jumper is removed.
• Is the direction of the motor rotation correct?
• Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration?
• Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected?
• Were there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise?

Powering the
Inverter

If you have followed all the steps, cautions and warnings up to this point, you’re ready to apply
power. After doing so, the following events should occur:
• The POWER LED will illuminate.
• The numeric (7-segment) LEDs will display a test pattern, then stop at 0.0.
• The Hz LED will be ON.
If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs, press the STOP key. Only
if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy.
NOTE: If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed, the LEDs (other than the
POWER LED) may illuminate differently than as indicated above. If necessary, you can initialize all parameters to the factory default settings. See “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–9.

SJ300 Inverter

2–23

Using the Front Panel Keypad
Front Panel
Introduction

Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure below.

Parameter Display

Alarm LED

Run/Stop LED

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

RUN
PRG

Hz
V
A

Run Key Enable LED
STOP

RUN

RESET
MIN

Run Key
FUNC

MAX

STR

Display Units LEDs
Hertz
Volts or Amperes
(kW = both ON)
Percent
Potentiometer Enable LED
Potentiometer

Stop/Reset Key

The display is used in programming the inverter’s parameters, as well as monitoring specific
parameter values during operation. Many functions are applicable only during the initial installation, while others are more useful for maintenance or monitoring.

Parameter Editing The front panel controls and indicators are described as follows:
and Controls
• Run/Stop LED – ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque,
and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
• Program/Monitor LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing
(Program Mode). It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode). However, the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the
value of parameter D001. (When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via
A001=02, you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using
the Up/Down keys.)
• Run Key Enable LED – is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key, OFF
when the Run key is disabled.
• Run Key – Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first). Parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD
or Run REV command.
• Stop/Reset Key – Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the programmed
deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
• Potentiometer (OPE–SRE only) – allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when
the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control.
• Potentiometer Enable LED – ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry.
(OPE–SRE only).
• Parameter Display – a 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
• Display Units: Hertz/Volts/Amperes/kW/% – These LEDs indicate the units associated
with the parameter display. When the display is monitoring a parameter, the appropriate
LED is ON. In the case of kW units, both Volts and Amperes LEDs will be ON. An easy
way to remember this is that kW = (V x A)/1000.
• Power LED – This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
• Alarm LED – This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter. Clearing
the alarm will turn this LED OFF again. See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Program/Monitor LED

Power LED

2–24

Using the Front Panel Keypad

• Function Key – This key is used to navigate
through the lists of parameters and functions
for setting and monitoring parameter values.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

• Up/Down ( 1 , 2 ) Keys – Use these
keys alternately to move up or down the lists
of parameter and functions shown in the
display, and increment/decrement values.
• Store ( STR ) Key – When the unit is in
Program Mode and the operator has edited a
parameter value, press the Store key to write
the new value to the EEPROM. This parameter is then displayed at powerup by default.
If you want to change the powerup default,
navigate to a new parameter value and press
the Store key.

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

RUN
PRG

Hz
V
A

STOP

RUN

RESET
MIN

FUNC

Function
key

Up/Down
keys

MAX

STR

Store
key

Keys, Modes, and Purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change modes and parameters. The term function
applies to both monitoring modes and parameters. These are all accessible through function
Parameters
codes that are primarily 3 or 4-character codes. The various functions are separated into related
groups identifiable by the left-most character, as the table shows.
Function
Group

Type (Category) of Function

Mode to Access

PGM LED
Indicator
or

“D”

Monitoring functions

Monitor

“F”

Main profile parameters

Program

“A”

Standard functions

Program

“B”

Fine tuning functions

Program

“C”

Intelligent terminal functions

Program

“H”

Motor constant functions

Program

“P”

Expansion card functions

Program

“U”

User-selectable menu functions

Monitor

“E”

Error codes

—

For example, function “A004” is the base frequency setting for the motor, typically 50 Hz or
60 Hz. To edit the parameter, the inverter must be in Program Mode (PGM LED will be ON).
You use the front panel keys to first select the function code “A004.” After displaying the value
for “A004,” use the Up/Down ( 1 or 2 ) keys to edit the value.
NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d”, meaning the same as the
upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).
The inverter automatically switches into Monitor
Mode when you access “D” Group functions. It
switches into Program Mode when you access
any other group, because they all have editable
parameters. Error codes use the “E” Group, and
appear automatically when a fault event occurs.
Refer to “Monitoring Trip Events, History, &
Conditions” on page 6–5 for error code details.

MONITOR

“D” Group

PROGRAM

“A” Group
“B” Group
“C” Group
“H” Group
“P” Group
“U” Group
“F” Group

SJ300 Inverter

2–25

Keypad
The SJ300 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters. Chapter 3
Navigational Map will cover these in detail, but you need to access just a few items to perform the powerup test.
The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes to allow programming
and monitoring with only a 4-digit display and a few keys and LEDs. So, it is important to
become familiar with the basic navigational map of parameters and functions in the diagram
below. You can later use this map as a reference.

Monitor Mode

Program Mode
Select Parameter

d o90

D002–D090

0.00

1
FUNC.

STR

Po49
2

Uo01

d 001
FUNC.

Po49

U– – –
1

1
FUNC.

P–––
1

Increment/
decrement
value

1
FUNC.

PRG LED

c1 23

0.00
FUNC.

1
FUNC.

F o01
2

PRG LED
FUNC.

FUNC.

1 2 3.4

2
STR

b1 26

F o04
1

Edit

c o01

A– – –

D001

b o01
1

ao01
2

Write
data to
EEPROM,
store as
powerup
default

a1 3 2
1

ho01
1

b–––

Edit

ho7 2

C–––

Increment/
decrement
value

Po01
1

H– – –

Write data
to F001,
store D001
as powerup default

FUNC.

Store as
powerup
default

STR

Uo1 2
1

d o01
1

FUNC.

Edit Parameter

Return to
parameter
list

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Select Function

Display Data

2–26

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Selecting
Functions and
Editing Parameters

In order to run the motor for the powerup test, this section will show how to:
• select the inverter’s maximum output frequency to the motor
• select the keypad potentiometer as the source of motor speed command
• select the keypad as the source of the RUN command
• set the number of poles for the motor

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

• enable the RUN command
The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use. Each table uses
the previous table’s final state as the starting point. Therefore, start with the first and continue
programming until the last one. If you get lost or concerned that some of the other parameters
settings may be incorrect, refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
Setting the Motor Base Frequency -The motor is designed to operate at a specific AC
frequency. Most commercial motors are designed for 50/60 Hz operation. First, check the
motor specifications. Then follow the steps in the table below to verify the setting or correct for
your motor. DO NOT set it for greater than 50/60 Hz unless the motor manufacturer specifically approves operation at the higher frequency.
Action

Display

Func./Parameter

key.

d 001

Monitor functions

Press the 1 or 2 keys until ->

A– – –

“A” Group selected

A001

First “A” parameter

A003

Base frequency setting

Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 1 key twice.
Press the

FUNC

key.

Default value for base frequency
US = 60 Hz, Europe = 50 Hz

50
Press the 1 or 2 key as needed.
Press the STR key.

60
A003

Set to your motor specs (your
display may be different)
Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

TIP: If you need to scroll through a function or parameter list, press and hold the 1 or 2
key to auto-increment through the list.

SJ300 Inverter

2–27

Select the Potentiometer for Speed Command - The motor speed may be controlled from the
following sources:
• Potentiometer on front panel keypad (if present)
• Control terminals
• Remote panel
Then follow the steps in the table below to select the potentiometer for the speed command (the
table resumes action from the end of the previous table).

Press the 2 key twice.
Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 2 key.
Press the STR key.

Display

A001

Func./Parameter
Speed command source setting

0 = potentiometer
1 = control terminals (default)
2 = keypad

0 = potentiometer (selected)

A001

Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

Select the Keypad for the RUN Command - The RUN command causes the inverter to accelerate the motor to the selected speed. You can program the inverter to respond to either the
control terminal signal or the keypad RUN key. Follow the steps in the table below to select the
front panel RUN key as the source for the RUN Command (the table resumes action from the
end of the previous table).
Action
Press the 1 key.

Display

A002

Func./Parameter
Run command source

1 = control terminals (default)
2 = keypad

Press the 1 key.

2 = keypad (selected)

Press the STR key.

A002

Press the

FUNC

key.

Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

NOTE: When you press the STR key in the last step above (and the display = 02), the Run
Enable LED above the RUN switch on the keypad will turn ON. This is normal, and does not
mean the motor is trying to run. It means that the RUN key is now enabled.
DO NOT press the RUN key at this time—finish out the programming exercise first.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Action

2–28

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Configure the Inverter for the Number of Motor Poles- The number of magnetic poles of a
motor is determined by the motor’s internal winding arrangement. The specifications label on
the motor usually indicates its number of poles. For proper operation, verify the parameter
setting matches the motor poles. Many industrial motors have four poles, corresponding to the
default setting in the inverter.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Follow the steps in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change it if necessary
(the table resumes action from the end of the previous table.)
Action
Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 1 key three times.
Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 1 key five times.
Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 1 or 2 key as needed.
Press the STR key.

Display

Func./Parameter

A– – –

“A” Group selected

h– – –

“H” Group selected

h001

First “H” parameter

h004

Motor poles parameter

2 = 2 poles
4 = 4 poles (default)
6 = 6 poles
8 = 8 poles

Set to match your motor (your
display may be different)

h004

Stores parameter, returns to “H”
Group list

This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter. You are almost ready to run the motor
for the first time!
TIP: If you became lost during any of these steps, first observe the state of the PRG LED. Then
study the “Keypad Navigational Map” on page 2–25 to determine the current state of the
keypad controls and display. As long as you do not press the STR key, no parameters will be
changed by keypad entry errors. Note that power cycling the inverter will not cause it to reset to
a particular programming state.
The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display. Then
you will be ready to run the motor.

SJ300 Inverter

Monitoring
Parameters with
the Display

After using the keypad for parameter
editing, it’s a good idea to switch the
inverter from Program Mode to Monitor
Mode. This will turn out the PRG LED, and
the Hertz, Volt, Ampere, or % LED
indicates the display units.

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

RUN
PRG

2–29

Hz
V
A

STOP

RUN

RESET
MIN

STR

For the powerup test, monitor the motor speed indirectly by viewing the inverter’s output
frequency. The output frequency must not be confused with base frequency (50/60 Hz) of the
motor, or the carrier frequency (switching frequency of the inverter, in the kHz range). The
monitoring functions are in the “D” list, located near the top left of the diagram in the “Keypad
Navigational Map” on page 2–25.
Output frequency (speed) monitor - Resuming the keypad programming from the previous
table, follow the steps in the table below.
Action
Press the

FUNC

key.

Press the 1 key.
Press the

FUNC

key.

Display

Func./Parameter

h– – –

“H” Group selected

d 001

Output frequency selected

0.00

Output frequency displayed

When the d 01 function code appeared, the PRG LED went OFF. This confirms the inverter is
no longer in programming mode, even while you are selecting the particular monitoring parameter. After pressing the FUNC key, the display shows the current speed (is zero at this point).

Running the
Motor

If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point, you’re ready to run the motor!
First, review this checklist:
1. Verify the Power LED is ON. If not, check the power connections.
2. Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON. If not, review the programming steps to find the
problem.
3. Verify the PRG LED is OFF. If it is ON, review the instructions above.
4. Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load.
5. Turn the potentiometer to the MIN position (completely counterclockwise).
6. Now, press the RUN key on the keypad. The RUN LED will turn ON.
7. Slowly increase the potentiometer setting in clockwise fashion. The motor should start
turning when the indicator is in the 9:00 position and beyond.
8. Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

FUNC

MAX

2–30

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Step 10: Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first running
the motor.

Error Codes - If the inverter displays an error code (LED format is “Exx”), see “Monitoring
Powerup Test
Observations and Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 to interpret and clear the error.
Summary
Acceleration and Deceleration - The SJ300 inverter has programmable acceleration and

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

deceleration values. The test procedure left these at the default value, 10 seconds. You can
observe this by setting the potentiometer at about half speed before running the motor. Then
press RUN, and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed. Press the STOP key to
see a 5 second deceleration to a stop.
State of Inverter at Stop - If you adjust the motor’s speed to zero, the motor will slow to a near
stop, and the inverter turns the outputs OFF. The high-performance SJ300 can rotate at a very
slow speed with high torque output, but not zero (must use servo systems with position
feedback for that feature). This characteristic means you must use a mechanical brake for some
applications.
Interpreting the Display - First, refer to the output frequency display readout. The maximum
frequency setting (parameter A004) defaults to 50 Hz or 60 Hz (Europe and United States,
respectively) for your application.
Example: Suppose a 4-pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation, so the inverter is configured to
output 60 Hz at full scale. Use the following formula to calculate the RPM.

Frequency × 60
Frequency × 120
60 × 120
RPM = ---------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------- = --------------------- = 1800RPM
Pairs of poles
# of poles
4
The theoretical speed for the motor is 1800 RPM (synchronous speed). However, an induction
motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different speed. This difference
is called slip. So it’s common to see a rated speed of approximately 1750 RPM on a 60 Hz, 4pole motor. Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed, you can see the difference between the
inverter output frequency and the actual motor speed. The slip increases slightly as the motor’s
load increases. This is why the inverter output value is called “frequency,” since it is not exactly
equal to motor speed. You can program the inverter to display output frequency in units more
directly related to the load speed by entering a constant (discussed more in depth on
page 3–41).
Run/Stop Versus Monitor/Program Modes –
The Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode,
and OFF in Stop Mode. The Program LED is ON
when the inverter is in Program Mode, and OFF for
Monitor Mode. All four mode combinations are
possible. The diagram to the right depicts the
modes and the mode transitions via keypad.

STOP

RESET

Run

RUN

Stop

FUNC.

Monitor

Program

NOTE: Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternate Run/Program modes;
the device is in either one mode or the other. In the Hitachi inverter, however, Run Mode alternates with Stop Mode, and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This arrangement
lets you program some values while the inverter is operating—providing flexibility for maintenance personnel.

Configuring
Drive Parameters
In This Chapter....

3
page

— Choosing a Programming Device ..................................................... 2
— Using Keypad Devices...................................................................... 3
— “D” Group: Monitoring Functions ...................................................... 6
— “F” Group: Main Profile Parameters.................................................. 8
— “A” Group: Standard Functions ......................................................... 9
— “B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions .................................................. 29
— “C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions ....................................... 47
— “H” Group: Motor Constants Functions ........................................... 62
— “P” Group: Expansion Card Functions ............................................ 65
— “U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions .................................. 67
— Programming Error Codes .............................................................. 68

3–2

Choosing a Programming Device

Choosing a Programming Device
Introduction

Hitachi variable frequency drives (inverters) use the latest electronics technology for getting the
right AC waveform to the motor at the right time. The benefits are many, including energy
savings and higher machine output or productivity. The flexibility required to handle a broad
range of applications has required ever more configurable options and parameters—inverters
are now a complex industrial automation component. And this can make a product seem difficult to use, but the goal of this chapter is to make this easier for you.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

As the powerup test in Chapter 2 demonstrated, you do not have to program very many parameters to run the motor. In fact, most applications would benefit only from programming just a
few, specific parameters. This chapter will explain the purpose of each set of parameters, and
help you choose the ones that are important to your application.
If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor, finding the right parameters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization. Therefore, it is okay to begin running the
motor with a loosely tuned system. By making specific, individual changes and observing their
effects, you can achieve a finely tuned system. And, the SJ300 Series inverters have a built-in
auto-tuning algorithm to set certain motor parameters.

Inverter
Programming
Keypads

The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter’s capabilities. Every
function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad. All keypads have the same
basic layout, but with different features. The OPE–SRE has a potentiometer knob for frequency
setting input. The SRW–0EX Read/write Copy Unit has the ability to upload (copy) or
download (write) all inverter parameter data to/from memory in the copy unit itself. This unit is
useful in transferring one inverter’s settings to another.
The following table shows various programming options, the features unique to each device,
and the cables required.

Device

Inverter keypad,
U.S. version

Part
Number

OPE–SRE

Parameter
Access

Parameter
setting
storage

Cables (for optional
external mounting)
Part
number

Length

ICS–1

1 meter

ICS–3

3 meters

Monitor and
program

EEPROM in
inverter

Inverter keypad, OPE–S
European version

Monitor and
program

EEPROM in
inverter

Use same two cables as
above

Read/write Copy SRW–0EX
Unit with Keypad

Monitor and
program; read or
write all data

EEPROM in
inverter or in
copy unit

Use same two cables as
above

TIP: Other special-purpose keypads are available, such as ones to serve the needs of the HVAC
market (heating, ventilating & air conditioning). Please contact your Hitachi distributor for
details.

SJ300 Inverter

3–3

Using Keypad Devices
Inverter Front
Panel Keypad

The SJ300 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both monitoring and
programming parameters. The keypad layout (OPE–SRE) is shown below. All other programming devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function.
Parameter Display

Alarm LED

Run/Stop LED
Program/Monitor LED

Power LED
POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

RUN
PRG

Hz
V
A

Run Key Enable LED
RESET
MIN

Run Key
FUNC

Hertz
Volts or Amperes
(kW = both ON)
Percent

STOP

RUN

Stop/Reset Key

Display Units LEDs

MAX

STR

Potentiometer Enable LED
Potentiometer

• Program/Monitor LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing
(Program Mode). It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode). However, the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the
value of parameter D001. (When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via
A001=02, you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using
the Up/Down keys.)
• Run Key – Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first). Parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD
or Run REV command.
• Run Key Enable LED – is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key, OFF
when the Run key is disabled.
• Stop/Reset Key – Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the programmed
deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
• Potentiometer (OPE–SRE only) – allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when
the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control
• Potentiometer Enable LED – ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry
(OPE–SRE only).
• Parameter Display – a 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
• Display Units: Hertz/Volts/Amperes/kW/% - These LEDs indicate the units associated
with the parameter display. When the display is monitoring a parameter, the appropriate
LED is ON. In the case of kW units, both Volts and Amperes LEDs will be ON. An easy
way to remember this is that kW = (V x A)/1000.
• Power LED – This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
• Alarm LED – This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter. Clearing
the alarm will turn this LED OFF again. See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms.
• Function Key – This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions
for setting and monitoring parameter values.
• Up/Down ( 1 , 2 ) Keys – Use these keys to alternately move up or down the lists of
parameter and functions shown in the display, and increment/decrement values.
• Store ( STR ) Key – When the unit is in Program Mode and the operator has edited a parameter value, press the Store key to write the new value to the EEPROM. This parameter is then
displayed at powerup by default. If you want to change the powerup default, navigate to a
new parameter value and press the Store key.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Key and
• Run/Stop LED – ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque,
and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
Indicator Legend

3–4

Using Keypad Devices

Keypad
Whether you use the keypad on the inverter or the read-write copy unit, each navigates the same
Navigational Map way. The diagram below shows the basic navigational map of parameters and functions.
Monitor Mode

Program Mode

Select Function

Display Data

Select Parameter

d o90

D002–D090

0.00

1
FUNC.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

STR

Po49
2

Uo01

d 001
FUNC.

Po49

U– – –
1

1
FUNC.

P–––
1

Increment/
decrement
value

1
FUNC.

PRG LED

c1 23

0.00
FUNC.

1
FUNC.

F o01
2

PRG LED
FUNC.

FUNC.

1 2 3.4

2
STR

b1 26

F o04
1

Edit

c o01

A– – –

D001

b o01
1

Write
data to
EEPROM,
store as
powerup
default

a1 3 2
1

ho01
1

b–––

Edit

ho7 2

C–––

Increment/
decrement
value

Po01
1

H– – –

Write data
to F001,
store D001
as powerup default

FUNC.

Store as
powerup
default

STR

Uo1 2
1

d o01
1

FUNC.

Edit Parameter

ao01

Return to
parameter
list

NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d”, meaning the same as the
upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).

3–5

SJ300 Inverter

Operational
Modes

The RUN and PGM LEDs tell just part of the story;
Run Mode and Program Modes are independent
modes, not opposite modes. In the state diagram to
the right, Run alternates with Stop, and Program
Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This is a very
important ability, for it shows that a technician can
approach a running machine and change some
parameters without shutting down the machine.
The occurrence of a fault during operation will
cause the inverter to enter the Trip Mode as shown.
An event such as an output overload will cause the
inverter to exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its
output to the motor. In the Trip Mode, any request
to run the motor is ignored. You must clear the
error by pressing the Stop/Reset switch. See
“Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions”
on page 6–5.

Run

Stop

RUN

FUNC.

Monitor

Program

STOP

Run

RESET

Stop

RUN
STOP

RESET

Fault
Trip

Fault

The inverter can be in Run Mode (inverter output is controlling motor) and still allow you to
edit certain parameters. This is useful in applications that must run continuously, yet need some
inverter parameter adjustment.
The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled “Run Mode
Edit.” An Ex mark ✘ means the parameter cannot be edited; a Check
mark ✔ means the parameter can be edited. You’ll notice in the table
example to the right the two adjacent marks: “✘ ✔”. The two marks
(that can also be “✘ ✘” or “✔ ✔”) correspond to these levels of access
to editing:
• Low-access level to Run Mode edits (indicated by left-most mark)

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
✘✔

• High-access level to Run Mode edits (indicated by right-most mark)
The Software Lock Setting (parameter B031) determines the particular access level that is in
effect during Run Mode and access in other conditions, as well. It is the responsibility of the
user to choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter operating conditions and
personnel. Please refer to “Software Lock Mode” on page 3–36 for more information.

Control
Algorithms

The motor control program in the SJ300
inverter has several sinusoidal PWM
switching algorithms. The intent is that you
select the best algorithm for the motor
characteristics in your application. Each
algorithm generates the frequency output in
a unique way. Once configured, the
algorithm is the basis for other parameter
settings as well (see “Torque Control
Algorithms” on page 3–14). Therefore,
choose the best algorithm early in your
application design process.

Inverter Control Algorithms
V/f control,
constant torque
V/f control,
variable torque
V/f control, freesetting curve
Output
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control
SLV control,
0Hz domain
Vector control with
sensor

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Run Mode Edits

STOP

RESET

3–6

“D” Group: Monitoring Functions

“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
Parameter
Monitoring
Functions

You can access important system parameter values with the “D” Group monitoring functions,
whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. After selecting the function code number
for the parameter you want to monitor, press the Function key once to show the value on the
display. In Functions D005 and D006 the intelligent terminals use individual segments of the
display to show ON/OFF status.

“D” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Run
Range
Mode
and Units
Edit

Description

SRW Display

FM
0.0 to
400.0 Hz

D001

Output frequency monitor Real-time display of output
frequency to motor, from 0.0 to
400.0 Hz

—

D002

Output current monitor

Filtered display of output current
to motor (100 mS internal filter
time constant)

—

Iout

D003

Rotation direction
monitor

Three different indications:
“F”. Forward
“o”. Stop
“r” Reverse

—

Dir

D004

Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor

Displays the scaled PID process
variable (feedback) value (A75 is
scale factor)

—

PID-FB

D005

Intelligent input terminal
status

Displays the state of the intelligent
input terminals:

—

IN-TM

—

OUT-TM

0000.00Hz

0000.0A

STOP

0000.00%

LLLLLLLLL

ON
OFF

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FW
Terminal numbers
D006

Intelligent output terminal Displays the state of the intelligent
status
output terminals:

LLLLLL

ON
OFF
AL 15 14 13 12 11
Terminal numbers
D007

Scaled output frequency
monitor

Displays the output frequency
scaled by the constant in B86.
Decimal point indicates range:
XX.XX 0.00 to 99.99
XXX.X 100.0 to 999.9
XXXX. 1000 to 9999
XXXX 10000 to 99990

—

Userdefined

D012

Torque monitor

Estimated output torque value,
range is -300.0 to +300.0%

—

TRQ

D013

Output voltage monitor

Voltage of output to motor,
range is 0.0 to 600.0V

—

VAC

Vout

F-CNV

000000.00

+000%
000.0V

SJ300 Inverter

“D” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Range
Mode
and Units
Edit

SRW Display

D014

Power monitor

0.0 to 999.9

—

D016

Cumulative operation
RUN time monitor

Displays total time the inverter has
been in RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 9999 / 1000 to 9999/
100 to 999 (10,000 to 99,900) hrs.

—

hours

RUN

0000000hr

D017

Cumulative power-on
time monitor

Displays total time the inverter has
had input power (ON) in hours.
Range is:
0 to 9999 / 100.0 to 999.9 /
1000 to 9999 / 100 to 999 hrs.

—

hours

0000000hr

000.0kW

The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information using
the keypad. See “Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 for more details.
Programming errors generate an error code that begins with the special
“Programming Error Codes” on page 3–68 for more information.

“D” Function
Func.
Code

Power

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Range
Edit and Units
Lo Hi

character. See

SRW Display

D080

Trip Counter

Number of trip events

—

ERR COUNT

D081
to
D086

Trip monitor 1 to 6

Displays trip event information

—

(Trip event type)

D090

Programming error
monitor

Displays programming error code

—

XXXX

00000

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Trip Event and
Programming
Error Monitoring

3–7

3–8

“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters

Configuring Drive
Parameters

The basic frequency (speed) profile is
defined by parameters contained in the
Output
“F” Group as shown to the right. The
F002
F003
output frequency is set in Hz, but accel- frequency
eration and deceleration are specified
F001
seconds (the time to ramp from zero to
maximum frequency, or from maximum
frequency to zero). The motor direction
parameter determines whether the
keypad Run key produces a FW or RV
t
command. This parameter does not
affect the [FW] terminal or [RV] intelligent terminal function, which you configure separately.
Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the main
profile. Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using parameters Ax92
through Ax93. The motor direction selection (F004) determines the direction of rotation as
commanded only from the keypad. This setting applies to any motor profile (1st, 2nd, or 3rd) in
use at a particular time.
“F” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

F001

Output frequency
setting

Standard default target
frequency that determines
constant motor speed
Range is 0 to 400 Hz

✔✔

0.00

>F001
TM
2FS
3FS
TM
JG
1S
15S
OP1
OP2
RS485

F002

Acceleration (1) time
setting

Standard default acceleration
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F002 ACCEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F202

Acceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor

Standard default acceleration, 2nd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F202 2ACCEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F302

Acceleration (1) time
setting, 3rd motor

Standard default acceleration, 3rd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F302 3ACCEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F003

Deceleration (1) time
setting

Standard default deceleration
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F003 DECEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F203

Deceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor

Standard default deceleration, 2nd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F203 2DECEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F303

Deceleration (1) time
setting, 3rd motor

Standard default deceleration, 3rd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

30.0

sec.

>F303 3DECEL
TIME1
0030.00s

F004

Keypad Run key routing Two options; select codes:
00 Forward
01 Reverse

✘✘

—

>F004 DIG-RUN
SELECT

SET-Freq.
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz
0000.00Hz

3–9

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Group: Standard Functions
Basic Parameter
Settings

These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter—the outputs to the motor.
The frequency of the inverter’s AC output determines the motor speed. You may select from
three different sources for the reference speed. During application development you may prefer
using the potentiometer, but you may switch to an external source (control terminal setting) in
the finished application, for example.
The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph below
(left). The inverter output operation follows the constant V/f curve until it reaches the full-scale
output voltage. This initial straight line is the constant-torque part of the operating characteristic. The horizontal line over to the maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster, but at
a reduced torque. This is the constant-horsepower part of the characteristic. If you want the
motor to output constant torque over its entire operating range (limited to the motor nameplate
voltage and frequency rating), then set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as
shown (below right).
A003

A003

A004

Configuring Drive
Parameters

V
100%

A004

100%
Constant torque

Base
Frequency

Maximum
Frequency

Base frequency =
maximum frequency

NOTE: The “2nd motor” and “3rd motor” settings in the tables in this chapter store an alternate set of parameters for additional motors. The inverter can use the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd set of
parameters to generate the output frequency to the motor. See “Configuring the Inverter for
Multiple Motors” on page 4–72.

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A001 Frequency source
setting

Six options; select codes:
00 Keypad potentiometer
01 Control terminal
02 Function F001 setting
03 RS485 serial command
04 Expansion board 1
05 Expansion board 2

✘✘

—

>A001 F-SET
SELECT
TRM

A002 Run command source
setting

Five options; select codes:
01 Input terminal [FW] or
[RV] (assignable)
02 Run key on keypad, or
digital operator
03 RS485 serial command
04 Start/Stop, expansion
card #1
05 Start/Stop, expansion
card #2

✘✘

—

>A002 F/R
SELECT

A003 Base frequency setting

Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency

✘✘

50.

60.

>A003 F-BASE
F
0060Hz

TRM

3–10

“A” Group: Standard Functions

“A” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A203 Base frequency setting,
2nd motor

Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency

✘✘

50.

60.

>A203 2F-BASE
F
0060Hz

A303 Base frequency setting,
3rd motor

Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency

✘✘

50.

60.

>A303 3F-BASE
F
0060Hz

A004 Maximum frequency
setting

Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz

✘✘

50.

60.

>A004 F-max
F
0060Hz

A204 Maximum frequency
setting, 2nd motor

Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz

✘✘

50.

60.

>A204 2F-max
F
0060Hz

A304 Maximum frequency
setting, 3rd motor

Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz

✘✘

50.

60.

>A304 3F-max
F
0060Hz

NOTE: The base frequency must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency (ensure that
A003 ≤ A004).

SJ300 Inverter

Analog Input
Settings

3–11

The inverter has the capability to accept external analog inputs that can command the output
frequency to the motor. Signals including voltage input (0 to +10V) at terminal [O], bipolar
input (-10 to +10V) at terminal [O2], and current input (4 to 20mA) at terminal [OI] are available. Terminal [L] serves as signal ground for the three analog inputs. The analog input settings
adjust the curve characteristics between the analog input and the frequency output.

Adjusting [OI–L] characteristics – In
f
the graph to the right, A103 and A104
max. frequency
select the active portion of the input
current range. Parameters A101 and A102 A102
select the start and end frequency of the
converted output frequency range, respectively. Together, these four parameters
A105=0
define the major line segment as shown.
When the line does not begin at the origin
A101
(A101 and A103 > 0), then A105 defines
A105=1
whether the inverter outputs 0Hz or the
A101-specified frequency when the
0%
A103
A104
analog input value is less than the A103
4mA
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the A104 ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
A102.

% input
100%
10V

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Adjusting [O–L] characteristics – In the
f
graph to the right, A013 and A014 select
max. frequency
the active portion of the input voltage
range. Parameters A011 and A012 select A012
the start and end frequency of the
converted output frequency range, respectively. Together, these four parameters
A015=0
define the major line segment as shown.
When the line does not begin at the origin
A011
(A011 and A013 > 0), then A015 defines
A015=1
whether the inverter outputs 0Hz or the
A011-specified frequency when the
0%
A013
A014
analog input value is less than the A013
0V
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the A014 ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
A012.

% input
100%
20mA

Adjusting [O2–L] characteristics – In
max. fwd frequency
f
the graph to the right, A113 and A114
select the active portion of the input
voltage range. Parameters A111 and
A112
A112 select the start and end frequency of
the converted output frequency range,
–100%
respectively. Together, these four parame- -10V
A113
% input
ters define the major line segment as
0
A114 +100%
shown. When the input voltage is less
+10V
than the A113 input starting value, the
A111
inverter outputs the starting frequency
specified by A111. When the input
voltage is greater than the A114 ending
f
value, the inverter outputs the ending
max. rev frequency
frequency specified by A112.

3–12

“A” Group: Standard Functions

“A” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A005 [AT] selection

Two options; select codes:
00 Select between [O] and
[OI] at [AT]
01 Select between [O] and
[O2] at [AT]

✘✘

—

>A005 AT
SELECT

A006 [O2] selection

Three options; select codes:
00 No summing, [O2] and
[OI]
01 Sum of [O2] and [OI],
neg. sum (reverse speed
reference) inhibited
02 Sum of [O2] and [OI],
neg. sum (reverse speed
reference) allowed

✘✘

—

>A006 O2
SELECT O2

A011 [O]–[L] input active
range start frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the voltage input
range starting point
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>A011 INPUT-O
EXS
0000.00Hz

A012 [O]–[L] input active
range end frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the voltage input
range ending point
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>A012 INPUT-O
EXE
0000.00Hz

A013 [O]–[L] input active
range start voltage

The starting point for the
voltage input range
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

>A013 INPUT-O
EX%S
000%

A014 [O]–[L] input active
range end voltage

The ending point for the
voltage input range
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

100.

>A014 INPUT-O
EX%E
100%

A015 [O]–[L] input start
frequency enable

Two options; select codes:
00 Use A011 start value
01 Use 0 Hz

✘✔

—

>A015 INPUT-O
LEVEL
0Hz

✘✔

A016 External frequency filter Range n = 1 to 30, where n =
time constant
number of samples for avg.

Sam- >A016 INPUT
ples F-SAMP

O/OI

SJ300 Inverter

Multi-speed and
Jog Frequency
Settings

3–13

The SJ300 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset frequencies to the
motor (A020 to A035). As in traditional motion terminology, we call this multi-speed profile
capability. These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital inputs to the inverter. The
inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to change from the current
output frequency to the new one. The first multi-speed setting is duplicated for the second
motor settings (the remaining 15 multi-speeds apply only to the first motor).
The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active. The jog speed setting range
is arbitrarily limited to 10 Hz to provide safety during manual operation. The acceleration to the
jog frequency is instantaneous, but you can choose from six modes for the best method for
stopping the jog operation.
“A” Function

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Two options; select codes:
00 Binary; up to 16-stage
speed using 4 intelligent
terminals
01 Single-bit; up to 8-stage
speed using 7 intelligent
terminals

✘✘

—

>A019 SPEED
SELECT
BINARY

A020 Multi-speed frequency
setting

Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is
0 to 360 Hz
A020 = Speed 1 (1st motor)

✔✔

0.00

>A020 SPEED
FS
0000.00Hz

A220 Multi-speed frequency
setting, 2nd motor

Defines the first speed of a
✔✔
multi-speed profile for 2nd
motor, range is 0 to 360 Hz
A220 = Speed 1 (2nd motor)

0.00

>A220 SPEED
2FS
0000.00Hz

A320 Multi-speed frequency
setting, 3rd motor

Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile for 3rd
motor, range is 0 to 360 Hz
A320 = Speed 1 (3rd motor)

✔✔

0.00

>A320 SPEED
3FS
0000.00Hz

A021 Multi-speed frequency
to
settings
A035 (for both motors)

Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0 to 360 Hz.
A021 = Speed 2...
A035 = Speed 16

✔✔

0.00

>A021 SPEED
01S
0000.00Hz

A038 Jog frequency setting

Defines limited speed for
jog, range is 0.5 to 9.99 Hz

✔✔

1.00

>A038 Jogging
F
01.00Hz

A039 Jog stop mode

Define how end of jog stops
the motor; six options:
00 Free-run stop, jogging
disabled during motor
run
01 Controlled deceleration,
jogging disabled during
motor run
02 DC braking to stop,
jogging disabled during
motor run
03 Free-run stop, jogging
always enabled
04 Controlled deceleration,
jogging always enabled
05 DC braking to stop,
jogging always enabled

✘✔

—

>A039 Jogging
Mode
FRS

Configuring Drive
Parameters

A019 Multi-speed operation
selection

3–14

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Torque Control
Algorithms

The inverter generates the motor output
according to the V/f algorithm or the
sensorless vector control algorithm. Parameter A044 selects the inverter torque control
algorithm for generating the frequency
output, as shown in the diagram to the right
(A244 and A344 for 2nd and 3rd motors,
respectively). The factory default is 00
(constant torque V/f control).
Review the following descriptions to help
you choose the best torque control
algorithm for your application.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

• The built-in V/f curves are oriented
toward developing constant torque or
variable torque characteristics (see
graphs below).
• The free-setting curve provides an even
more flexible characteristic, but it
requires more parameter settings.

Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
V/f control,
constant torque

V/f control,
variable torque

V/f control, freesetting curve

A044

Output
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control

Sensorless vector,
0Hz domain

Vector control with 05
• Sensorless vector control calculates an
sensor
ideal torque vector based on current
motor position, winding currents, and so
on. It is a more robust control method than the V/f control methods. However, it is more
dependent on actual motor parameters and will require you to set these values carefully or to
perform the auto-tuning procedure (see “Auto-tuning of Motor Constants” on page 4–67) to
obtain optimum performance.
• Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain increases the low-speed torque performance (0–
2.5Hz) via an advanced Hitachi torque control algorithm. However, you will need to size the
inverter for one frame size larger than the motor for proper operation.
• Vector control with sensor requires expansion card SJ–FB encoder feedback board and a
motor shaft encoder. Choose this method when precise position/velocity control is required.
Constant and Variable Torque – The graph below (left) shows the constant torque characteristic from 0Hz to the base frequency A003. The voltage remains constant for output frequencies
higher than the base frequency.
Output
voltage

Constant torque

100%

Variable torque

Output
voltage
100%

a.
0

Base
frequency

Maximum
frequency

10% of
base
frequency

c.
Base
frequency

Maximum
frequency

The graph above (right) shows the general characteristic for variable torque. The curve may be
best described in three sections, as follows:
a. The range from 0Hz to 10% of the base frequency is the constant torque characteristic.
For example, a base frequency of 60Hz ends the constant torque characteristic segment
at 6Hz.
b. The range from 10% of the base frequency to the base frequency is the variable
(reduced) torque characteristic. The voltage is output in the curve of frequency to the 1.7
power.

SJ300 Inverter

3–15

c. After reaching the base frequency, the characteristic maintains a constant output voltage
for higher frequencies.
Using parameter A045 you can modify the voltage gain of the inverter. This is specified as a
percentage of the full-scale setting AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation) in parameter A082.
The gain can be set from 20% to 100%. It must be adjusted in accordance with the motor specifications.

frequency
f base =
60Hz

Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor overheating.
This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON or if the motor relies on a built-in fan
for cooling.
NOTE: Manual torque boost applies only to constant torque (A044=00) and variable torque
(A044=01) V/f control.

NOTE: The motor stabilization parameter H006 is effective for constant torque (A044=00) and
variable torque (A044=01) V/f control.

V/f Free-setting – The free-setting V/f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency
parameter pairs to define seven points on a V/f graph. This provides a way to define a multisegment V/f curve that best suits your application.
The frequency settings do require that
F1 ≤ F2 ≤ F3 ≤ F4 ≤ F5 ≤ F6 ≤ F7; their
values must have this ascending order
relationship. However, the voltages V1
to V7 may either increase or decrease
from one to the next. The example to the
right shows the definition of a complex
curve by following the setting requirements.
Free-setting f7 (B112) becomes the
maximum frequency of the inverter.
Therefore, we recommend setting f7
first, since the initial value of all default
frequencies f1–f7 is 0Hz.

Output voltage
V7
V6
V5
V4
V1
Output
frequency

V2, V3
B101 to
B113
(odd) 0

f2 f3
B100 to B112

f4 f5 f6 f7 Hz
(even)

NOTE: The using of V/f free-setting operation specifies parameters that override (make
invalid) certain other parameters. The parameters that become invalid are torque boost (A041/
A241), base frequency (A003/A203/A303), and maximum frequency (A004/A204/A304). In
this case, we recommend leaving their settings at the factory default values.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Torque Boost – The Constant and
V
A042 = 10
Variable Torque algorithms feature an
100%
adjustable torque boost curve. When the
Torque boost
motor load has a lot of inertia or starting
friction, you may need to increase the
A
low frequency starting torque character- 10%
istics by boosting the voltage above the
normal V/f ratio (shown at right). The
boost is applied from zero to 1/2 the
0
base frequency. You set the breakpoint
6.0Hz
30.0Hz
of the boost (point A on the graph) by
A043 = 10%
using parameters A042 and A043. The
manual boost is calculated as an
addition to the standard straight V/f line (constant torque curve).

3–16

“A” Group: Standard Functions

The V/f free-setting endpoint f7/V7
parameters must stay within the more
basic inverter limits in order for the
specified free-setting characteristic
curve to be achieved. For example, the
inverter cannot output a higher voltage
than the input voltage or the AVR
setting voltage (Automatic Voltage
Regulation), set by parameter A082.
The graph to the right shows how the
inverter input voltage would clip (limit)
the characteristic curve if exceeded.

Output voltage
V7
Voltage to output or AVR voltage

V6
Output
frequency

B101 to
B113
0
(odd)

B100 to B112

(even)

Sensorless Vector Control and, Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – These advanced
torque control algorithms improve the torque performance at very low speeds:
Configuring Drive
Parameters

• Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz
• Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz.
These low-speed torque control algorithms must be tuned to match the characteristics of the
particular motor connected to your inverter. Simply using the default motor parameters in the
inverter will not work satisfactorily for these control methods. Chapter 4 discusses motor/
inverter size selection and how to set the motor parameters either manually or by using the
built-in auto-tuning. Before using the sensorless vector control methods, please refer to
“Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control” on page 4–65.
NOTE: When the inverter is in SLV (sensorless vector) mode, use B083 to set the carrier
frequency greater than 2.1 kHz for proper operation.

NOTE: You must disable sensorless vector operation when two or more motors are connected
(parallel operation) to the inverter.

Vector Control with Encoder Feedback – This method of torque control uses an encoder as a
motor shaft position sensor. Accurate position feedback allows the inverter to close the velocity
loop and provide very accurate speed control, even with variations in motor loads. To use
encoder feedback you will need to add an SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Card in the inverter’s
expansion bay. Please refer to “Expansion Cards” on page 5–5 in this manual or the SJ–FB
manual for details.
The following table shows the methods of torque control selection.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A041 Torque boost method
selection

Two options:
00 Manual torque boost
01 Automatic torque boost

✘✘

—

>A041 V-Boost
Mode
MANUAL

A241 Torque boost method
selection, 2nd motor

Two options (for 2nd
motor):
00 Manual torque boost
01 Automatic torque boost

✘✘

—

>A241 2V-Boost
Mode
MANUAL

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

3–17

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency

✔✔

1.0

—

>A042 V-Boost
Code
01.0%

A242 Manual torque boost
value, 2nd motor

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency

✔✔

1.0

—

>A242 2V-Boost
Code
01.0%

A342 Manual torque boost
value, 3rd motor

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency

✔✔

1.0

—

>A342 3V-Boost
Code
01.0%

A043 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment

Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost

✔✔

5.0

>A043 V-Boost
F
05.0%

A243 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
2nd motor

Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost

✔✔

5.0

>A243 2V-Boost
F
05.0%

A343 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
3rd motor

Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost

✔✔

5.0

>A343 3V-Boost
F
05.0%

A044 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 1st motor

Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback

✘✘

—

>A044 Control
1st
VC

A244 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 2nd motor

Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback

✘✘

—

>A244 2Control
2nd
VC

A344 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 3rd motor

Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback

✘✘

—

>A344 3Control
3rd
VC

A045 V/f gain setting

Sets voltage gain of the
inverter from 20 to 100%

✔✔

100.

>A045 V-Gain
Gain
100%

Configuring Drive
Parameters

A042 Manual torque boost
value

3–18

“A” Group: Standard Functions

DC Braking
Settings

The DC braking feature can provide additional stopping torque when compared to a normal
deceleration to a stop. It can also ensure the motor and load are stopped before acceleration.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

When decelerating – DC braking is
particularly useful at low speeds when
normal deceleration torque is minimal.
During deceleration, the inverter injects
a DC voltage into the motor windings
during deceleration below a frequency
you can specify (A052). The braking
power (A054) and duration (A055) can
both be set. You can optionally specify a
wait time before DC braking (A053),
during which the motor will free run
(coast).

Output
voltage
+

Running

Free run

DC braking
A054

–

t
A053

A055

When starting – You can also apply
Output
voltage
DC braking upon the application of a
Run command, specifying both the DC +
DC braking
Running
braking force level (A057) and the
A057
duration (A058). This will serve to stop
the rotation of the motor and the load,
0
when the load is capable of driving the
t
motor. This effect, sometimes called
“windmilling,” is common in fan appliA058
–
cations. Often, air moving in duct work
will drive the fan in a backward direction. If an inverter is started into such a backward-rotating load, over-current trips can occur.
Use DC braking as an “anti-windmilling” technique to stop the motor and load, and allow a
normal acceleration from a stop. See also the “Acceleration Pause Function” on page 3–21.
You can configure the inverter to apply DC braking at stopping only, at starting only, or both.
DC braking power (0–100%) can be set separately for stopping and starting cases.
You can configure DC braking to initiate in one of two ways:
1. Internal DC braking – Set A051=01 to enable internal braking. The inverter automatically
applies DC braking as configured (during stopping, starting, or both).
2. External DC braking – Configure an input terminal with option code 7 [DB] (see “External Signal for DC Injection Braking” on page 4–17 for more details). Leave A051=00,
although this setting is ignored when a [DB] input is configured. The DC braking force
settings (A054 and A057) still apply. However, the braking time settings (A055 and A058)
do not apply (see level and edge triggered descriptions below). Use A056 to select level or
edge detection for the external input.
a. Level triggered – When the [DB] input signal is ON, the inverter immediately applies
DC injection braking, whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. You control
DC braking time by the duration of the [DB] pulse.
b. Edge triggered – When the [DB] input transitions OFF-to-ON and the inverter is in Run
Mode, it will apply DC braking only until the motor stops... then DC braking is OFF.
During Stop Mode, the inverter ignores OFF-to-ON transitions. Therefore, do not use
edge triggered operation when you need DC braking before acceleration.
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause motor
overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in thermistor
and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal Protection” on page 4–
28). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for duty-cycle recommendations
during DC braking.

3–19

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Run
Mode
Edit

Description

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A051 DC braking enable

Two options; select codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✔

—

>A051 DCB
Mode

A052 DC braking frequency
setting

The frequency at which DC
braking activates during
decel.
Range is 0.00 to 60.00 Hz

✘✔

0.50

>A052 DCB
F
00.50Hz

A053 DC braking wait time

The delay after reaching the
DC braking frequency, or
[DB] signal, before DC
braking begins.
Range is 0.0 to 5.0 seconds

✘✔

0.0

sec.

>A053 DCB
WAIT

0.0s

A054 DC braking force during Variable DC braking force.
deceleration
Range is from 0% to 100%

✘✔

>A054 DCB
STP-V

000%

A055 DC braking time for
deceleration

Sets the duration for DC
braking during decel. Range
is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds

✘✔

0.0

sec.

>A055 DCB
STP-T

00.0s

A056 DC braking / edge or
level detection for [DB]
input

Two options; select codes:
00 Edge detection
01 Level detection

✘✔

—

>A056 DCB
KIND

LEVEL

A057 DC braking force for
starting

Variable DC braking force.
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

>A057 DCB
STA-V

000%

A058 DC braking time for
starting

Sets the duration for DC
braking before accel.
Range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds

✘✔

0.0

sec.

>A058 DCB
STA-T

00.0s

A059 DC braking carrier
frequency setting

Range is 0.5 to 15 kHZ for
models up to –550xxx,
range is 0.5 to 10kHz for
750xxx to 1500xxx models

✘✘

3.0

kHz

>A059 DCB
CARRIER 05.0kHz

OFF

Max.braking 100
ratio (%)
90

Models 11 – 55kW

Max.braking 100
ratio (%)
90
80

(75)

60
(46)

50
40

(34)

(22)

(10)

10
3

Models 75 – 132kW

5
7
9
11 13
DC braking carrier frequency

15 kHz

20
10

(60)
(40)
(20)
(10)

3
5
7
9 10 kHz
DC braking carrier frequency

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Derating of DC Braking – The inverter uses an internal carrier frequency (set by A059) to
generate a DC braking voltage (do not confuse with main inverter output carrier frequency set
by B083). The maximum DC braking force available to the inverter is more limited with higher
DC braking carrier frequency settings for A059 according to the graphs below.

3–20

“A” Group: Standard Functions

FrequencyFrequency Limits – Upper and lower
related Functions limits can be imposed on the inverter

Output frequency

output frequency. These limits will apply
regardless of the source of the speed
reference. You can configure the lower
frequency limit to be greater than zero as
shown in the graph to the right. The upper
limit must not exceed the rating of the
motor or capability of the machinery.

A061

Upper
limit
Settable
range

A062

Lower
limit
Frequency command

“A” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A061 Frequency upper limit
setting

Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004)
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.00

>A061 LIMIT
HIGH
0000.00Hz

A261 Frequency upper limit
setting, 2nd motor

Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004)
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.00

>A261 2LIMIT
HIGH
0000.00Hz

A062 Frequency lower limit
setting

Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.00

>A062 LIMIT
LOW
0000.00Hz

A262 Frequency lower limit
setting, 2nd motor

Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.00

>A262 2LIMIT
LOW
0000.00Hz

Jump Frequencies – Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at particular speed(s),
which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds. The inverter has up to three
jump frequencies as shown in the graph. The hysteresis around the jump frequencies causes the
inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values.
Output
frequency
Jump frequencies

A068

A067

A068
A066

A065

A066
A063

Hysteresis values

A064
A064
Frequency command

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Units

SRW Display

0.00

>A063 JUMP
F1
0000.00Hz
>A065 JUMP
F2
0000.00Hz
>A067 JUMP
F3
0000.00Hz

0.50

>A064 JUMP
W1
00.50Hz
>A066 JUMP
W2
00.50Hz
>A068 JUMP
W3
00.50Hz

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

A063 Jump (center) frequency Up to 3 output frequencies
A065 setting
can be defined for the output
A067
to jump past to avoid motor
resonances (center
frequency)
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.00

A064 Jump (hysteresis)
A066 frequency width setting
A068

✘✔

0.50

Name

Description

The acceleration pause function can be
Output
used to minimize the occurrence of
frequency
over-current trips when accelerating
Set frequency
high inertia loads. It introduces a dwell
or pause in the acceleration ramp. You
Accel pause
can control the frequency at which this
period
dwell occurs (A069), and the duration
A069
of the pause time (A070). This function
can also be used as an anti-windmilling
0
t
tool, when the load might have a
A070
tendency to drive the motor in a reverse
direction while the inverter is in a Stop mode. Initiating a normal acceleration in such a situation may result in over-current trips. This function can be used to keep the inverter output
frequency and voltage at low levels long enough to bring the load to a stop, and commence
turning in the desired direction before the acceleration ramp resumes. See also “DC Braking
Settings” on page 3–18.
“A” Function

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A069 Acceleration pause
frequency setting

Range is 0.00 to 400.0Hz

✘✔

0.00

>A069 F-STOP
F
0000.00H

A070 Acceleration pause time
setting

Range is 0.0 to 60.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

>A070 F-STOP
T
00.0s

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Acceleration
Pause Function

Defines the distance from
the center frequency at
which the jump occurs
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

3–21

3–22

“A” Group: Standard Functions

PID Control

When enabled, the built-in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a loop
feedback process variable (PV) to move closer in value to the setpoint (SP). The current
frequency command serves as the SP. The PID loop algorithm will read the analog input for the
process variable (you specify either current or voltage input) and calculate the output.
• A scale factor in A075 lets you multiply the PV by a factor, converting it into engineering
units for the process.
•

Proportional, integral, and derivative gains are all adjustable.

• Optional – You can assign an intelligent input terminal the option code 23, PID Disable.
When active, this input disables PID operation. See “Intelligent Input Terminal Overview”
on page 3–49.
• See “PID Loop Operation” on page 4–71 for more information.
“A” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A071 PID Enable

Enables PID function,
two option codes:
00 PID operation OFF
01 PID operation ON

✘✔

—

>A071 PID
SW

OFF

A072 PID proportional gain

Proportional gain has a
range of 0.2 to 5.0

✔✔

1.0

—

>A072 PID
P

1.0

A073 PID integral time
constant

Integral time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 3600 seconds

✔✔

1.0

sec.

>A073 PID
I
0001.0s

A074 PID derivative time
constant

Derivative time constant has ✔ ✔
a range of 0.0 to 100 seconds

0.0

sec.

>A074 PID
D
000.00

A075 PV scale conversion

Process Variable (PV) scale
factor (multiplier), range of
0.01 to 99.99

✘✔

1.00

—

>A075 PID
CONV
001.00

A076 PV source setting

Selects source of Process
Variable (PV), option codes:
00 [OI] terminal (current
input)
01 [O] terminal (voltage
input)

✘✔

—

>A076 PID
INPUT

NOTE: The setting A073 for the integrator is the integrator’s time constant Ti, not the gain.
The integrator gain Ki = 1/Ti. When you set A073 = 0, the integrator is disabled.

SJ300 Inverter

Automatic
Voltage
Regulation (AVR)
Function

The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) feature keeps the inverter output voltage at a
relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations. This can be useful if the installation is subject to input voltage disturbances. However, the inverter cannot boost its motor
output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage. If you enable this feature, be sure to
select the proper voltage class setting for your motor.

“A” Function
Func.
Code

3–23

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from
three type of AVR functions,
three option codes:
00 AVR enabled
01 AVR disabled
02 AVR enabled except
during deceleration

✘✘

—

>A081 AVR
MODE

DOFF

A082 AVR voltage select

200V class inverter settings:
200/215/220/230/240
400V class inverter settings:
380/400/415/440/460/
480

✘✘

230/
400

230/
460

200/
400

>A082 AVR
AC

230

Energy Savings
Mode / Optimal
Accel/Decel

Energy Savings Mode – This function allows the inverter to deliver the minimum power
necessary to maintain speed at any given frequency. This works best when driving variable
torque characteristic loads such as fans and pumps. Parameter A085=01 enables this function
and A086 controls the degree of its effect. A setting of 0.0 yields slow response but high
accuracy, while a setting of 100 will yield a fast response with lower accuracy.
“A” Function

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A085 Operation mode
selection

Three options:
00 Normal operation
01 Energy-saver operation
02 Optimal accel/decel
operation

✘✘

—

>A085 RUN
MODE

A086 Energy saving mode
tuning

Range is 0.0 to 100 sec.

✔✔

50.0

sec.

>A086 RUN
ECO
0050.0s

NOR

Optimal Accel/Decel Operation – This feature uses “fuzzy” logic to optimize acceleration
and deceleration curves in real time. It is enabled by A085=02. Optimal accel/decel operation
automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration times in response to changes in load or
inertia to take advantage of the maximum output current capability of the inverter. In general,
optimal accel/decel will allow for the shortest accel and decel times based on the actual load
conditions. The function continuously monitors output current and DC bus voltage to avoid
reaching their respective trip levels.
NOTE: In this mode, the settings of acceleration and deceleration times (F002 and F003) are
disregarded.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

A081 AVR function select

3–24

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Optimal Accel/Decel Operation, continued...
The acceleration time is controlled to maintain output current below the level set by the
Overload Restriction Function if enabled (Parameters B021/B024, B022/B025, and B023/
B026). If Overload Restriction is not enabled, then the current limit used is 150% of the
inverter’s rated output current.
The deceleration time is controlled so that the output current is maintained below 150% of the
inverter’s rated current, and the DC bus voltage is maintained below the OV Trip level (358V or
770V).

Configuring Drive
Parameters

NOTE: DO NOT use Optimal Accel/Decel (A085 = 02) when an application...
• has a requirement for constant acceleration or deceleration
• has a load inertia more than (approx.) 20 times the motor inertia
• uses internal or external regenerative braking
• uses any of the vector control modes (A044 = 03, 04, or 05). This function is ONLY
compatible with V/F control.

NOTE: If the load exceeds the rating of the inverter, the acceleration time may be increased.

NOTE: If using a motor with a capacity that is one size smaller than the inverter rating, enable
the Overload Restriction function (B021/B024) and set the Overload Restriction Level (B022/
B025) to 1.5 times the motor nameplate current.

NOTE: Be aware that the acceleration and deceleration times will vary, depending on the
actual load conditions during each individual operation of the inverter.

Second
Acceleration and
Deceleration
Functions

The SJ300 inverter features two-stage acceleration and deceleration ramps. This gives flexibility in the profile shape. You can specify the frequency transition point, the point at which the
standard acceleration (F002) or deceleration (F003) changes to the second acceleration (A092)
or deceleration (A093). These profile options are also available for the second motor settings
and third motor settings. All acceleration and deceleration times are time to ramp from zero
speed to full speed or full speed to zero speed. Select a transition method via A094 as depicted
below. Be careful not to confuse the second acceleration/deceleration settings with settings for
the second motor!

frequency

A094=00

A094=01

Accel 2
Accel 2
Accel 1
t
2CH
input

Accel 1

1
0

Frequency
transition point

A095

0
t

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

3–25

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A092 ACCEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A292 Acceleration (2) time
setting, 2nd motor

Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A292 2ACCEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A392 Acceleration (2) time
setting, 3rd motor

Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A392 3ACCEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A093 Deceleration (2) time
setting

Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A093 DECEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A293 Deceleration (2) time
setting, 2nd motor

Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A293 2DECEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A393 Deceleration (2) time
setting, 3rd motor

Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.

✔✔

15.0

sec.

>A393 3DECEL
TIME2
0015.00s

A094 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile

Two options for switching
from1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00 2CH input from terminal
01 transition frequency

✘✘

—

>A094 ACCEL
CHANGE
TM

A294 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile,
2nd motor

Two options for switching
from1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00 2CH input from terminal
01 transition frequency (2nd
motor)

✘✘

—

>A294 ACCEL
CHANGE
TM

A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point

Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✘

0.0

>A095 ACCEL
CHFr
0000.00Hz

A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor

Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
(2nd motor)

✘✘

0.0

>A295 2ACCEL
CHFr
0000.00Hz

A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point

Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✘

0.0

>A096 DECEL
CHFr
0000.00Hz

A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor

Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
(2nd motor)

✘✘

0.0

>A296 2DECEL
CHFr
0000.00Hz

NOTE: For A095 and A096 (and for 2nd motor settings), if you set a very rapid Acc1 or Dec1
time (less than 1.0 second), the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or Dec2 before
reaching the target frequency. In that case, the inverter decreases the rate of Acc1 or Dec1 in
order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

A092 Acceleration (2) time
setting

3–26

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Accel/Decel
Characteristics

Standard (default) acceleration and deceleration is linear with time. The inverter CPU can also
calculate other curves shown in the graphs below. The sigmoid, U-shape, and reverse U-shape
curves are useful for favoring the load characteristics in particular applications. Curve settings
for acceleration and deceleration are independently selected via parameters A097 and A098,
respectively. You can use the same or different curve types for acceleration and deceleration.

Set value
Curve

Linear

Sigmoid

U-shape

Reverse U-shape

Output frequency

Accel
A97

Configuring Drive
Parameters

time
Output frequency

time

Output frequency

Decel
A98

time

Linear acceleration
Typical
and deceleration for
applications general-purpose use

time

Avoid jerk on start/stop
for elevators; use for
delicate loads on conveyors

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

time

Tension control for winding applications, web
presses, roller/accumulators

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A097 Acceleration curve
selection

Set the characteristic curve
of Accel1 and Accel2, four
options:
00 Linear
01 S-curve
02 U-shape
03 Reverse U-shape

✘✘

—

>A097 ACCEL
LINE Linear

A098 Deceleration curve
selection

Set the characteristic curve
of Decel1 and Decel2, four
options:
00 Linear
01 S-curve
02 U-shape
03 Reverse U-shape

✘✘

—

>A098 DECEL
LINE Linear

SJ300 Inverter

3–27

The acceleration and deceleration curves can deviate from a straight line to a varying degree.
Parameters A131 and A132 control the amount of deviation for the acceleration and deceleration curves respectively. The following graphs show intermediate output frequency points as a
percentage of the target frequency, for 25%, 50%, and 75% acceleration time intervals.
Output frequency
% of target

Output frequency
% of target

100
99.6
93.8
87.5
68.4
64.6

100
96.9
82.4

100

65.0

35.0

35.4
31.6
12.5
6.25
0.39

17.6
3.1
25

time

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

time

Configuring Drive
Parameters

“A” Function

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A131 Acceleration curve
constants setting

Sets the curve deviation
from straight-line acceleration in ten levels:
01 smallest deviation
10 largest deviation

✘✔

—

>A131 ACCEL
GAIN

A132 Deceleration curve
constants setting

Sets the curve deviation
from straight-line deceleration in ten levels:
01 smallest deviation
10 largest deviation

✘✔

—

>A132 DECEL
GAIN

3–28

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Additional
Analog Input
Settings

The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the analog inputs.
When using the inputs to command the inverter output frequency, these parameters adjust the
starting and ending ranges for the voltage or current, as well as the output frequency range.
Related characteristic diagrams are located in “Analog Input Settings” on page 3–11.
“A” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

A101 [OI]–[L] input active
range start frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range starting point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

00.0

>A101 INPUT-OI
EXS
0000.00Hz

A102 [OI]–[L] input active
range end frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range ending point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

00.0

>A102 INPUT-OI
EXE
0000.00Hz

A103 [OI]–[L] input active
range start current

The starting point for the
current input range.
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

20.

>A103 INPUT-OI
EX%S
020%

A104 [OI]–[L] input active
range end current

The ending point for the
current input range.
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

100.

>A104 INPUT-OI
EX%E
100%

A105 [OI]–[L] input start
frequency enable

Two options:
00 Use A101 start value
01 Use 0Hz

✘✔

>A105 INPUT-OI
LEVEL
0Hz

A111 [O2]–[L] input active
range start frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the bipolar
voltage input range starting
point.
Range is –400. to 400. Hz

✘✔

0.00

>A111 INPUT-O2
EXS
+000.00Hz

A112 [O2]–[L] input active
range end frequency

The output frequency corresponding to the bipolar
voltage input range ending
point.
Range is –400. to 400. Hz

✘✔

0.00

>A112 INPUT-O2
EXE
+000.00Hz

A113 [O2]–[L] input active
range start voltage

The starting point for the
bipolar voltage input range.
Range is –100 to 100%

✘✔

-100. -100. -100.

>A113 INPUT-O2
EX%S
-100%

A114 [O2]–[L] input active
range end voltage

The ending point for the
bipolar voltage input range.
Range is –100 to 100%

✘✔

100.

>A114 INPUT-O2
EX%E
+100%

100.

3–29

SJ300 Inverter

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
The “B” Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful aspects
of motor control and system configuration.

Automatic
The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a trip
Restart Mode and event. The four options provide advantages for various situations. Frequency matching allows
the inverter to read the motor speed by virtue of its residual magnetic flux and restart the output
Phase Loss
at the corresponding frequency. The inverter can attempt a restart a certain number of times
depending on the particular trip event:
• Over-current trip, restart up to 3 times
• Over-voltage trip, restart up to 3 times
• Under-voltage trip, restart up to 16 times
When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts (3 or 16), you must power-cycle the
inverter to reset its operation.

Power failure < allowable power fail
time (B002), inverter resumes
Input
power

Input
power

Inverter
output

Inverter
output
free-running

Motor
speed

Power failure

Allowable
power fail time

B001 Selection of automatic
restart mode

Power failure
B002

Allowable
power fail time

B003

“B” Function
Name

free-running

Motor
speed

B002

Retry wait time

Func.
Code

Power failure > allowable power
fail time (B002), inverter trips

Description

Select inverter restart
method, four option codes:
00 Alarm output after trip,
automatic restart
disabled
01 Restart at 0Hz
02 Resume operation after
frequency matching
03 Resume previous freq.
after freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and
display trip info

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

✘✔

Units

—

SRW Display

>b001 IPS
POWER

ALM

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Other parameters specify the allowable under-voltage level and the delay time before restarting.
The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application, the necessity of
restarting the process in unattended situations, and whether restarting is always safe.

3–30

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

“B” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B002 Allowable undervoltage power failure
time

The amount of time a power
input under-voltage can
occur without tripping the
power failure alarm. If
under-voltage exists longer
than this time, the inverter
trips, even if the restart
mode is selected. If it exists
less than this time retry will
be attempted. Range is 0.3 to
1.0 sec.

✘✔

1.0

sec.

>b002 IPS
TIME

B003 Retry wait time before
motor restart

Time delay after a trip
condition goes away before
the inverter restarts the
motor.
Range is 0.3 to 100 seconds.

✘✔

1.0

sec.

>b003 IPS
WAIT
001.0s

B004 Instantaneous power
failure / under-voltage
trip alarm enable

Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
02 Disable during stop and
ramp to stop

✘✔

—

>b004 IPS
TRIP

OFF

B005 Number of restarts on
power failure / undervoltage trip events

Two option codes:
00 Restart 16 times
01 Always restart

✘✔

—

>b005 IPS
RETRY

B006 Phase loss detection
enable

Two option codes:
00 Disable – no trip on
phase loss
01 Enable – trip on phase
loss

✘✔

—

>b006 PH-FAIL
SELECT
OFF

B007 Restart frequency
threshold

When the frequency of the
motor is less than this value,
the inverter will restart at
0 Hz.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>b007 IPS
F
0000.00Hz

1.0s

CAUTION: When a loss of phase occurs, increased ripple current will markedly reduce main
capacitor life over time. Diode bridge failure can also result. If phase loss occurs under load,
the inverter could be damaged. Please pay particular attention to the setting of function B006.

Electronic
The thermal overload detection protects
Thermal Overload the inverter and motor from overheating
due to an excessive load. It uses a current/
Alarm Setting
inverse time curve to determine the trip
point. The thermal overload alarm [THM]
is the resulting intelligent output.
First, use B013 to select the torque
characteristic that matches your load.
This allows the inverter to utilize the best
thermal overload characteristic for your
application.

Trip current
reduction
factor
Constant torque
x 1.0
x 0.8

Reduced
torque

x 0.6

B013=01
B013=00

60
120
Output frequency

3–31

SJ300 Inverter

The torque developed in a motor is directly proportional to the current in the windings, which is
also proportional to the heat generated (and temperature, over time). Therefore, you must set
the thermal overload threshold in terms of current (amperes) with parameter B012. The range is
50% to 120% of the rated current for each inverter model. If the current exceeds the level you
specify, the inverter will trip and log an event (error E5) in the history table. The inverter turns
the motor output OFF when tripped. Separate settings are available for the second and third
motors (if applicable), as shown in the table below.
Function
Code

Function/Description

Data or Range

B012 / B212 Electronic thermal setting (calculated
/ B312
within the inverter from current output)

Trip
time (s)
60

The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the
way the inverter calculates thermal heating,
based on the type of load connected to the motor,
as set by parameter B013.

0.5
0

A
53.4

116% 150%

CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower
speeds, the cooling effect of the motor’s internal
fan decreases.

200%

Trip current at 60 Hz

The table below shows the torque profile settings. Use the one that matches your load.
Function Code

Data

B013 / B213 / B313

Function/Description

Reduced torque

Constant torque

Free-setting

Reduced Torque Characteristic – The example below shows the effect of the reduced torque
characteristic curve (for example motor and current rating). At 20Hz, the output current is
reduced by a factor of 0.8 for given trip times.
Trip current
reduction
factor

Trip
time (s)

x 1.0
60
x 0.8
x 0.6
0.5
0

Hz
5

A
42.7 55.2

73.6

92.8% 120%

160%

Reduced trip current at 20 Hz

Configuring Drive
Parameters

For example, suppose you have inverter model
SJ300-110LFE. The rated motor current is 46A.
The setting range is (0.2 * 46) to (1.2 *46), or
9.2A to 55.2A. For a setting of B012 = 46A
(current at 100%), the figure to the right shows
the curve.

Range is 0.2 * rated current to
1.2 * rated current

3–32

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

Constant Torque Characteristic – Selecting the constant torque characteristic for the example
motor gives the curves below. At 2.5 Hz, the output current is reduced by a factor of 0.9 for
given trip times.
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0

Trip
time (s)

x 0.9
x 0.8

0.5
0

Hz
2.5

47.8 62.1

82.8

Configuring Drive
Parameters

104% 135% 180%
Reduced trip current at 2.5 Hz

Free Thermal Characteristic - It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a
free-form curve defined by three data points, according to the table below.
Function
Code

Name

Description

B015 / B017 /
B019

Free-setting electronic
Data point coordinates for Hz axis
thermal frequency 1, 2, 3 (horizontal) in the free-form curve

B016 / B018 /
B020

Free setting electronic
thermal current 1, 2, 3

Data point coordinates for Ampere
axis (vertical) in the free-form curve

Range
0 to 400Hz
0.0 = (disable)
0.1 to 1000.

The left graph below shows the region for possible free-setting curves. The right graph below
shows an example curve defined by three data points specified by B015 – B020.
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0

Output
current (A)
B020
B018

x 0.8
Setting range

B016
0

Hz
5

Output freq.

400

Hz
B015 B017 B019 Ax04 max. freq.

Suppose the electronic thermal setting (B012) is set to 44 Amperes. The left graph below shows
the effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve. For example, at (B017) Hz, the output
current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is reduced by a factor of (B018). The
right graph below shows the reduced trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times.
Trip
time (s)
60

(x) = B018 value x 116%
(y) = B018 value x 120%
(z) = B018 value x 150%

0.5
0
(x)

(y)

(z)

Reduced trip current at (B017) Hz

SJ300 Inverter

3–33

Any intelligent output terminal may be programmed to indicate a thermal warning [THM].
Parameter C061 determines the warning threshold. Please see “Thermal Warning Signal” on
page 4–55 for more details.
“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B012 Level of electronic
thermal setting

Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current

✘✔

rated current for
each inverter model

>b012 E-THM
LEVEL
0016.5A

B212 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 2nd
motor

Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current

✘✔

rated current for
each inverter model

>b212 2E-THM
LEVEL
0016.5A

B312 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 3rd
motor

Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current

✘✔

rated current for
each inverter model

>b312
LEVEL

B013 Electronic thermal
characteristic

Select from three curves,
option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting

✘✔

—

>b013 E-THM
CHAR

B213 Electronic thermal
characteristic, 2nd
motor

Select from three curves,
option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting

✘✔

—

>b213 2E-THM
CHAR
CRT

B313 Electronic thermal
Select from three curves,
characteristic, 3rd motor option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting

✘✔

—

>b313 3E-THM
CHAR
CRT

B015 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (1)

Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

>b015 E-THM
F1
0000Hz

B016 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (1)

Range is 0.0 to 1000. A

✘✔

0.0

>b016 E-THM
A1
0000.0A

B017 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (2)

Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

>b017 E-THM
F2
0000Hz

B018 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (2)

Range is 0.0 to 1000. A

✘✔

0.0

>b018 E-THM
A2
0000.0A

B019 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (3)

Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

>b019 E-THM
F3
0000Hz

B020 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (3)

Range is 0.0 to 1000. A

✘✔

0.0

>b020 E-THM
A3
0000.0A

3E-THM
0016.5A

Configuring Drive
Parameters

CRT

3–34

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Overload
Restriction

If the inverter’s output current exceeds a
restriction area
preset current level you specify during
Motor
B022
acceleration or constant speed, the
Current
overload restriction feature automati0
cally reduces the output frequency to
t
restrict the overload. This feature does
not generate an alarm or trip event. You
Output
can instruct the inverter to apply
Frequency
overload restriction only during
constant speed, thus allowing higher
currents for acceleration. Or, you may
t
B023
use the same threshold for both acceleration and constant speed. In the case of
controlled deceleration, the inverter monitors both output current and DC bus voltage. The
inverter will increase output frequency to try to avoid a trip due to over-current or over-voltage
(due to regeneration).
When the inverter detects an overload, it must decelerate the motor to reduce the current until it
is less than the threshold. You can choose the rate of deceleration that the inverter uses to lower
the output current.
“B” Function

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

B021 Overload restriction
operation mode

Select the operating mode
during overload conditions,
four options, option codes:
00 Disabled
01 Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02 Enabled for constant
speed only
03 Enabled for accel, decel,
and constant speed

✘✔

B022 Overload restriction
setting

Sets the level for overload
restriction, between 50%
and 200% of the rated
current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of
rated current

✘✔

rated current times
1.50

B023 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction

Sets the deceleration rate
when inverter detects
overload, range is 0.1 to
30.0, resolution is 0.1.

✘✔

1.00

B024 Overload restriction
operation mode (2)

Select the operating mode
during motor overload
conditions, four options,
option codes:
00 Disabled
01 Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02 Enabled for constant
speed only
03 Enabled for accel, decel,
and constant speed

✘✔

Units

SRW Display

—

>b021 OLOAD
1MODE

>b022 OLOAD
1LEVEL
0024.8A

1.00

sec.

>b023 OLOAD
1CONST
01.00

—

>b024 OLOAD
2MODE

SJ300 Inverter

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

3–35

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

B025 Overload restriction
setting (2)

Sets the level for overload
restriction (2), between 50%
and 200% of the rated
current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of
rated current

✘✔

rated current times
1.50

B026 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction (2)

Sets the deceleration rate (2)
when inverter detects
overload, range is 0.1 to
30.0, resolution is 0.1.

✘✔

1.00

Units

SRW Display

>b025 OLOAD
2LEVEL
0024.8A

sec.

>b026 OLOAD
2CONST
01.00

Configuring Drive
Parameters

NOTE: Two sets of overload restriction parameters are available. The set that is in use may be
selected by means of an intelligent input terminal (see “Overload Restriction” on page 4–35).

3–36

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

Software Lock
Mode

The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in the
inverter memory. Use B031 to select from various protection levels.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

The table below lists all combinations of B031 option codes and the
Run
ON/OFF state of the [SFT] input. Each Check ✔ or Ex ✘ indicates
Mode
whether the corresponding parameter(s) can be edited. The Standard
Edit
Parameters column below lists Low and High level access for some
Lo Hi
lock modes. These refer to the parameter tables throughout this
chapter, each of which includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as
✘✔
shown to the right. The two marks (Check ✔ or Ex ✘) under the “Lo
Hi” subtitle indicate whether Low-level and/or High-level access
applies to each parameter as defined in the table below. In some lock modes, you can edit only
F001 and the Multi-speed parameter group that includes A020, A220, A320, A021–A035, and
A038 (Jog). However, it does not include A019, Multi-speed operation selection. The editing
access to B031 itself is unique, and is specified in the right-most two columns below.
B031
Lock
Mode

[SFT]
Intelligent
Input

F001 and
Multi-speed

Standard Parameters

B031

Stop

Run

Stop or Run

Stop

Run

OFF

✔

Low-level

✔

✘

✔

✘

OFF

✔

Low-level

✔

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✔

High-level

✔

NOTE: Since the software lock function B031 is always accessible when the motor is stopped,
this feature is not the same as password protection used in other industrial control devices.

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

B031 Software lock mode
selection

Description

Prevents parameter changes
in five options:
00 Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks all edits
01 Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks edits
(except F001 and Multispeed parameters)
02 No access to edits
03 No access to edits except
F001 and Multi-speed
parameters
10 High-level access,
including B031

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–F
(Jpn)

✘✔

Units

—

SRW Display

>b031 S-LOCK
Mode
MD1

NOTE: To disable parameter editing when using B031 lock modes 00 and 01, assign the [SFT]
function to one of the intelligent input terminals. See “Software Lock” on page 4–25.

SJ300 Inverter

Miscellaneous
Settings

The miscellaneous settings include scaling factors, initialization modes, and others. This
section covers some of the most important settings you may need to configure.

“B” Function
Func.
Code

3–37

Name

Run
Mode
Edit

Description

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B034 Run/power-on warning
time

Range is 0 to 65,530 hours

✘✔

hrs.

>b034 TIME
WARN
00000

B035 Rotational direction
restriction

Three option codes:
00 Enable for both dir.
01 Enable for forward only
02 Enable for reverse only

✘✘

—

>b035 LIMIT
F/R
FREE

B036 Reduced voltage start
selection

Seven option codes:
00 Short
01, 02, 03, 04, 05 (middle)
06 Long

✘✔

—

>b036 RVS
ADJUST

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Run
Mode
Edit

Description

B037 Function code display
restriction

Three option codes:
00 Display all
01 Display only utilized
functions (see table
below)
02 Display user-selected
functions only (configure with U01 to U12)

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–F
(Jpn)

✘✔

Units

—

SRW Display

>b037 DISP
Mode
ALL

For example, you can set B037=01 to have the inverter suppress the displaying of all analog
input parameters when A001=01, as shown in the first row of the following table.
Function
Code

Data

A001

A002
A019

Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01)
A005, A006, A011 – A016,
A101 – A114, C081 – C083,
C121 – C123

01, 03, 04, B087
05
00

C001 – C008 02, 03, 04,
05

A028 – A035

Notes
[O], [OI], [O2] terminal
functions
Stop key function
Multi-speed function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Function Code Display Restriction – The inverter has the (optional) capability to suppress the
display and editing of certain parameters. Use B037 to select the display options. The purpose
of this feature is to hide particular secondary parameters that become unused or not applicable
based on more fundamental parameter settings. For example, setting A001 = 01 configures the
inverter to get its frequency command from the front keypad potentiometer. In this case, the
inverter will not use the analog inputs nor their adjustment parameters for an external frequency
command.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

3–38

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

Function
Code

Data

A044, A244

B100 – B113

Control methods

A051

A052 – A059

DC braking

A071

A072 – A076, C044

PID function

A094

A095 – A096

2-stage adjustable frequency

A294

A0295 – A296

B013, B213,
B313

B015 – B020

Electric thermal characteristic

B021

01, 02

B022, B023

Overload restriction

B024

01, 02

B025, B026

Overload restriction 2

B095

01, 02

B090 – B096

Dynamic braking function

A038, A039

Jogging

F202, F203, A203, A204, A220, 2nd motor control
A241 – A244, A261, A262,
A292 – A296, B212, B213, H202
– H206, H220 – H224, H230 –
H234, H250 – H252, H260

B088

Free-run stop

F302, F303, A303, A304, A320,
A342 – A344, A392, A393,
B312, B313, H306

3rd motor control

C102

Reset

C001 – C008

Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01)

27, 28, 29 C101
A044

A244

A044

00, 01
04
00, 01
04

A244

UP/DWN

A041 – A043

Torque boost function

H060

0Hz domain SLV limiter

A241 – A243

Torque boost function

H260

0Hz SLV limiter

03, 04, 05 B040 – B046, H001, H070 –
H072, H002, H005, H020 –
H024, H030 – H034, H050 –
H052, H060
03, 04

Notes

B040 – B046, H001, H070 –
H072, H202, H205, H220 –
H224, H230 – H234, H250 –
H252, H260

Vector control

A097

01, 02, 03 A131

Acceleration pattern constant

A098

01, 02, 03 A132

Deceleration pattern constant

B098

01, 02

B099, C085

Thermistor function

B050

B051 – B054

Instantaneous power failure

B120

B121 – B126

External brake control

SJ300 Inverter

Function
Code

C021 – C025,
C026

Data

H202

C042, C043

Frequency arrival signal

C040, C041

Overload advance notice

C055 – C058

Over-torque

C063

Zero-speed detection signal

C045, C046

Frequency arrival signal

C011

Overload advance notice 2

H020 – H024

Motor constant

01, 02

H030 – H034

Motor constant (auto-tuning)

H220 – H224

Motor constant

01, 02

H023 – H0234

Motor constant (auto-tuning)

P011 – P023, P025 – P027

Expansion card function

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B040 Torque limit selection

Five option codes:
00 4-quadrant mode
01 Selected by 2 input
terminals (see p. 4–37)
02 From analog [O2] input
(0 to 10V = 0 to 200%)
03 From expansion card 1
04 From expansion card 2

✘✔

—

>b040 TRQ-LIMIT
Mode
4-SET

B041 Torque limit (1)
(forward-driving in 4quadrant mode)

Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)

✘✔

150.

>b041 RQ-LIMIT
LEVEL1
150%

B042 Torque limit (2)
(reverse-regenerating in
4-quadrant mode)

Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)

✘✔

150.

>b042 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL2
150%

B043 Torque limit (3)
(reverse-driving in 4quadrant mode)

Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)

✘✔

150.

>b043 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL3
150%

B044 Torque limit (4)
(forward-regenerating
in 4-quadrant mode)

Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)

✘✔

150.

>b044 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL4
150%

B045 Torque limit LADSTOP
enable

Temporarily stops accel/
decel ramps during torque
limit. Available for SLV, 0
Hz domain, or vector control
with feedback mode.
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✔

—

>b045 TRQ-LIMIT
SELECT
OFF

Configuring Drive
Parameters

P010

Notes

02, 06

24, 25

H002

Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01)

3–39

3–40

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

B046 Reverse Run protection
enable

Prohibits reverse motor
rotation. Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

✘✔

SRW Display

Units

—

>b046 LIMIT
PREV

OFF

Controlled Deceleration at Power Loss – When enabled, this feature permits the inverter to
control final motor deceleration upon loss of inverter input power. First, you must make a
wiring change to the inverter. See “Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss” on
page 4–4 for complete instructions including wiring and signal timing diagrams for using the
controlled deceleration at power loss feature.
Configuring Drive
Parameters

After making the wiring change, use function B050 to enable the feature. Use B051 to determine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration. Use
parameter B054 to specify an initial step-wise deceleration at power loss, and B053 to specify
the duration of the linear deceleration.
During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor. With
either a high-inertia load or a short deceleration time (or both), it is possible that the inverter
impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over-voltage
condition on the DC bus. Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over-voltage. In
this case, the inverter pauses deceleration (runs at constant speed). When the DC bus decays
again below the threshold, linear deceleration resumes. The pause/resume process will repeat as
necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted (under-voltage condition occurs).
“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

—

>b050 IPS-DECEL
Mode
OFF

B050 Controlled deceleration
and stop on power loss

Allows inverter control
using regenerative energy to
decelerate after loss of input
power (requires jumper
change)
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✘

B051 DC bus voltage trigger
level during power loss

Sets trigger for controlled
deceleration and stop on
power loss function.
Range is 0.0 to 1000.V

✘✘

0.0

VDC >b051 IPS-DECEL

B052 Over-voltage threshold
during power loss

Sets over-voltage threshold
for controlled deceleration
function.
Range is 0.0 to 1000.V

✘✘

0.0

VDC >b052 IPS-DECEL

B053 Deceleration time
setting during power
loss

Range is 0.01 to 99.99 sec. /
100.0 to 999.9 sec. /
1000 to 3600 sec.

✘✘

1.00

sec.

>b053 IPS-DECEL
TIME
0001.00s

B054 Initial output frequency
decrease during power
loss

Sets the initial decrease in
output frequency upon
power loss.
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 Hz

✘✘

0.00

>b054 IPS-DECEL
DEC-F
00.00Hz

0000.0Vdc

SJ300 Inverter

3–41

Miscellaneous functions, continued...
B083: Carrier frequency adjustment – The internal switching frequency of the inverter
circuitry (also called the chopper frequency). It is called the carrier frequency because the
lower AC output frequency of the inverter “rides” the carrier. The faint, high-pitched sound
you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of switching power supplies in
general. The carrier frequency is adjustable from 500 Hz to 15 kHz (the upper limit varies,
depending on the inverter rating). The audible sound decreases at the higher frequencies, but
RFI noise and leakage current may be increased. Refer to the specification derating curves in
Chapter 1 to determine the maximum allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular
inverter and environmental conditions.
NOTE: When the inverter is in sensorless vector mode, use B083 to set the carrier frequency
greater than 2.1 kHz for proper operation.

B084, B085: Initialization codes – These functions allow you to restore the factory default
settings. Please refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9.
B086: Frequency display scaling – You can convert the output frequency monitor on D001 to
a scaled number (engineering units) monitored at function D007. For example, the motor may
run a conveyor that is monitored in feet per minute. Use this formula:
Scaled output frequency (D007) = Output frequency (D001) × Factor (B086)

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B080 [AM] terminal analog
meter adjustment

Adjust 8-bit gain to analog
meter connected to terminal
[AM], range is 0 to 255

✔✔

180

—

>b080 AM-MONITOR
ADJUST
180

B081 [FM] terminal analog
meter adjustment

Adjust 8-bit gain to analog
meter connected to terminal
[FM], range is 0 to 255

✔✔

—

>b081 FM-MONITOR
ADJUST
060

B082 Start frequency adjustment

Sets the starting frequency
for the inverter output, range
is 0.10 to 9.99 Hz

✘✔

0.50

>b082 fmin
F
00.50Hz

B083 Carrier frequency
setting

Sets the PWM carrier (internal switching frequency)
Range is 0.5 to 15.0 kHz, or
0.5 to 10 kHz when derated

✘✔

5.0

kHz

>b083 CARRIER
F
05.0kHz

B084 Initialization mode
(parameters or trip
history)

Select the type of initialization to occur, three option
codes:
00 Trip history clear
01 Parameter initialization
02 Trip history clear and
parameter initialization

✘✘

—

>b084 INITIAL
MODE
TRP

Configuring Drive
Parameters

NOTE: The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter-motor applications that must comply with particular regulatory agencies. For example, a European CEapproved application requires the inverter carrier to be less than 5 kHz.

3–42

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Defaults
Units

SRW Display

—

>b085 INITIAL
SELECT
USA

1.0

—

>b086 F-CONV
Gain
001.0

—

>b087 STOP-SW
SELECT
ON

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

B085 Country code for initial- Select default parameter
ization
values for country on initialization, four option codes:
00 Japan version
01 Europe version
02 US version
03 reserved (do not set)

✘✘

B86

Specify a constant to scale
D007 to display in engineering units.
Range is 0.1 to 99.9

✔✔

1.0

Select whether the STOP
key on the keypad is enabled
(req. A002=01, 03, 04, or
05). Two option codes:
00 Enable
01 Disable

✘✔

Name

Frequency scaling
conversion factor

B087 STOP key enable
Configuring Drive
Parameters

Run
Mode
Edit

Description

3–43

SJ300 Inverter

B091/B088: Stop Mode / Restart Mode Configuration – You can configure how the inverter
performs a standard stop (each time Run FWD and REV signals turn OFF). Setting B091 determines whether the inverter will control the deceleration, or whether it will perform a free-run
stop (coast to a stop). When using the free-run stop selection, it is imperative to also configure
how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed. Setting B088 determines whether
the inverter will ensure the motor always resumes at 0 Hz, or whether the motor resumes from
its current coasting speed (also called frequency matching). The Run command may turn OFF
briefly, allowing the motor to coast to a slower speed from which normal operation can resume.
In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable, corresponding to B091=00.
However, applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free-run stop (B091=01). This
practice decreases dynamic stress on system components, prolonging system life. In this case,
you will typically set B088=01 in order to resume from the current speed after a free-run stop
(see diagram below, right). Note that using the default setting, B088=00, can cause trip events
when the inverter attempts to force the load quickly to zero speed.

Some additional parameters further configure all instances of a free-run stop. Parameter B003,
Retry Wait Time Before Motor Restart, sets the minimum time the inverter will free-run. For
example, if B003 = 4 seconds (and B091=01) and the cause of the free-run stop lasts 10
seconds, the inverter will free-run (coast) for a total of 14 seconds before driving the motor
again. Parameter B007, Restart Frequency Threshold, sets the motor frequency at which the
inverter will no longer resume and accelerate, instead resuming from 0 Hz (complete stop).
B091=01 Stop Mode = free-run stop

B091=01 Stop Mode = free-run stop

B088=00 Resume from 0Hz

B088=01

Zero-frequency start

Motor
speed

Resume from current speed
B003 wait time

Motor
speed

[FW, RV]

[FW, RV]
t

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

B088 Restart mode after FRS

Description

Selects how the inverter
resumes operation when the
free-run stop (FRS) is
cancelled, two option codes:
00 Restart from 0Hz
01 Restart from frequency
detected from actual
speed of motor

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

✘✔

Units

—

SRW Display

>b088 RUN
FRS

ZST

Configuring Drive
Parameters

NOTE: Other events can cause (or be configured to cause) a free-run stop, such as power loss
(see “Automatic Restart Mode and Phase Loss” on page 3–29), and inverter trip events in
general (see “Miscellaneous Functions” on page 3–61). If all free-run stop behavior is important to your application (such as HVAC), be sure to configure each event accordingly.

3–44

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

“B” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B090 Dynamic braking usage
ratio

Selects the braking duty
cycle for the dynamic
braking resistor (total brake
% ON-time per 100 sec.
interval).
Range is 0.0 to 100.0%
0%Dynamic braking
disabled
>0% Enabled, per value

✘✔

—

>b090 BRD
%ED
000.0%

B091 Stop mode selection

Selects how the inverter
stops the motor, two option
codes:
00 DEC (decelerate and
stop)
01 FRS (free run to stop)

✘✘

—

>b091 RUN
STOP

B092 Cooling fan control
(see note below)

Two option codes:
00 Fan always ON
01 Fan ON during RUN,
OFF during STOP

✘✘

—

>b092 INITIAL
FAN-CTL
OFF

B095 Dynamic braking
control

Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable during RUN only
02 Enable always

✘✔

—

>b095 BRD
Mode
OFF

B096 Dynamic braking
activation level

Range is:
330 to 380V (200V class),
660 to 760V (400V class)

✘✔

360/
720

>b096 BRD
LEVEL
360Vdc

B098 Thermistor for thermal
protection control

Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable-PTC thermistor
02 Enable-NTC thermistor

✘✔

—

>b098 THERM
SELECT

B099 Thermal protection
level setting

Thermistor resistance
threshold at which trip
occurs.
Range is 0.0 to 9999 Ohms

✘✔

DEC

OFF

3000 3000 3000 Ohms >b099 THERM
LEVEL

3000ohm

B090: Dynamic braking usage ratio – This parameter limits the amount of time the inverter
can use the dynamic braking accessory device without entering the Trip Mode. Please refer to
“Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6 for more information on dynamic braking accessories.

NOTE: When cooling fan control is enabled (B092=01) the inverter always turns the fan ON
for 5 minutes immediately after powerup. This will cool the inverter in case the inverter / motor
is still warm from prior running before a short power outage.

SJ300 Inverter

Free-setting
V/f Pattern

3–45

The free-setting V/f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency parameter pairs to
define seven points on a V/f graph. This provides a way to define a multi-segment V/f curve
that best suits your application.
The frequency settings do require that F1 ≤ F2 ≤ F3 ≤ F4 ≤ F5 ≤ F6 ≤ F7; their values must have
this ascending order relationship. To satisfy this criterion during initial parameter editing, set
F7 (B012) and work backwards when setting these values, since the defaults are all 0 Hz.
However, the voltages V1 to V7 may either increase or decrease from one to the next. Therefore, you may set these parameters in any order.

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

V/f point 1, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b101 FREE-V/F
V1
000.0V

B101 Free-setting V/f
voltage (1)

V.F point 1, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b102 FREE-V/F
F1
0000Hz

B102 Free-setting V/f
frequency (2)

V/f point 2, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b103 FREE-V/F
V2
000.0V

B103 Free-setting V/f
voltage (2)

V.F point 2, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b104 FREE-V/F
F2
0000Hz

B104 Free-setting V/f
frequency (3)

V/f point 3, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b105 FREE-V/F
V3
000.0V

B105 Free-setting V/f
voltage (3)

V.F point 3, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b106 FREE-V/F
F3
0000Hz

B106 Free-setting V/f
frequency (4)

V/f point 4, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b107 FREE-V/F
V4
000.0V

B107 Free-setting V/f
voltage (4)

V.F point 4, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b108 FREE-V/F
F4
0000Hz

B108 Free-setting V/f
frequency (5)

V/f point 5, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b109 FREE-V/F
V5
000.0V

B109 Free-setting V/f
voltage (5)

V.F point 5, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b110 FREE-V/F
F5
0000Hz

B110 Free-setting V/f
frequency (6)

V/f point 6, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b111 FREE-V/F
V6
000.0V

B111 Free-setting V/f
voltage (6)

V.F point 6, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b112 FREE-V/F
F6
0000Hz

B112 Free-setting V/f
frequency (7)

V/f point 7, frequency
coordinate

✘✘

>b113 FREE-V/F
V7
000.0V

B113 Free-setting V/f
voltage (7)

V.F point 7, voltage coordinate

✘✘

0.0

>b114 FREE-V/F
F7
0000Hz

Configuring Drive
Parameters

B100 Free-setting V/f
frequency (1)

3–46

“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions

External Brake
Control

The brake control function in the inverter controls external braking used in systems such as
elevators. The purpose of this function is to ensure the inverter is powering the motor before
releasing external brakes that would permit the load to move or coast. This function requires the
configuration and wiring of intelligent input and output terminals. See “External Brake Control
Function” on page 4–39 for more information.
“B” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Run
Mode
Edit

Description

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

B120 Brake Control Enable

Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✔

—

>b120 BRAKE
Mode

B121 Brake Wait Time for
Release

Sets time delay between
arrival at release frequency
and the brake release signal.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.

✘✔

0.00

sec.

>b121 BRAKE
STA-WAIT
0.00s

B122 Brake Wait Time for
Acceleration

Sets time delay after brake
confirmation signal is
received until the inverter
begins acceleration
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.

✘✔

0.00

sec.

>b122 BRAKE
ACC-WAIT
0.00s

B123 Brake Wait Time for
Stopping

Sets time delay after brake
confirmation signal turns
OFF until decelerating the
inverter to 0 Hz.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.

✘✔

0.00

sec.

>b123 BRAKE
STP-WAIT
0.00s

B124 Brake Wait Time for
Confirmation

Sets the wait time for confirmation after turn ON/OFF of
brake release. If confirmation is not received during
the specified wait time, the
inverter will trip with an
external brake error.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.

✘✔

0.00

sec.

>b124 BRAKE
BRK-WAIT
0.00s

B125 Brake Release
Frequency Setting

Sets the frequency at which
the inverter will output the
brake release signal after
delay set by B121.
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0Hz

✘✔

0.00

>b125 BRAKE
OPEN-F 000.00Hz

B126 Brake Release Current
Setting

Sets the minimum inverter
current level above which
the brake release signal will
be permitted.
Range is 0% to 200% of
rated current

✘✔

Rated current for
each inverter model

>b126 BRAKE
OPEN-A
00.16.5A

[BRK] Brake release
Inverter
[BOK] Brake confirmation

[BER] Brake error

External Brake
System

Emergency Brake
(or alarm, etc.)

OFF

SJ300 Inverter

3–47

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
The eight input terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], and [8] can be configured for any of 44
different functions. The next two tables show how to configure the eight terminals. The inputs
are logical, in that they are either OFF or ON. We define these states as OFF=0, and ON=1.
The inverter comes with default options for the eight terminals. These default settings are
initially unique, each one having its own setting. Note that European and US versions have
different default settings. You can use any option on any terminal, and even use the same option
twice to create a logical OR (though usually not required).

Input Terminal
Configuration

Functions and Options –The function codes in the following table let you assign one of 44
options to any of the eight logic inputs for the SJ300 inverters. The functions C001 through
C008 configure the terminals [1] through [8] respectively. The “value” of these particular
parameters is not a scalar value, but it is a discrete number that selects one option from many
available options.

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

C001 Terminal [1] function

✘✔

18
[RS]

—

>C001 IN-TM
1
RS

C002 Terminal [2] function

✘✔

16
[AT]

—

>C002 IN-TM
2
AT

C003 Terminal [3] function

✘✔

06
[JG]

—

>C003 IN-TM
3
JG

✘✔

11
11
11
[FRS] [FRS] [FRS]

—

>C004 IN-TM
4
FRS

✘✔

09
09
09
[2CH] [2CH] [2CH]

—

>C005 IN-TM
5
2CH

C006 Terminal [6] function

✘✔

03
13
03
[CF2] [USP] [CF2]

—

>C006 IN-TM
6
USP

C007 Terminal [7] function

✘✔

02
[CF1]

—

>C007 IN-TM
7
CF1

C008 Terminal [8] function

✘✔

01
[RV]

—

>C008 IN-TM
8
RV

C004 Terminal [4] function
C005 Terminal [5] function

44 programmable
functions available
for terminals (see
next section)

Configuring Drive
Parameters

For example, if you set function C001=01, you have assigned option 01 (Reverse Run) to
terminal [1]. The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in Chapter 4.

3–48

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

The input logic convention is programmable for each of the six inputs. Most inputs default to
normally open (active high), but you can select normally closed (active low) in order to invert
the sense of the logic.
“C” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Units

SRW Display

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

C011 Terminal [1] active state

✘✔

—

>C011 IN-TM
O/C-1

C012 Terminal [2] active state

✘✔

—

>C012 IN-TM
O/C-2

C013 Terminal [3] active state

✘✔

—

>C013 IN-TM
O/C-3

C014 Terminal [4] active state

✘✔

—

>C014 IN-TM
O/C-4

✘✔

—

>C015 IN-TM
O/C-5

✘✔

—

>C016 IN-TM
O/C-6

C017 Terminal [7] active state

✘✔

—

>C017 IN-TM
O/C-7

C018 Terminal [8] active state

✘✔

—

>C018 IN-TM
O/C-8

C019 Terminal [FW] active
state

✘✔

—

>C019 IN-TM
O/C-FW

Name

Description

Select logic convention,
C015 Terminal [5] active state two option codes:
00 normally open N.O.
C016 Terminal [6] active state 01 normally closed N.C.

NOTE: An input terminal configured for option code 18 ([RS] Reset command) cannot be
configured for normally closed operation.

SJ300 Inverter

Intelligent Input
Terminal
Overview

3–49

Each of the eight intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following
table. When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments C001 to C008, the
respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code. The terminal functions have a
symbol or abbreviation, which we use to label a terminal using that function. For example the
“Reverse Run” command is [RV]. The physical label on the terminal block connector is simply
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. However, schematic examples in this manual also use the terminal
function symbol (such as [RV]) to show the assigned option. The option codes for C011 to
C019 determine the active state of the logical input (active high or active low).
Summary Table - This table shows all forty-four intelligent input functions at a glance.
Detailed descriptions of these functions, related parameters and settings, and example wiring
diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Input Terminals” on page 4–11.
Input Function Summary Table

Terminal
Symbol

CF1

CF2

CF3

CF4

SET

2CH

FRS

EXT

Function Name
Reverse Run/Stop

Description
ON

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops

Multi-speed select,
Bit 0 (LSB)

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0

Multi-speed select,
Bit 1

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0

Multi-speed select,
Bit 2

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0

Multi-speed select,
Bit 3 (MSB)

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0

Jogging

Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at jog
parameter frequency A038

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode

External Signal for DC
Injection Braking

DC braking will be applied during deceleration

OFF

DC braking will not be applied

Set (select) 2nd Motor
Data

The inverter uses 2nd motor parameters for generating frequency output to motor

OFF

The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor

Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration and
deceleration values

OFF

Frequency output uses standard acceleration and
deceleration values

Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to free run
(coast) to stop

OFF

Output operates normally, so controlled deceleration
stops motor

When assigned input transitions OFF to ON, inverter
latches trip event and displays E12

OFF

No trip event for ON to OFF transition; any recorded
trip events remain in history until Reset

2-stage Acceleration
and Deceleration

Free-run Stop

External Trip

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Option
Code

3–50

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

USP

Configuring Drive
Parameters

SFT

SET3

STA

STP

F/R

PID

Function Name
Unattended Start
Protection

Description
ON

On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)

OFF

On powerup, the inverter will resume a RUN
command that was active before power loss

OFF-to-ON transition signals the inverter that the
motor is already running at powerup (via bypass),
thus suppressing the inverter’s motor output in Run
Mode

OFF

ON-to-OFF transition signals the inverter to apply a
time delay (B003), frequency match its output to
existing motor speed, and resume normal Run Mode
operation

The keypad and remote programming devices are
prevented from changing parameters

OFF

The parameters may be edited and stored

If A005=00, terminal [OI] is enabled for input.
If A005=01, terminal [O2] is enabled for input.
(Use terminal [L] for signal return.)

OFF

Terminal [O] is enabled for voltage input
(Use terminal [L] for signal return)

The inverter uses 3rd motor parameters for generating
frequency output to motor

OFF

The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor

The trip condition is reset, the motor output is turned
OFF, and powerup reset is asserted

OFF

Normal power-on operation

START
(3-wire interface)

Starts the motor rotation

OFF

No change to present motor status

STOP
(3-wire interface)

Stops the motor rotation

OFF

No change to present motor status

FWD, REV
(3-wire interface)

Selects the direction of motor rotation: ON = FWD.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will start
a deceleration, followed by a change in direction.

OFF

Selects the direction of motor rotation: OFF =REV.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will start
a deceleration, followed by a change in direction.

Temporarily disables PID loop control. Inverter
output turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active
(A071=1).

OFF

Has no effect on PID loop operation, which operates
normally if PID Enable is active (A071 = 1).

Commercial Power
Source

Software Lock

Analog Input Voltage/
current Select

Set (select) 3rd motor
data

Reset Inverter

PID Disable

SJ300 Inverter

3–51

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

PIDC

DWN

UDC

OPE

SF1

SF2

SF3

SF4

SF5

SF6

SF7

PID Reset

Description
ON

Resets the PID loop controller. The main consequence is that the integrator sum is forced to zero.

OFF

No effect on PID loop controller

Selects alternate parameters H070 to H072 for the
source of the internal speed loop gain

OFF

Selects parameters H050 to H052 (or H250 to H252
for 2nd motor) for the source of internal speed loop
gain

Remote Control
UP Function (motorized speed pot.)

Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor from
current frequency

OFF

No change to output frequency

Remote Control
DOWN Function
(motorized speed pot.)

Decelerates (decreases output frequency) motor from
current frequency

OFF

No change to output frequency

Remote Control Data
Clearing

Clears the UP/DWN frequency memory by forcing it
to equal the set frequency parameter F001. Setting
C101 must be set=00 to enable this function to work.

OFF

UP/DWN frequency memory is not changed

Forces the source of the output frequency setting
(A001) and the source of the RUN command (A002)
to be from the digital operator

OFF

Source of output frequency set by (A001) and source
of run command set by (A002) is used

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Control gain setting

Operator Control

Multispeed bit 1

Multispeed bit 2

Multispeed bit 3

Multispeed bit 4

Multispeed bit 5

Multispeed bit 6

Multispeed bit 7

Configuring Drive
Parameters

CAS

Function Name

3–52

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

OLR

Configuring Drive
Parameters

TRQ1

TRQ2

PPI

BOK

ORT

LAC

PCLR

STAT

—

Function Name
Overload restriction

Description
ON

Selects current overload parameter set 2
(B024, B025, B026)

OFF

Selects current overload parameter set 1
(B021, B022, B023)

Enables torque limit feature

OFF

Disables all torque limit sources. Defaults to 200% of
inverter rated torque output.

Torque limit selection,
bit 1 (LSB)

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Torque limit selection,
bit 2 (MSB)

Logical 1

OFF

Logical 0

Proportional /
Proportional/Integral
mode selection

Selects Proportional-only control

OFF

Selects Proportional-Integral control

Brake confirmation
signal

Indicates external brake has released (used only for
external brake control function)

OFF

Indicates the external brake has not yet released

Orientation (home
search)

The encoder is in the home (oriented) position

OFF

The encoder position is not in the home position

LAC: LAD cancel

Disables the Linear Accel / Decel (LAD) mode

OFF

Normal Linear Accel / Decel mode

Torque limit enable

Position deviation reset ON

Clears the position deviation by setting the actual
position equal to the desired position

OFF

Position count operates normally

Pulse train position
command input enable

Enables the pulse train control of motor

OFF

Disables pulse train control of motor

Not selected

(input ignored)

OFF

(input ignored)

SJ300 Inverter

Output Terminal
Configuration

The inverter provides configuration for logic (discrete) and analog outputs, shown in the table
below.

“C” Function
Func.
Code

3–53

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

01
[FA1]

Units

SRW Display

✘✔

01
[FA1]

—

>C021 OUT-TM
11
FA1

C022 Terminal [12] function *

✘✔

00
00
00
[RUN] [RUN] [RUN]

—

>C022 OUT-TM
12
RUN

C023 Terminal [13] function * 22 programmable
functions available
for logic (discrete)
C024 Terminal [14] function * outputs (see next
section)

✘✔

03
[OL]

—

>C023 OUT-TM
13
OL

✘✔

07
[OTQ]

—

>C024 OUT-TM
14
OTQ

C025 Terminal [15] function

✘✔

08
[IP]

—

>C025 OUT-TM
15
IP

C026 Alarm relay terminal
function

✘✔

05
[AL]

—

>C026 OUT-TM
AL
AL

C027 [FM] signal selection

✘✔

00
output
freq.

—

>C027 FM-MONITOR
KIND
A-F

✘✔

00
output
freq.

—

>C028 AM-MONITOR
KIND
A-F

✘✔

00
output
freq.

—

>C029 AMI-MON
KIND
A-F

C028 [AM] signal selection

C029 [AMI] signal selection

8 programmable
functions available
for analog outputs
(see after next
section)

NOTE: *Terminals [11] – [13] or [11] – [14] are automatically configured as AC0 – AC2 or
AC0 – AC3 when C62 is configured to enable alarm code output.

The output logic convention is programmable for terminals [11] – [15], and the alarm relay
terminals. The open-collector output terminals [11] – [15] default to normally open (active
low), but you can select normally closed (active high) for the terminals in order to invert the
sense of the logic. You can invert the logical sense of the alarm relay output as well.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

C021 Terminal [11] function *

3–54

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Defaults
Units

SRW Display

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

C031 Terminal [11] active
state

✘✔

—

>C031 OUT-TM
O/C-11
NO

C032 Terminal [12] active
state

✘✔

—

>C032 OUT-TM
O/C-12
NO

✘✔

—

>C033 OUT-TM
O/C-13
NO

✘✔

—

>C034 OUT-TM
O/C-14
NO

C035 Terminal [15] active
state

✘✔

—

>C035 OUT-TM
O/C-15
NO

C036 Alarm relay terminal
active state

✘✔

—

>C036 OUT-TM
O/C-AL

Name

Description

C033 Terminal [13] active
state
C034 Terminal [14] active
state

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Run
Mode
Edit

Select logic convention,
two option codes:
00 normally open N.O.
01 normally closed N.C.

Output Summary Table - This table shows all twenty-two functions for the logic output
terminals [11] – [15] at a glance. Detailed function descriptions, related parameters, settings,
and example wiring diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Output Terminals” on page 4–42.

Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

RUN

FA1

FA2

Function Name
Run signal

Frequency arrival type
1 – constant speed

Frequency arrival type
2 – over-frequency

Overload advance
notice signal (1)

Output deviation for
PID control

Alarm signal

Description
ON

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor running

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stopped

when output to motor is at the standard set frequency
F001

OFF

when output to motor is not at the set frequency F001

when output to motor is at or above the FA threshold
1(C042) during accel

OFF

when the output to motor is below the FA threshold 1
(C043) during decel

when output current is more than the set threshold for
the overload signal (set with C041)

OFF

when output current is less than the set threshold for
the overload signal

when PID error is more than the set threshold for the
deviation signal

OFF

when PID error is less than the set threshold for the
deviation signal

when the alarm condition has been met and not reset

OFF

when the alarm had not tripped since the previous
power cycle or since the previous keypad reset

SJ300 Inverter

3–55

Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

FA3

TRQ

RNT

ONT

THM

BRK

BER

DSE

Frequency arrival type
3 – at frequency

Over-torque signal

Instantaneous power
failure signal

Under-voltage signal

In torque limit

Operation time over

Plug-in time over

Thermal alarm signal

Brake release signal

Brake error signal

Zero speed detect

Speed deviation
maximum

Description
ON

when output to motor is at the FA threshold 1 (C042)
during accel, or at C043 during decel

OFF

when the output to motor is not at either the FA
threshold 1 (C042) during accel or at C043 during
decel

when the over-torque feature is enabled and the motor
is generating excess torque

OFF

when the over-torque feature is disabled or the motor
is not generating excess torque

when the inverter input power has decreased below
the acceptable input voltage level

OFF

when the inverter input power is within rated range

when the inverter input power has decreased below
the acceptable input voltage level

OFF

when the inverter input power is within rated range

when the output torque exceeds level set for the
particular torque/frequency quadrant in effect during
operation

OFF

when the output torque is less than the level set for the
operating quadrant

when the inverter Run time exceeds the limit set by
Run/power-on warning time (B034)

OFF

when the inverter Run time is less than the limit set by
Run/power-on warning time (B034)

when the inverter plug-in time exceeds the set limit

OFF

when the inverter plug-in time is less than the limit

when the thermal limit for the motor is exceeded

OFF

when the thermal limit is not exceeded

when the inverter signals the external braking system
to release (open) its brake

OFF

when the inverter is not driving the motor, and needs
the external brake engaged

when the output current is less than the set releasing
current

OFF

when the braking function is not in use, or when the
output current to the motor is correct and it is safe to
release the brake

when the encoder pulses of the motor has stopped

OFF

when motor rotation causes encoder pulses

when the velocity error exceeds the error threshold
defined for the encoder input

OFF

when the velocity error is less than the error threshold
defined for the encoder input

Configuring Drive
Parameters

OTQ

Function Name

3–56

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

POK

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Function Name

Description

Positioning completion ON

FA4

Frequency arrival type
4 – over-frequency (2)

FA5

Frequency arrival type
5 – at frequency (2)

OL2

Overload notice
advance signal (2)

when the load position is at the target

OFF

when the load position is not yet at the target

when output to motor is at or above the FA threshold
2 (C045) during accel

OFF

when the output to motor is below the FA threshold 2
(C046) during decel

when output to motor is at the FA threshold 2 (C045)
during accel, or at C046 during decel

OFF

when the output to motor is not at either the FA
threshold 2 (C045) during accel or at C046 during
decel

when output current is more than the set threshold for
the overload signal

OFF

when output current is less than the set threshold for
the overload signal

Analog Summary Table - The following table shows all eight functions available for assignment to the three analog output terminals [FM], [AM], [AMI] at a glance. Detailed descriptions, related parameters and settings, and example wiring diagrams are in “Analog Output
Operation” on page 4–62.

Analog Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Function Name

Description

Corresponding Signal
Range

Output frequency

Actual motor speed, represented by PWM
signal

0 to max. frequency in Hz

Output current

Motor current (% of maximum rated output
current), represented by PWM signal

0 to 200%

Output torque

Rated output torque

0 to 200%

Digital output
frequency

Output frequency (available only at FM
output)

0 to max. frequency in Hz

Output voltage

Rated output voltage to motor

0 to 100%

Input power

Rated input power

0 to 200%

Electronic thermal
overload

Percentage of electronic overload attained

0 to 100%

LAD frequency

Internal ramp generator frequency

0 to max. frequency in Hz

3–57

SJ300 Inverter

Output Function
Adjustment
Parameters

The following parameters work in
conjunction with the intelligent output
function, when configured. The
overload level parameter (C041) sets the
motor current level at which the
overload signal [OL] turns ON. The
range of settings is from 0% to 200% of
the rated current for the inverter. This
function is for generating an early
warning logic output, without causing
either a trip event or a restriction of the
motor current (those effects are available on other functions).

Overload
signal
1
0
t

Output
frequency

C042

C043

Configuring Drive
Parameters

The frequency arrival signal, [FA1] to
[FA5], is intended to indicate when the
inverter output has reached (arrived at)
the target frequency. You can adjust the
timing of the leading and trailing edges
of the signal via two parameters specific
to acceleration and deceleration ramps,
C042 and C043.

C041

Motor
current

Arrival
signal
1
0
t

The Error for the PID loop is the magnitude (absolute value) of the difference
between the Setpoint (desired value)
and Process Variable (actual value). The
PID output deviation signal [OD]
(output terminal function option code
04) indicates when the error magnitude
has exceeded a magnitude you define.

PID Error
(PV-SP)

C044
Deviation
Signal
1
0
t

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

C040 Overload signal output
mode

Choose when the overload
signal is enabled; two option
codes:
00 During accel/decel
01 During constant speed

✘✔

—

>CO40 OL
Mode

C041 Overload level setting

Range is 0.00 * rated current
to 2.00 * rated current

✘✔

Rated current for
each inverter

>C041 OL
LEVEL
0016.5A

C042 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration

Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
acceleration

✘✔

0.00

>C042 ARV
ACC
0000.00Hz

C043 Arrival frequency
setting for deceleration

Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
deceleration

✘✔

0.00

>C043 ARV
DEC
0000.00Hz

CRT

3–58

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

“C” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

C044 PID deviation level
setting

Sets the PID loop error
threshold |SP - PV|
(absolute value) to trigger
intelligent output [OD].
Range is 0.0 to 100%,
resolution is 0.1%

✘✔

3.0

>C044 PID
LEVEL
003.0%

C045 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration
(2)

Range is 0.0 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>C045 ARV
ACC2
0000.00Hz

C046 Frequency arrival
setting for deceleration
(2)

Range is 0.0 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>C046 ARV
DEC2
0000.00Hz

C055 Over-torque (forwarddriving) level setting

Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant I. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx

✘✔

100.

>C055 OV-TRQ
FW-V
100%

C056 Over-torque (reverse
regenerating) level
setting

Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant II. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx

✘✔

100.

>C056 OV-TRQ
RV-R
100%

C057 Over-torque (reverse
driving) level setting

Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant III. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx

✘✔

100.

>C057 OV-TRQ
RV-V
100%

C058 Over-torque (forward
regenerating) level
setting

Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant IV. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx

✘✔

100.

>C058 OV-TRQ
FW-R
100%

C061 Electronic thermal
warning level setting

Sets the threshold for intelligent output [THM].
Range is 0 to 100%

✘✔

80.

>C061 E-THM
WARN

C062 Alarm code output

Allows binary alarm codes
to be output to intelligent
terminals.
Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable – 3-bit code
02 Enable – 4-bit code

✘✔

—

>C062 AL-CODE
SELECT
OFF

C063 Zero speed detection
level

Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 Hz

✘✔

0.00

>C063 ZS
LEVEL
000.00Hz

080%

SJ300 Inverter

3–59

Serial
The following table configures the communications port of the SJ300 inverter. You can have up
Communications to thirty-two devices on the serial communications network. The inverters are slaves and the
computer or digital operator is the master. Thus, all inverters on the serial connection must use
the same baud rate, data length, parity, and stop bits. However, each device on the serial
network must have a unique node address. See “Serial Communications” on page B–1 for more
information.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Four option codes:
02 Digital operator
03 RS485
04 Expansion card #1
05 Expansion card #2

✘✘

—

>C070 PARAM
SELECT
REM

C071 Communication speed
selection

Five option codes:
02 (Test)
03 2400bps
04 4800bps
05 9600bps
06 19200bps

✘✔

bps

>C071 RS485
BAU
4800bps

C072 Node allocation

Set the address of the
inverter on the network.
Range is 1 to 32.

✘✔

—

>C072 RS485
ADDRESS

C073 Communication data
length selection

Two option codes:
07 7-bit data
08 8-bit data

✘✔

—

>C073 RS485
BIT
7BIT

C074 Communication parity
selection

Three option codes:
00 No parity
01 Even parity
02 Odd parity

✘✔

—

>C074 RS485
PARITY

C075 Communication stop bit
selection

Two option codes:
01 1 stop bit
02 2 stop bits

✘✔

—

>C075 RS485
STOPBIT
1BIT

C078 Communication wait
time

Time the inverter waits after
receiving a message before it
transmits. Range is 0.0 to
1000 ms

✘✔

—

>C078 RS485
WAIT
0000ms

Configuring Drive
Parameters

C070 Data command method

3–60

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Analog Signal
Calibration
Settings

The functions in the following table configure the signals for the analog output terminals. Note
that these settings do not change the current/voltage or sink/source characteristics – only the
zero and span (scaling) of the signals.

“C” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

C081 [O] input span calibration

Range is 0 to 65530

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C081 O-ADJUST
TOP
02119

C082 [OI] input span calibration

Range is 0 to 65530

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C082 OI-ADJUST
TOP
02512

C083 [O2] input span calibration

Range is 0 to 65530

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C083 O2-ADJUST
TOP
02818

C085 Thermistor input tuning

Range is 0.0 to 1000

✔✔

105.0 105.0 105.0

—

>C085 THERM
ADJUST
0105.0

C086 [AM] terminal offset
tuning

Range is 0.0 to 10.0V

✔✔

0.0

>C086 AM-MONITOR
OFFSET
00.0V

C087 [AMI] terminal meter
tuning

Range is 0.0 to 250%

✔✔

80.

>C087 AMI-MON
ADJUST
080

C088 [AMI] terminal offset
tuning

Range is 0 to 20mA

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

>C088 AMI-MON
OFFSET
04.0mA

C121 [O] input zero calibration

Range is 0 to 6553 (65530)

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C121 O-ADJUST
ZERO
00000

C122 [OI] input zero calibration

Range is 0 to 6553 (65530)

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C122 OI-ADJUST
ZERO
00000

C123 [O2] input zero calibration

Range is 0 to 6553 (65530)

✔✔

Factory-calibrated

—

>C123 O2-ADJUST
ZERO
03622

NOTE: Settings C081, C082, C083, C121, C122, C123 are factory-calibrated for each inverter.
Do not change these settings unless absolutely necessary. Note that if you restore factory
defaults for all parameters, these settings will not change.

SJ300 Inverter

Miscellaneous
Functions

The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups.

“C” Function
Func.
Code

3–61

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

Two option codes:
00 Display
01 No display

✘✔

—

>C091 INITIAL
DEBG
OFF

C101 Up/Down memory
mode selection

Controls speed setpoint for
the inverter after power
cycle. Two option codes:
00 Clear last frequency
(return to default
frequency F001)
01 Keep last frequency
adjusted by UP/DWN

✘✔

—

>C101 UP/DWN
DATA
NO-STR

C102/C103: Reset Mode / Restart Mode – The reset mode selection, set via parameter C102,
determines how the inverter responds to the [RS] intelligent input signal or keypad Stop/Reset
key in a trip condition. The options allow you to cancel the trip on either the OFF-to-ON or
ON-to-OFF transition of [RS], and if desired, stop the inverter if it is in Run Mode. A trip event
causes the inverter output to the motor to turn OFF immediately. If in Run Mode when the trip
occurred, the inverter and motor will enter free-run stop (coasting) operation. In some applications, the motor and load will still be coasting when the inverter returns to normal Run Mode
operation. For that situation, you can configure the inverter output (C103=00) to resume operation from 0 Hz and accelerate normally. Or, you can configure the inverter (C103=01) to
resume operation from the current speed of the motor (frequency matching)—often used in
applications such as HVAC.

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

C102 Reset mode selection

Determines response to
Reset input [RST].
Three option codes:
00 Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition,
Stops inverter if in Run
Mode
01 Cancel trip state at signal
OFF transition, Stops
inverter if in Run Mode
02 Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, no
effect if in Run Mode.

✔✔

—

>C102 RESET
SELECT

C103 Restart mode after reset

Two option codes:
00 Restart at 0 Hz
01 Resume operation after
frequency matching

✘✔

—

>C103 RESET
f-Mode

ZST

C111 Overload setting (2)

Range is 0.00 times rated
current to 2.00 times rated
current

✘✔

>C111
LEVEL2

Rated current for
each inverter model

OL
0016.5A

Configuring Drive
Parameters

C091 Debug mode enable

3–62

“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions

“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
Introduction

Configuring Drive
Parameters

The “H” Group parameters configure the
inverter for the motor characteristics. You
must manually set H003 and H004 values
to match the motor. Most of the remaining
parameters are related to vector control, and
are in use only when function A044 is set
for one of the vector control modes as
shown in the diagram. The procedure in
“Auto-tuning of Motor Constants” on
page 4–67 automatically sets all the parameters related to vector control. If you
configure the inverter to use vector control,
we highly recommend letting the autotuning procedure derive the values for you.
If you want to reset the parameters to the
factory default settings, use the procedure
in “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–9.

Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
V/f control,
constant torque

V/f control,
variable torque

V/f control, freesetting curve

A044

Output
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control

Sensorless vector,
0Hz domain

Vector control with
sensor

NOTE: The auto-tuning procedure and related warning messages are in “Auto-tuning of Motor
Constants” on page 4–67. Please read these before trying to auto-tune the motor parameters.

“H” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

H001 Auto-tuning Setting

Three states for auto-tuning
function, option codes:
00 Auto-tuning OFF
01 Auto-tune (measure
motor resistance and
inductance, without
rotating)
02 Auto-tune (rotate motor)

✘✘

—

>H001 AUX
AUTO

H002 Motor data selection,
1st motor

Select one of three motor
parameter sets, 3 options:
00 Standard motor data
01 Auto-tuning data
02 Adaptive tuning data

✘✘

—

>H002 AUX
DATA
NOR

H202 Motor data selection,
2nd motor

Select one of three motor
parameter sets, 3 options:
00 Standard motor data
01 Auto-tuning data
02 Adaptive tuning data

✘✘

—

>H202 2AUX
DATA
NOR

H003 Motor capacity, 1st
motor

Select 0.2 to 75.0kW for
models up to –550xxx,
0.2 to 160.0kW for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx

✘✘

>H003 AUX
K
003.70kW

Factory set

NOR

SJ300 Inverter

“H” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

3–63

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

>H203 2AUX
K
003.70kW

Select 0.2 to 75.0kW for
models up to –550xxx,
0.2 to 160.0kW for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx

✘✘

H004 Motor poles setting, 1st
motor

Four selections:
2/4/6/8

✘✘

Poles >H004 AUX

H204 Motor poles setting, 2nd
motor

Four selections:
2/4/6/8

✘✘

Poles >H204 2AUX

H005 Motor speed constant,
1st motor

Motor proportional gain
constant (factory set),
range is 0.01 to 99

✔✔

1.590 1.590 1.590

H205 Motor speed constant,
2nd motor

Motor proportional gain
constant (factory set)
range is 0 to 99

✔✔

H006 Motor stabilization
constant, 1st motor

Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

H206 Motor stabilization
constant, 2nd motor

Factory set

P
P

4P
4P

—

>H005 AUX
KP

1.590 1.590 1.590

—

>H205 2AUX
KP
1.590

✔✔

100.

—

>H006 AUX
KCD

Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

✔✔

100.

—

>H206 2AUX
KCD
00100

H306 Motor stabilization
constant, 3rd motor

Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

✔✔

100.

—

>H306 3AUX
KCD
00100

H020 Motor constant R1, 1st
motor

Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H020 AUX

H220 Motor constant R1, 2nd
motor

Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H220

H021 Motor constant R2, 1st
motor

Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H021 AUX

H221 Motor constant R2, 2nd
motor

Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H221 2AUX

H022 Motor constant L, 1st
motor

Range is 0.00 - 655.3 mH,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H022 AUX
L
005.12mH

H222 Motor constant L, 2nd
motor

Range is 0.00 - 655.3 mH,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H222 2AUX
L
005.12mH

H023 Motor constant I0, 1st
motor

Range is 0.00 to 655.3 A
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H023 AUX
I0
008.02A

H223 Motor constant I0, 2nd
motor

Range is 0.00 to 655.3 A,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H223 2AUX
I0
008.02A

H024 Motor Constant J, 1st
motor

Ratio (unit-less), range is
1.0 to 1000

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

—

>H024 AUX
J
000.055

1.590

00100

00.489ohm
2AUX
00.000ohm

00.355ohm

Configuring Drive
Parameters

H203 Motor capacity, 2nd
setting

3–64

“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions

“H” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi

Defaults
–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

—

>H224 2AUX
J
000.055

H224 Motor constant J,
2nd motor

Ratio (unit-less), range is
1.0 to 1000

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

H030 Auto-tuned motor
constant R1, 1st motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H030 AUX

H230 Auto-tuned motor
constant R1, 2nd motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H230 2AUX

H031 Auto-tuned motor
constant R2, 1st motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H031 AUX

H231 Auto-tuned motor
constant R2, 2nd motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

Ohm >H231 2AUX

H032 Auto-tuned motor
constant L, 1st motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H032 AUX
A-L
005.12mH

H232 Auto-tuned motor
constant L, 2nd motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H232 2AUX
A-L
005.12mH

H033 Auto-tuned motor
constant I0, 1st motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H033 AUX
A-I0
008.02A

H233 Auto-tuned motor
constant I0, 2nd motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

>H233 2AUX
A-I0
008.02A

H034 Auto-tuned motor
constant J, 1st motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

—

>H034 AUX
A-J
0000.055

H234 Auto constant J,
2nd motor

Auto-tuning data

✘✘

According to
inverter rating

—

>H234 2AUX
A-J
0000.055

H050 PI proportional gain for
1st motor

Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%

✔✔

100

>H050 AUX
KSP
0100.0%

H250 PI proportional gain for
2nd motor

Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%

✔✔

100

>H250 2AUX
KSP
0100.0%

H051 PI integral gain for 1st
motor

Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%

✔✔

100

>H051 AUX
KSI
0100.0%

H251 PI integral gain for 2nd
motor

Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%

✔✔

100

>H251 2AUX
KSI
0100.0%

H052 P proportional gain
setting for 1st motor

Range is 0.00 to 10.00

✔✔

1.00

—

>H052 AUX
KSPP
001.00

H252 P proportional gain
setting for 2nd motor

Range is 0.00 to 10.00

✔✔

1.00

—

>H252 2AUX
KSPP
001.00

H060 0Hz SLV limit for 1st
motor

Range is 0.0 to 100.0%

✔✔

100.

>H060 AUX
0SLV-LMT 100.0%

H260 0Hz SLV limit for 2nd
motor

Range is 0 to 100.0%

✔✔

100.

>H260 2AUX
0SLV-LMT
100.0%

H070 Terminal selection PI
Range is 0 to 99.9 / 100.0 to
proportional gain setting 999.9 / 1000%

✔✔

100.0 100.0 100.0

>H070 AUX
CH-KSP
0100.0%

H071 Terminal selection PI
integral gain setting

✔✔

100.0 100.0 100.0

>H071 AUX
CH-KSI
0100.0%

✔✔

1.00

—

>H072 AUX
CH-KSPP
001.00

Range is 0 to 99.9 / 100.0 to
999.9 / 1000%

H072 Terminal selection P
Range is 0.00 to 10.00
proportional gain setting

1.00

A-R1
A-R1

A-R2
A-R2

00.489ohm
00.489ohm
00.355ohm
00.355ohm

SJ300 Inverter

3–65

“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions
The two (optional) expansion cards for the SJ300 have associated configuration data. The
following table defines the functions and their value ranges. Please refer to the expansion card
manual for more details.
“P” Function
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

SRW Display

Units

Operation mode on
expansion card 1 error

Two option codes:
00 Trip (stop motor)
01 Continuous operation

✘✔

—

>P001 OPTION1
SELECT
TRP

P002

Operation mode on
expansion card 2 error

Two option codes:
00 Trip (stop motor)
01 Continuous operation

✘✔

—

>P002 OPTION2
SELECT
TRP

P010

Feedback option enable

Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✘

—

>P010 FEEDBACK
SELECT
OFF

P011

Encoder pulse-perRange is 128 to 65000
revolution (PPR) setting pulses per revolution

✘✘

P012

Control pulse setting

✘✘

—

>P012 FEEDBACK
CONTROL
ASR

P013

Pulse input mode setting Pulse input mode setting.
Three option codes:
00 quadrature
01 count and direction
02 separate forward and
reverse pulse trains

✘✘

—

>P013 FEEDBACK
PULSE
MD0

P014

Home search stop
position setting

Range is 0 to 4095 pulses

✘✔

—

>P014 FEEDBACK
POS
0000pls

P015

Home search speed
setting

Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 120.0Hz

✘✔

5.00

>P015 FEEDBACK
FC
005.00Hz

P016

Home search direction
setting

Two option codes:
00 Forward
01 Reverse

✘✘

—

>P016 FEEDBACK
TURN
FW

P017

Home search completion range setting

Range is 0 to 10,000 pulses

✘✔

P018

Home search completion delay time setting

Range is 0.00 to 9.99
seconds

✘✔

0.00

sec.

>P018 FEEDBACK
TW
000.00s

P019

Electronic gear set
position selection

Two option codes:
00 Position feedback side
01 Position command side

✘✔

—

>P019 FEEDBACK
EGRP
FB

P020

Electronic gear ratio
numerator setting

Range is 1 to 9999

✘✔

—

>P020 FEEDBACK
EGR-N
00001

P021

Electronic gear ratio
denominator setting

Range is 1 to 9999

✘✔

—

>P021 FEEDBACK
EGR-D
00001

Selects between automatic
speed regulation (ASR) and
automatic position regulation (APR) modes.
Two option codes:
00 ASR mode
01 APR mode

1024 1024 1024 pulse >P011 FEEDBACK
ENC-P

01024pls

pulse >P017 FEEDBACK
L

00005pls

Configuring Drive
Parameters

P001

3–66

“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions

“P” Function

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Func.
Code

Name

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

Units

SRW Display

P022

Feed-forward gain
setting

Range is 0.00 top 99.99 /
100.0

✘✔

0.00

—

>P022 FEEDBACK
FFWG
000.00

P023

Position loop gain
setting

Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0

✘✔

0.50

—

>P023 FEEDBACK
G
000.50

P025

Temperature compensa- Allows for motor-mounted
tion thermistor enable
thermistor to calibrate
output to motor temperature
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable

✘✔

—

>P025 FEEDBACK
R2-ADJ
OFF

P026

Over-speed error
detection level setting

Range is 0.0 to 150.0%

✘✔

135.0 135.0 135.0

>P026 FEEDBACK
0SPD
135.0%

P027

Speed deviation error
detection level setting

Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
120Hz

✘✔

7.50

—

>P027 FEEDBACK
NER
007.50Hz

P031

Accel/decel time input
selection

Three options:
00 Inverter
01 Expansion card 1
02 Expansion card 2

✘✘

—

>P031 ACC/DEC
SELECT
REM

P032

Positioning command
input selection

Three options:
00 Inverter
01 Expansion card 1
02 Expansion card 2

✘✔

—

>P032 P-SET
SELECT

P044

DeviceNet comm
watchdog timer

Range is 0.00 99.99 seconds

✘✘

1.00

—

>P044 DEVICENET
TIMER
01.00s

P045

Inverter action on
DeviceNet comm error

Five options:
00 Trip
01 Decelerate and trip
02 Hold last speed
03 Free run stop
04 Decelerate and stop

✘✘

—

>P045 DEVICENET
T-OUT
FTP

P046

DeviceNet polled I/O:
Output instance number

Three settings:
20, 21, 100

✘✘

—

>P046 DEVICENET
O-AS-INS
021

P047

DeviceNet polled I/O:
Input instance number

Three settings:
70, 71, 101

✘✘

—

>P047 DEVICENET
O-AS-INS
071

P048

Inverter action on
DeviceNet idle mode

Five options:
00 Trip
01 Decelerate and trip
02 Hold last speed
03 Free run stop
04 Decelerate and stop

✘✘

—

>P048 DEVICENET
IDLE
FTP

P049

DeviceNet motor poles
setting for RPM

Range is 00 to 38 (even
numbers only)

✘✘

REM

poles >P049 DEVICENET
P

00P

NOTE: Parameters P044 to P049 are available only in inverters with manufacturing code
x8K xxxxxx xxxxx or later. The manufacturing code is printed on the product specifications
labels, located on the front and side of the inverter housing.

SJ300 Inverter

3–67

“U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions
The user-selectable menu functions allow you to configure (select) any twelve of the other
functions in the inverter and place them together in a convenient list. This feature provides
quick access for the most-used functions needed for your application. Each U Group function
can serve as a pointer to any of the other parameters. You do not have to use the Store key to
retain each association; just scroll to the desired standard parameter for each U Group function
and leave it. The setting can point to a monitor-only parameter (such as D001), or point to
editable parameters (such as A001). In the case of pointing to an editable functions, you use the
Up/Down keys to change the value and the Store key to accept the change into memory—the
same procedure as a normal parameter edit.
“U” Function
Func.
Code

Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Units

SRW Display

–FU
(UL)

–FR
(Jpn)

U001

✘✔

—

>U001 USER
1

U002

✘✔

—

>U002 USER
2

U003

✘✔

—

>U003 USER
3

U004

✘✔

—

>U004 USER
4

U005

✘✔

—

>U005 USER
5

✘✔

—

>U006 USER
6

✘✔

—

>U007 USER
7

U008

✘✔

—

>U008 USER
8

U009

✘✔

—

>U009 USER
9

U010

✘✔

—

>U010 USER
10

U011

✘✔

—

>U011 USER
11

U012

✘✔

—

>U012 USER
12

Description

U006
U007

User-selected function

“no” (disabled), or any of
the functions D001 to P049

TIP: Function B037 selects which parameter groups are displayed. If you want to limit the
displayed parameters to only the U Group functions, set B037=02.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Lo Hi

–FE
(CE)

Name

3–68

Programming Error Codes

Programming Error Codes
The SJ300 inverter operator keypad displays a special code (begins with the character) to
indicate a programming error. Programming errors exist when one parameter conflicts with the
meaningful range permitted by related parameter(s). Note that particular real-time frequency
(speed) input levels can cause a conflict in some situations. After a conflict exists, the error
code will appear on the display, or you can view it later with D090 in Monitor Mode. Also, the
PGM LED on the display will flash ON/OFF when programming. These indications are
automatically cleared when the parameter is corrected to the allowed range.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

Programming Error
Code

Parameter out of bounds
Code

Description

Boundary defined by...
<, >

Code

Description

A004 /
A204 /
A304

Maximum frequency;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor

001 201

A061 / A261

Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

002 202

A062 / A262

Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

A003 / A203 /
A303

Base frequency setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor

F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor

006 206 306

A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings

012 212

A062 / A262

Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

F001,
A020 / A220

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor

016 216

A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings

021 221

A061 / A261

Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

F001,
A020 / A220

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor

031 231

A061 / A261

Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

032 232

A062 / A262

Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor

036

A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings

037

A038

Jog frequency setting

F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor

>f-x,
f-x,

Code

Description

B112

Free-setting V/f frequency (7)

A061 / A261

Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

092 292

A062 / A262

Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor

F001,
A020 / A220

Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor

A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings

B100, B102,
B104, B106,
B108, B110

Free V/f frequency

B102, B104,
B106, B108,
B110

Free V/f frequency

B100

Free-setting V/f frequency (1)

B100

Free V/f frequency

B102

Free-setting V/f frequency (2)

B104, B106,
B108, B110

Free V/f frequency

B100, B102

Free V/f frequency

B104

Free-setting V/f frequency (3)

B106, B108,
B110

Free V/f frequency

B100, B102,
B104

Free V/f frequency

B106

Free-setting V/f frequency (4)

B108, B110

Free V/f frequency

B100, B102,
B104, B106

Free V/f frequency

B108

Free-setting V/f frequency (5)

B110

Free V/f frequency

B100, B102,
B104, B106,
B108

Free V/f frequency

B110

Free-setting V/f frequency (6)

B017, B019

Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency

B015

Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (1)

B015

Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency

B017

Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (2)

B019

Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency

B015, B017

Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency

B019

Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (3)

096
110

120

NOTE: Set frequency (speed) values are not permitted to be inside the jump frequency ranges,
if defined. When a frequency reference value from a real-time source (such as keypad potentiometer or analog input) are inside a jump frequency range, the actual speed is automatically
forced to equal the lowest point of the jump range.

Configuring Drive
Parameters

091 291

095 295

3–69

Operations
and Monitoring
In This Chapter....

4
page

— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss........................ 4
— Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices ........................................... 7
— Using Intelligent Input Terminals ..................................................... 11
— Using Intelligent Output Terminals .................................................. 42
— Analog Input Operation................................................................... 59
— Analog Output Operation ................................................................ 62
— Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control .................................... 65
— PID Loop Operation ........................................................................ 71
— Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors.................................... 72

4–2

Introduction

Introduction
The previous material in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the programmable functions
of the inverter. We suggest that you first scan through the listing of inverter functions to gain a
general familiarity. This chapter will build on that knowledge in the following ways:
1. Related functions – Some parameters interact with or depend on the settings in other
functions. This chapter lists “required settings” for a programmable function to serve as a
cross-reference and an aid in showing how functions interact.
2. Intelligent terminals – Some functions rely on an input signal from control logic terminals
or generate output signals in other cases.
3. Electrical interfaces – This chapter shows how to make connections between the inverter
and other electrical devices.
4. Auto-tuning – The SJ300 inverter has the ability to run a calibration procedure in which it
takes measurements of the motor’s electrical characteristics. This chapter shows how to run
the auto-tuning procedure to help the inverter run the motor more smoothly and efficiently.
5. PID Loop Operation – The SJ300 has a built-in PID loop that calculates the optimal
inverter output frequency to control an external process. This chapter shows the parameters
and input/output terminals associated with PID loop operation.

Operations
and Monitoring

6. Multiple motors – A single SJ300 inverter may be used with two or more motors in some
types of applications. This chapter shows the electrical connections and inverter parameters
involved in multiple-motor applications.
The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are important to your application, and how to use them. The basic installation covered in Chapter 2 concluded with the
powerup test and running the motor. Now, this chapter starts from that point and shows how to
make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system.

Cautions for
Operating
Procedures

Before continuing, please read the following Caution messages.

CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed.
Be sure check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the
inverter. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.

SJ300 Inverter

Warnings for
Operating
Procedures

4–3

Before continuing, please read the following Warning messages.

WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case. While
the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front case. Otherwise, there is the danger of
electric shock.
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even
when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop. Be
sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine (be sure to design the machine so that
safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the inverter may restart
operation after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active. If a restart may pose
danger to personnel, so be sure to use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart after power
recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is present,
the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the
Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conductive
object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active, the motor will
automatically start and injury may result. Before turning ON the power, confirm that the RUN
command is not present.
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key does not stop the
inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop switch when the application warrants it.

Operations
and Monitoring

WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is enabled. Be sure to
enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to
personnel.

4–4

Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss

Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss
With the default SJ300 inverter configuration, a sudden power loss will cause the inverter to
shut down immediately. If running at the time, the motor and load will coast to a stop. And
without power, the inverter’s alarm output will not activate. This default performance may be
fine for applications with loads such as fans and pumps. However, some loads may require
controlled decelerations upon power loss, or you may want an alarm signal upon power loss.
This section describes how to harness regenerative energy so that the motor/load actually
powers the inverter long enough to control a final deceleration and power the alarm output.
The diagram below shows the default configuration. Chapter 2 covered wiring the power source
to the inverter input and the inverter output to the motor. By default, the inverter’s internal
control circuit gets its power from two phases (R and T) from the input. The user-accessible
2-wire jumper (R–R0 and T–T0) connects input power to the control circuit.
Power source,
3-phase
L1

T
J51

Ferrite
filter

Operations
and Monitoring

SJ300
Converter
Rectifier

Inverter
–

Control
circuit

Motor

2-wire
jumper

DC bus
+

–

To optional
braking resistor /
braking unit

N
AL1
AL0
AL2

To external
alarm circuit or
interface

To provide power to the control circuit after input power loss, you must change the control
circuit wiring as shown below (steps provided on following page).
Power source,
3-phase
L1

T
J51

SJ300

Converter
DC bus
+

Rectifier

Inverter
–

P
PD
RB

2-wire
jumper,
20AWG
Ferrite
filter

R0
T0

Motor

–
Control
circuit

To optional
braking resistor /
braking unit

AL1
AL0
AL2

To external
alarm circuit or
interface

SJ300 Inverter

4–5

Follow the steps to implement the wiring change shown in the previous diagram.
1. Remove the 2-wire jumper J51 (terminals [R0] and [T0] to connector J51).
2. Procure several inches of multi-strand 20 AWG (0.5mm2) or slightly heavier wire.
3. Connect a wire to terminal [R0] that is long enough to connect to terminal [P] (do not
connect to [P] yet).
4. Connect a wire to terminal [T0] that is long enough to connect to terminal [N] (do not
connect to [N] yet).
5. Remove the ferrite filter from the original jumper wire and then slide it onto the new wires
connecting to terminals [R0] and [T0]. (Be sure to save the original jumper in a safe place.)
6. Connect the wire from [R0] to [P], and connect the wire from [T0] to [N] as shown.
More information on power loss related alarm functions, see “Instantaneous Power Failure /
Under-voltage Signal” on page 4–51.
The following table lists the functions related to the controlled deceleration at power loss
feature. After making the wiring change, use function B050 to enable the feature. Use B051 to
determine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration.
Use parameter B054 to specify an initial step-wise deceleration at power loss, and B053 to
specify the duration of the linear deceleration. Note that this feature also affects the output
signals that indicate instantaneous power fail and under-voltage conditions (see “Instantaneous
Power Failure / Under-voltage Signal” on page 4–51).
Func.
Code

Name

Description

Range

Controlled deceleration and
stop on power loss

Allows inverter control using regenerative energy to decelerate after loss
of input power (requires jumper
change)

Two option codes:
00Disable
01Enable

B051

DC bus voltage trigger level
during power loss

Sets trigger for controlled deceleration and stop on power loss function

0.0 to 1000.V

B052

Over-voltage threshold during
power loss

Sets over-voltage threshold for
controlled deceleration function

0.0 to 1000.V

B053

Deceleration time setting
during power loss

Deceleration time inverter uses only
at power loss

0.01 to 99.99 sec. /
100.0 to 999.9 sec. /
1000 to 3600 sec.

B054

Initial output frequency
decrease during power loss

Sets the initial decrease in output
frequency upon power loss

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

Operations
and Monitoring

B050

4–6

Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss

The timing diagram below shows a power loss scenario and the related parameter settings.
During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor. With
either a high-inertia load or a short deceleration time (or both), it is possible that the inverter
impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over-voltage
condition on the DC bus. Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over-voltage. In
this case, the inverter pauses deceleration (runs at constant speed). When the DC bus decays
again below the threshold, linear deceleration resumes. The pause/resume process will repeat as
necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted (under-voltage condition occurs).
DC bus (V)
B052
B051
Under-voltage
level
0
Output
Frequency

B054

Operations
and Monitoring

B053
0

NOTE: (1) Be sure to set the over-voltage threshold greater than the DC bus voltage trigger
level (B052 > B051) for proper operation.
(2) Once the power loss deceleration function starts, it will complete and stop the motor even if
input power is restored. In that case, it automatically enables the Run mode again.

4–7

SJ300 Inverter

Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Hitachi inverters (drives) are useful in many types of applications. During installation, the
inverter keypad (or other programming device) will facilitate the initial configuration. After
installation, the inverter will generally receive its control commands through the control logic
terminals or serial interface from another controlling device. In a simple application such as
single-conveyor speed control, a Run/Stop switch and potentiometer will give the operator all
the required control. In a sophisticated application, you may have a programmable logic
controller (PLC) as the system controller with several connections to the inverter.
It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual. It will be necessary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to connect to the
inverter. Then, this section and the following sections on I/O terminal functions can help you
quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter.
CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application exceeds
the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point.
Other device

SJ300 Inverter
Signal

Input
circuit

Return

Output
circuit

Return

Output
circuit

Signal

Input
circuit

PLC

In order to avoid equipment damage and
get your application running smoothly,
we recommend drawing a schematic of
each connection between the inverter
and the other device. Include the
internal components of each device in
the schematic, so that it makes a
complete circuit loop.

Inverter
Jumper
P24
PLC

24VDC
Common

+
–

CM1
1
2
3

Input
circuits

After making the schematic, then:
1. Verify that the current and voltage
for each connection is within the
operating limits of each device.
2. Make sure that the logic sense
(active high or active low) of any
ON/OFF connection is correct.

5
6
7
8

3. Verify inputs are configured
correctly (sink/source) to interface
to interface to any external devices (PLCs, etc.).
4. Check the zero and span (curve end points) for analog connections, and be sure the scale
factor from input to output is correct.
5. Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly loses
power, or powers up after other devices.

Operations
and Monitoring

The connections between the inverter
and other devices rely on the electrical
input/output characteristics at both ends
of each connection, shown in the
diagram to the right. The inverter can
accept either sourcing or sinking type
inputs from an external device (such as
a PLC). A terminal jumper configures
the input type, connecting the input
circuit common to the supply (+) or (–).
Detailed wiring examples are in “Using
Intelligent Input Terminals” on page 4–
11. This chapter shows the inverter’s
internal electrical component(s) at each
I/O terminal and how to interface them
with external circuits.

4–8

Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices

Example Wiring
Diagram

The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logic connector wiring, in
addition to basic power and motor wiring covered in Chapter 2. The goal of this chapter is to
help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below for your
specific application needs.
SJ300
Converter
L1

Power source,
3-phase

2-wire jumper

J51

Rectifier

T0
Default jumper position
for –xFU/–xFR models
(sourcing type inputs)

P24

Default jumper position
for –xFE models
(sinking type inputs)

PD
Control
circuit

+–

RB
–

Braking
resistor
(optional)

Braking
unit
(optional)

AL1

PLC

AL0

CM1

AL2

Intelligent relay output
(alarm function default)

15
14

Input
circuits

12
Intelligent inputs,
8 terminals

Motor

24VDC

Reverse

Output
circuits

Forward

Operations
and Monitoring

–

T
R
R0

Ferrite filter

Inverter
DC bus
+

Intelligent outputs,
5 terminals,
open-collector

2
CM2
1
Expansion
Card #1
(optional)

CM1
TH

Thermistor
FM output
monitor

+
–
+
–

Expansion
Card #2
(optional)

FM
+10VDC reference
0 – 10VDC

Signals for expanded
features, including
encoder feedback,
digital I/O, and
DeviceNet networking

H
O

-10 / 0 / +10 VDC

4 – 20mA

10kΩ

+
–

10kΩ

+10VDC
reference

250Ω
Analog GND

NOTE: For the wiring of intelligent I/O and analog inputs,
be sure to use twisted pair /
shielded cable. Attach the
shield wire for each signal to
its respective common terminal at the inverter end only.

L
SP

AM output
monitor
AMI output
monitor

AM
100Ω

Send/
receive

RP
AMI

Jumper for
termination

RS-485 serial
communications

SJ300 Inverter

4–9

Specifications of The control logic connector board is removable for wiring convenience, as shown below (first,
Control and Logic remove two retaining screws). The small connector to the left is for serial communications.
Connections
Retaining screw locations

H O2 AM FM TH FW 8 CM1 5
SP SN RP SN
L

Serial
communications

O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1 7

Analog
inputs

Analog
outputs

Power

1 14 13 11 AL1

3
4

2 15 CM2 12 AL0 AL2

Logic
inputs

Logic
outputs

Alarm
relay

Specifications for the logic connection terminals are in the following table:
Terminal Name

Description

Ratings and Notes

+24V power for inputs

24VDC supply, 100 mA max.

[CM1]

+24V common

Common for 24V supply, [FW], [TH], inputs [1] to
[8], and [FM]. (Note: Do not ground)

[PLC]

Common for logic inputs

Common for input terminals [1] to [8], jumper to
CM1 for sinking, jumper to P24 for sourcing

[CM2]

Common for logic outputs

Common for output terminals [11] to [15]

[1], [2], [3], [4], [5],
[6], [7], [8]

Intelligent (programmable)
discrete logic inputs

27VDC max. (use [P24] or an external supply referenced to terminal [CM1]), 4.7kΩ input impedance

Forward/stop command

27VDC max. (use [P24] or an external supply referenced to terminal [CM1]), 4.7kΩ input impedance

Intelligent (programmable)
discrete logic outputs

Open collector type, 50mA max. ON state current,
27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage

[TH]

Thermistor input

Reference to [CM1], min. thermistor power 100mW

[FM]

PWM output

0 to 10VDC, 1.2 mA max., 50% duty cycle

[AM]

Voltage analog output

0 to 10VDC, 2 mA max.

[AMI]

Current analog output

4-20 mA, nominal load impedance 250Ω

[FW]
[11], [12], [13],
[14], [15]

[L]

Common for analog inputs

Sum of [OI], [O], and [H] currents (return)

[OI]

Analog input, current

4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal

[O]

Analog input, voltage

0 to 9.6 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, 12VDC
max., input impedance 10 kΩ

[H]

+10V analog reference

10VDC nominal, 10 mA max.

[AL0]

Relay common contact

[AL1]

Relay contact, normally
closed during RUN

[AL2]

Relay contact, normally
open during RUN

Contacts AL0–AL1, maximum loads:
250VAC, 2A; 30VDC, 8A resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.6A inductive load
Contacts AL0–AL2, maximum loads:
250VAC, 1A; 30VDC 1A max. resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.2A max. inductive load
Min. loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA

Operations
and Monitoring

[P24]

4–10

Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices

Terminal Listing

Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input and output material in this chapter.

Operations
and Monitoring

Intelligent INPUTS
Symbol

Code

Name

Intelligent OUTPUTS
Page

Symbol

Code

Name

Page

Reverse Run/Stop

4–12

RUN

Run signal

4–43

CF1

Multi-speed select, Bit 0 (LSB)

4–13

FA1

4–44

CF2

Multi-speed select, Bit 1

4–13

Freq. arrival type 1 –
constant speed

CF3

Multi-speed select, Bit 2

4–13

FA2

4–44

CF4

Multi-speed select, Bit 3 (LSB)

4–13

Freq. arrival type 2 –
over-frequency

Jogging

4–16

Overload advance notice signal

4–46

External signal for DC injection
braking

4–17

Output deviation for PID control

4–47

Alarm signal

4–48

SET

Set (select) second motor data

4–18

FA3

Freq. arrival type 3 – at freq.

4–44

2CH

2-stage accel and decel

4–19

OTQ

Over-torque signal

4–50

FRS

Free-run stop

4–20

Instantaneous power failure signal

4–51

EXT

External trip

4–21

Under-voltage signal

4–51

USP

Unattended start protection

4–22

TRQ

In torque limit signal

4–54

Commercial power source

4–23

RNT

Run time over

4–54

SFT

Software lock

4–25

ONT

Power-ON time over

4–54

Analog input voltage/current sel.

4–26

THM

Thermal alarm signal

4–55

SET3

Set (select) 3rd motor data

4–18

BRK

Brake release signal

4–58

Reset inverter

4–27

BER

Brake error signal

4–58

STA

Start (3-wire interface)

4–29

Zero speed detect

4–58

STP

Stop (3-wire interface)

4–29

DSE

Speed deviation maximum

4–58

F/R

FW, RV (3-wire interface)

4–29

POK

Positioning completion

4–58

PID

PID ON/OFF

4–30

FA4

Freq. arrival type 4 –
over-frequency (2)

4–44

FA5

Freq. arrival type 5 –
at frequency (2)

4–44

OL2

Overload advance notice
signal (2)

4–46

PIDC

PID Reset

4–30

CAS

Control gain setting

4–31

Remote control Up func.

4–33

DWN

Remote control Down func.

4–33

UDC

Remote control data clearing

4–33

Operator control

OPE
SF1–7
OLR

32–38 Multi-speed bits 1 to 7
39

4–34
4–13

Overload restriction

4–35

Torque limit enable

4–37

TRQ1

Torque limit select, bit 1 (LSB)

4–37

TRQ2

Torque limit select, bit 2 (MSB)

4–37

PPI

P / PI mode selection

4–31

BOK

Brake confirmation signal

4–39

ORT

Orientation (home search)

4–41

LAC

LAC: LAD cancel

4–41

PCLR

Position deviation reset

4–41

STAT

Pulse train position cmd enable

4–41

4–11

SJ300 Inverter

Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Intelligent terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], and [8] are identical, programmable inputs
for general use. The input circuits can use the inverter’s internal (isolated) +24V field supply
(P24) to power the inputs. The input circuits connect internally to [PLC] as a common point. To
use the internal supply to power the inputs, use the jumper as shown. Remove the jumper to use
an external supply, or to interface to a PLC system (or other) that has solid state outputs. If you
use an external supply or PLC system, its power return must connect to the [PLC] terminal on
the inverter to complete the input circuit.

Input Wiring
Examples

The following four input configurations are available to interface the inverter inputs to switches
or the outputs of another system, such as a PLC.
Sinking inputs,
internal supply

+–

SJ300 inverter

24VDC
common

P24

PLC

CM1

Input circuits

Jumpered for sinking
inputs (default for
–xFE models)

+–

SJ300 inverter

24VDC
common

P24

PLC

CM1

Input circuits

Jumpered for sourcing
inputs (default for
–xFU/–xFR models)
Sinking inputs,
external supply

+–

SJ300 inverter

24VDC
common

P24

Sourcing inputs,
external supply

CM1

+–

External
power supply

SJ300 inverter

24VDC
common

P24

–+

External
power supply

PLC

Input circuits

PLC

+
–

CM1

Input circuits

Operations
and Monitoring

Sourcing inputs,
internal supply

4–12

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Wiring Diagram
Conventions

The input wiring diagrams in this chapter are examples only. Default and non-default input
terminal assignments are noted throughout; your particular assignments may be different. The
wiring diagrams show the –xFU/–xFR model default [P24]–[PLC] jumper position (U.S./Jpn
versions), as shown below on the left. The common (return) for inputs is [CM1] in this case.
The diagram on the right shows the default jumper position and example input wiring for –xFE
models (Europe version). For this case, the common (return) for inputs is [P24]. Be sure the
jumper position and return terminal used match your application wiring needs.
–xFU/–xFR models (U.S./Jpn versions):

–xFE models (Europe version):

FW RV
TH FW 5
P24 PLC CM1

FW RV
4

TH FW 5

P24 PLC CM1

Default jumper
position [P24]–[PLC]
and wiring example
(used throughout this
chapter)

Operations
and Monitoring

Default jumper
position [PLC]–[CM1]
and wiring example

return

Forward Run/
Stop and Reverse
Run/Stop
Commands

When you input the Run command via the dedicated terminal [FW], the inverter executes the
Forward Run command (high) or Stop command (low). When you input the Run command via
the programmable terminal [RV], the inverter executes the Reverse Run command (high) or
Stop command (low).
Opt.
Code

Symbol

—

Function Name
Forward Run/Stop

State
ON

Description
Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs
forward

OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
01

Reverse Run/Stop

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs
reverse

OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A002 = 01

Notes:
• When the Forward Run and Reverse Run
commands are active at the same time, the
inverter enters the Stop Mode.
• When a terminal associated with either [FW]
or [RV] function is configured for normally
closed, the motor starts rotation when that
terminal is disconnected or otherwise has no
input voltage.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see examples above.)
FW RV
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

NOTE: The parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the single Run
key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command. However, it has no effect on the [FW]
and [RV] input terminal operation.
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active, the motor
starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON, confirm that the external Run
command is not active.

4–13

SJ300 Inverter

Multi-Speed
Select

The inverter can store up to 16 different fixed target frequencies (speeds) in parameters A020
to A035. Binary inputs select the speed through four of the intelligent terminals configured as
binary-encoded inputs CF1 to CF4 per the table. These can be any of the eight inputs, and in
any order. You can use fewer inputs if you need eight or fewer speeds.
Multispeed

Input Function
CF4

CF3

CF2

CF1

Speed 0

Speed 1

Speed 2

Speed 3

Speed 4

Speed 5

Multispeed

Input Function
CF4

CF3

CF2

CF1

Speed 8

Speed 9

Speed 10

Speed 11

Speed 12

Speed 13

Speed 6

Speed 14

Speed 7

Speed 15

NOTE: When choosing a subset of speeds to use, always start at the top of the table, and with
the least-significant bit: CF1, CF2, etc.

Speed
3rd
7th
5th
2nd
1st
6th
4th
0th
Switches

CF1
CF2
CF3
Fwd Run

Multi-speed Override Feature - The multi-speed function can selectively override the
external analog speed reference input. When the Frequency Source Setting parameter
A001=01, the control terminal inputs determine the output frequency. At the same time, the
inverter can use multi-speed select for output frequency if one or more intelligent inputs are
configured as a CF type (CF1 to CF4). When all CF input(s) are OFF, the control terminal input
determines the output frequency normally. When one or more CF input(s) are ON, then the
corresponding multi-speed setting (see the table above) overrides and becomes the output
frequency.

Operations
and Monitoring

The example with eight speeds in the figure below shows how input switches configured for
CF1 – CF3 functions can change the motor speed in real time.

4–14

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

CF1

Binary speed select,
Bit 0 (LSB)

Operations
and Monitoring

CF2

Binary speed select,
Bit 1

CF3

Binary speed binary
select, Bit 2

CF4

Binary speed select,
Bit 3 (MSB)

Input
State

Description

Bit 0, logical 1

OFF

Bit 0, logical 0

Bit 1, logical 1

OFF

Bit 1, logical 0

Bit 2, logical 1

OFF

Bit 2, logical 0

Bit 3, logical 1

OFF

Bit 3, logical 0

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

F001, A020 to A035
A019=00

Example: (Some CF inputs require input
configuration; some are default inputs—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)

Notes:
• When programming the multi-speed settings,
be sure to press the Store key each time and
then set the next multi-speed setting. Note
that when the Store key is not pressed, no
data will be set.
• When a multi-speed setting more than
50Hz(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to
program the maximum frequency A004 high
enough to allow that speed.

(LSB)

(MSB)

CF3
CF1 CF2 CF4

TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

While using the multi-speed capability, you can monitor the output frequency with monitor
function D001 during each segment of a multi-speed operation.
There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers A020 to A035:
1. Standard keypad programming:
a. Select each parameter A020 to A035.
b. Press the

FUNC.

c. Use the

1 and 2 keys to edit the value.

d. Use the

STR

key to view the parameter value.

key to save the data to memory.

2. Programming using the CF switches:
a. Turn the Run command OFF (Stop Mode).
b. Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi-speed. Display the value of F001 on the digital
operator.
c. Set the desired output frequency by pressing the 1 and 2 keys.
d. Press the STR key once to store the set frequency. When this occurs, F001 indicates the
output frequency of the selected Multi-speed.
e. Press the

FUNC.

key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set frequency.

f. Repeat operations in 2. a) to 2. e) to set the frequency of other Multi-speeds. It can be set
also by parameters A020 to A035 in the first procedure 1. a) to 1. d).

SJ300 Inverter

4–15

The Bit Operation method of speed control uses up to seven intelligent inputs to select from up
to eight speeds. Since the all-switches-OFF combination selects the first speed, you only need
N-1 switches to select N speeds. With Bit Operation speed control, only one input is normally
active at a time. If multiple switches are ON, the lower numbered input takes precedence
(determines the speed). The table and figure below show how the input combinations work.
Speed

Multispeed

7th
6th
5th
4th
3rd
2nd
1st
0th

Input Function
SF7

SF6

SF5

SF4

SF3

SF2

SF1

Speed 0

Speed 1

—

Speed 2

—

Speed 3

—

Speed 4

—

Switches
SF1

Speed 5

—

SF2

Speed 6

—

SF3

Speed 7

SF4
SF5
SF6
SF7

The following table lists the option codes for assigning [SF1 to [SF7] to the intelligent inputs.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

Description

SF1

Bit-level speed select 1

Bit-level speed select, Bit 0

SF2

Bit-level speed select 2

Bit-level speed select, Bit 1

SF3

Bit-level speed select 3

Bit-level speed select, Bit 2

SF4

Bit-level speed select 4

Bit-level speed select, Bit 3

SF5

Bit-level speed select 5

Bit-level speed select, Bit 4

SF6

Bit-level speed select 6

Bit-level speed select, Bit 5

SF7

Bit-level speed select 7

Bit-level speed select, Bit 6

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

F001, A020 to A035
A019=00

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.) SF7 SF5 SF3 SF1
SF6 SF4 SF2
TH FW 8 CM1 5 3 1

Notes:
• When all [SFx] inputs are OFF, the speed is
set by default to the value in F001.
• When a multi-speed setting more than
50Hz(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to
program the maximum frequency A004 high
enough to allow that speed.

P24 PLC CM1 7

Operations
and Monitoring

Fwd Run

4–16

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Jogging
Command

The Jog input [JG] is used to command the
motor to rotate slowly in small increments
for manual operation. The speed is limited
to 10 Hz. The frequency for the jogging
operation is set by parameter A038. Jogging
does not use an acceleration ramp. Therefore setting the jogging frequency A038 too
high will cause inverter tripping.

[JG]
[FW]
[RV]
A038

A jog command may arrive while the motor
Output
t
is running. You can program the inverter to frequency
either ignore or respond to a jog command
Jog decel type A039
in this case by using function A039. The
type of deceleration used to end a motor jog
is also selectable by programming function A039. Six jog mode options are defined below:
Jogging During Motor Operation

Operations
and Monitoring

Jog Deceleration Method
Disabled, A039=

Enabled, A039=

Free-run stop (coasting)

Deceleration (normal level) and stop

Use DC braking and stop

In the left example diagram below, the Jog command is ignored. In the right example diagram,
a jog command interrupts a Run mode operation. However, if the Jog command turns ON
before the [FW] or [RV] terminal turns ON, the inverter output turns OFF.
[JG]

[JG]

[FW]

A038

Output
frequency

A039=00, 01, 02
Decelerating stop (00) shown

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name
Jogging

A039=03, 04, 05
Free-run stop (05) shown

Input
State

Description

Enters Jog Mode if enabled (see above)

OFF

Jog is OFF

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A002= 01, A038 > B082,
A038 > 0, A039=00 to 05

Notes:
• Jogging is not performed when the value of
A038 jogging frequency is smaller than the
start frequency B082 or the value is 0 Hz.
• Be sure to turn ON [FW] or [RV] after the
[JG] input turns ON for a jog operation.
• When setting A039 to 02 or 05, you must also
set the DC braking parameters.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
JG
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

SJ300 Inverter

External Signal
for DC Injection
Braking

When the terminal [DB] is turned ON, the
DC braking [DB] feature is enabled. Set the
following parameters when the external DC
braking terminal is to be used:

Scenario 1
[FW, RV]

• A053 – DC braking delay time setting.
The range 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.

[DB]

• A054 – DC braking force setting. The
range is 0 to 100%.

Output
frequency
t

The scenarios to the right help show how
DC braking works in various situations.
Scenario 2

1. Scenario 1 – The [FW] Run or [RV]
Run terminal is ON. When the [DB]
terminal turns ON, DC braking is
applied. When the [DB] terminal turns
OFF again, the inverter output ramps to
the previous frequency.

Run command
from operator)
[DB]
Output
frequency

2. Scenario 2 – The Run command is
applied from the operator keypad. When
the [DB] terminal turns ON, DC braking
is applied. When the [DB] terminal
turns OFF again, the inverter output
remains OFF.

t
Scenario 3
Run command
from operator)

Symbol

Function Name
External Signal for
DC Injection
Braking

[DB]
delay

A053

Output
frequency

Input
State

Description

applies DC injection braking during
deceleration

OFF

does not apply DC injection braking
during deceleration

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A053, A054

Notes:
• Do not use the [DB] input continuously or for
a long time when the DC braking force
setting A054 is high (depends on the motor
application).
• Do not use the [DB] feature for continuous or
high duty cycle as a holding brake. The [DB]
input is designed to improve stopping performance. Use a mechanical brake for holding a
stop position.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
DB
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

Operations
and Monitoring

3. Scenario 3 – The Run command is
applied from the operator keypad. When
the [DB] terminal turns ON, DC braking
is applied after the delay time set by
A053 expires. The motor is in a freerunning (coasting) condition during this
delay time. When the [DB] terminal
turns OFF again, the inverter output
remains OFF.
Opt.
Code

4–17

4–18

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Set Second or
Third Motors

If you assign the [SET] or [SET3] functions to an intelligent input terminal, you can select
between two or three sets of motor parameters. You may assign one or both of these functions.
These second and third parameters store alternate sets of motor characteristics. When terminal
[SET] or [SET3] is turned ON, the inverter will use the second or third set of parameters
accordingly, generating the frequency output to the motor. When changing the state of the
[SET] or [SET3] input terminal, the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped.
When you turn ON the [SET] or [SET3] input, the inverter operates per the second or third set
of parameters, respectively. When the terminal is turned OFF, the output function returns to the
original settings (first set of motor parameters). Refer to “Configuring the Inverter for Multiple
Motors” on page 4–72 for details.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

SET

Operations
and Monitoring

SET3

Function Name
Set 2nd Motor

Set 3rd Motor

Input
State

Description

causes the inverter to use the 2nd set of
motor parameters for generating the
frequency output to motor

OFF

causes the inverter to default to the 1st
(main) set of motor parameters for generating the frequency output to motor

causes the inverter to use the 3rd set of
motor parameters for generating the
frequency output to motor

OFF

causes the inverter to default to the 1st
(main) set of motor parameters for generating the frequency output to motor

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

(none)

Notes:
• If the terminal state is changed while the
inverter is running, the inverter continues
using the current set of parameters until the
inverter is stopped.
• If both SET and SET3 are ON at the same
time, SET prevails and the 2nd motor parameters are in effect.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
SET
SET3
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

4–19

SJ300 Inverter

Two-stage
When terminal [2CH] is turned ON, the
Acceleration and inverter changes the rate of acceleration and
deceleration from the initial settings (F002
Deceleration

Output
frequency

and F003) to use the second set of acceleration/deceleration values. When the terminal
is turned OFF, the inverter is returned to the
original acceleration and deceleration time
(F002 acceleration time 1, and F003 deceleration time 1). Use A092 (acceleration
time 2) and A093 (deceleration time 2) to
set the second stage acceleration and deceleration times.

target frequency
second
initial

Input
signals

[2CH]
[FW, RV]

In the graph shown above, the [2CH] signal becomes active during acceleration. This causes the
inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 (F002) to acceleration 2 (A092).
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

2CH

Two-stage Acceleration and Deceleration

Valid for inputs:

Description

Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration and deceleration values

OFF

Frequency output uses the initial acceleration 1 and deceleration 1 values

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
A092, A093, A094=0

Notes:
• Function A094 selects the method for second
stage acceleration. It must be set = 00 to
select the input terminal method in order for
the [2CH] terminal assignment to operate.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
2CH
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

Required
settings:

Input
State

4–20

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Free-run Stop

When the terminal [FRS] is turned ON, the inverter turns OFF the output and the motor enters
the free-run state (coasting). If terminal [FRS] is turned OFF, the output resumes sending power
to the motor if the Run command is still active. The free-run stop feature works with other
parameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation.
In the figure below, parameter B088 selects whether the inverter resumes operation from 0 Hz
(left graph) or the current motor rotation speed (right graph) when the [FRS] terminal turns
OFF. The application determines the best setting.
Parameter B003 specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free-run stop. To
disable this feature, use a zero delay time.
Resume from 0Hz

Zero-frequency start

Motor
speed

Operations
and Monitoring

FRS

[FW, RV]

Symbol

FRS

Function Name
Free-run Stop

Switches

FRS

Opt.
Code

B003 wait time

Motor
speed

Switches

B088=01

Resume from current speed

B088=00

Input
State

Description

Causes output to turn OFF, allowing
motor to free run (coast) to stop

OFF

Output operates normally, so controlled
deceleration stops motor

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B003, B088, C011 to C018

Notes:
• When you want the [FRS] terminal to be
active low (normally closed logic), change
the setting (C011 to C018) that corresponds
to the input (C001 to C008) that is assigned
the [FRS] function.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
FRS
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

External Trip

4–21

When the terminal [EXT] is turned ON, the inverter enters the trip state, indicates error code
E12, and stops the output. This is a general purpose interrupt type feature, and the meaning of
the error depends on what you connect to the [EXT] terminal. Even if [EXT] is turned OFF, the
inverter remains in the trip state. You must reset the inverter or cycle power to clear the error,
returning the inverter to the Stop Mode.
In the graph below, the [EXT] input turns ON during normal Run Mode operation. The inverter
lets the motor free-run to a stop, and the alarm output turns ON immediately. When the
operator initiates a Reset command, the alarm and error are cleared. When the Reset is turned
OFF, the motor begins rotation since the Run command is already active.
[EXT]
free run

Motor revolution speed
[RS]
Alarm output terminal
[FW, RV]

Opt.
Symbol
Code
12

EXT

Function Name
External Trip

Input
State

Description
When assigned input transitions OFF to
ON, inverter latches trip event and
displays E12

OFF

No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded
trip events remain in history until Reset

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

(none)

Notes:
• If the USP (Unattended Start Protection)
feature is in use, the inverter will not automatically restart after cancelling the EXT trip
event. In that case, it must receive either
another Run command (OFF-to-ON transition), a keypad Reset command, or an [RS]
intelligent terminal input signal.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
EXT
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

4–22

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Unattended Start If the Run command is already present when power is turned ON, the inverter starts running
immediately after powerup. The Unattended Start Protection (USP) function prevents that
Protection
automatic startup, so that the inverter will not run without outside intervention. When USP is
active, there are two ways to reset an alarm and resume running:
1. Turn the Run command OFF, or
2. Perform a reset operation by the terminal [RS] input or the keypad Stop/reset key
The three examples below show how the USP function works in the scenarios described at the
bottom of the diagram. The error code E13 indicates the USP trip state and corresponds to the
Alarm signal in the diagram.
Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Power
supply
[FW]
[USP]
[RS]
Alarm

Operations
and Monitoring

Output
frequency

When USP is ON after powerup, the
alarm (E13) will clear when the Run
command (FW or RV) turns OFF.

Opt.
Code

Symbol

USP

Valid for inputs:
Required
settings:

Function Name
Unattended Start
Protection

If the alarm is cleared
during Run command,
the inverter output
restarts automatically.

Input
State

If the Run command is
already OFF at powerup,
the inverter output starts
normally.

Description

At powerup, the inverter will not resume a
Run command

OFF

At powerup, the inverter will resume a
Run command that was active before
power loss

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
(none)

Notes:
• Note that when a USP error occurs and it is
canceled by a reset from the [RS] terminal
input or keypad, the inverter restarts immediately.
• Even when the trip state is canceled by turning
the terminal [RS] ON and OFF after an undervoltage trip E09 occurs, the USP function will
be performed.
• When the Run command is active immediately
after the power is turned ON, a USP error will
occur. When this function is used, wait for at
least three (3) seconds after powerup before
applying a Run command.

Example: (Dfault input configuration
shown for -FU models; -FE and -F models
require input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
USP
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

Commercial
Power Source
Switching

4–23

The commercial power source switching function is useful in systems with excessive starting
torque requirements. This feature permits the motor to be started “across the line,” sometimes
called a bypass configuration. After the motor is running, the inverter takes over to control the
speed. This feature can eliminate the need to oversize the inverter, reducing cost. However,
additional hardware such as magnetic contactors will be required to realize this function. For
example, a system may require 55KW to start, but only 15KW to run at constant speed. Therefore, a 15KW rated inverter would be sufficient when using the commercial power source
switching.
The following block diagram shows an inverter system with bypass capability. When starting
the motor directly across the line, relay contacts Mg2 are closed, and Mg1 and Mg3 are open.
This is the bypass configuration, since the inverter is isolated from the power source and motor.
Then Mg1 contacts close about 0.5 to 1 second after that, supplying power to the inverter.
Mg2

Power source, 3-phase
MCCB

GFI
Mg1

Mg3

Thermal
switch

SJ300

Motor

R0
T0
AL1

[RV]

AL0

[CS]

AL2

CM1
H
O
L

Switching to inverter control occurs after the motor is running at full speed. First, Mg2 relay
contacts open. Then about 0.5 to 1 seconds later, relay Mg3 contacts close, connecting the
inverter to the motor. The following timing diagram shows the event sequence:
Mg1
Mg2/Mg3 delay time 0.5 to 1 sec.

Mg2
Mg3
FW
Set to 0.5 to 1 sec. typical
[CS]
Inverter
output

B003 (Retry wait time
before motor restart)
Frequency matching
Normal operation

Operations
and Monitoring

4–24

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

In the previous timing diagram, when the motor has been started across the line, Mg2 is
switched OFF and Mg3 is switched ON. With the Forward command to the inverter already
ON, the [CS] terminal is switched ON and relay Mg1 contacts close. The inverter will then read
the motor RPM (frequency matching). When the [CS] terminal is switched OFF, the inverter
applies the Retry wait time before motor restart parameter (B003).
Once the delay time has elapsed the inverter will then start and match the frequency (if greater
than the threshold set by B007). If the ground fault interrupter breaker (GFI) trips on a ground
fault, the bypass circuit will not operate the motor. When an inverter backup is required, take
the supply from the bypass circuit GFI. Use control relays for [FW], [RV], and [CS].
The commercial power source switching function requires you to assign [CS] to an intelligent
input terminal, using option code 14.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

Commercial Power
Change

Operations
and Monitoring

Valid for inputs:
Required
settings:

Input
State

Description

OFF-to-ON transition signals the inverter
that the motor is already running at
powerup (via bypass), thus suppressing
the inverter’s motor output in Run Mode

OFF

ON-to-OFF transition signals the inverter
to apply a time delay (B003), frequency
match its output to existing motor speed,
and resume normal Run Mode operation

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
B003, B007

Notes:
• If an over-current trip occurs during frequency
matching, extend the retry wait time B003.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
CS
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

Software Lock

4–25

When the terminal [SFT] is turned ON, the data of all the parameters and functions (except the
output frequency, depending on the setting of B031) is locked (prohibited from editing). When
the data is locked, the keypad keys cannot edit inverter parameters. To edit parameters again,
turn OFF the [SFT] terminal input.
Use parameter B031 to select whether the output frequency is excluded from the lock state or is
locked as well.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

SFT

Function Name
Software Lock

Input
State

Description

The keypad and remote programming
devices are prevented from changing
parameters

OFF

The parameters may be edited and stored

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B031 (excluded from lock)

SFT
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

Notes:
• When the [SFT] terminal is turned ON, only
the output frequency can be changed.
• Software lock can include the output
frequency by setting B031.
• Software lock by the operator is also possible
without the [SFT] terminal being used
(B031).

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)

4–26

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Operations
and Monitoring

Analog Input
Current/Voltage
Select

The [AT] terminal operates in conjunction with parameter setting A005 to determine the analog
input terminals that are enabled for current or voltage input. Setting A006 determines whether
the signal will be bipolar, allowing for a reverse direction range. Note that current input signal
cannot be bipolar and cannot reverse direction (must use [FW] and [RV] command with current
input operation). The following table shows the basic operation of the [AT] intelligent input.
Please refer to “Analog Input Operation” on page 4–59 for more information on bipolar input
configuration, and the operating characteristics of analog inputs.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name
Analog Input
Voltage/current
Select

Input
State

Description

• With A005 = 00, [AT] will enable
terminals [OI]–[L] for current input,
4 to 20mA
• With A005=01, [AT] will enable terminals [O2]–[L] for voltage input

OFF

Terminals [O]–[L] are enabled for voltage
input (A005 may be equal to 00 or 01) in
this case

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A001 = 01
A005 = 00 / 01
A006 = 00 / 01 / 02

Notes:
• Be sure to set the frequency source setting
A001=01 to select the analog input terminals.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
AT
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

4–27

SJ300 Inverter

Reset Inverter

The [RS] terminal causes the inverter to
execute the reset operation. If the inverter is
in Trip Mode, the reset cancels the Trip
state. When the signal [RS] is turned ON
and OFF, the inverter executes the reset
operation. The minimum pulse width for
[RS] must be 12 ms or greater. The alarm
output will be cleared within 30 ms after the
onset of the Reset command.

12 ms
minimum

[RS]

approx. 30 ms
Alarm output
t

WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs, the motor will
restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be sure to set the alarm reset after
verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name
Reset Inverter

Input
State

Description

The motor output is turned OFF, the Trip
Mode is cleared (if it exists), and powerup
reset is applied

OFF

Normal power-on operation

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B003, B007, C102, C103

Notes:
• When the control terminal [RS] input is
already ON at powerup for more than 4
seconds, the remote operator display is “RERROR COMM<2>” (the display of the
digital operator is – – – –). However, the
inverter has no error. To clear the digital
operator error, turn OFF the terminal [RS]
input and press one of the operator keys.

Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
RS
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

• The active edge (leading or trailing) of the [RS] signal is determined by the setting of
C102.
• A terminal configured with the [RS] function can only be configured as a normally open
contact. The terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state.
• When input power is turned ON, the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does
when a pulse on the [RS] terminal occurs.

Operations
and Monitoring

Valid for
inputs:

4–28

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Thermistor
Thermal
Protection

Motors that are equipped with a thermistor can be protected from overheating. Input terminal
[TH] is dedicated to sense a thermistor resistance. The input can be set up (via B098 and B099)
to accept a wide variety of NTC or PTC type thermistors. Use this function to protect the motor
from overheating.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

—

Thermistor Thermal
Protection

Input
State

Sensor When a thermistor is connected between

to terminals [TH] and [CM1], the inverter
checks for over-temperature and will
cause a trip (E35) and turn OFF the output
to the motor

Operations
and Monitoring

Open
Valid for
inputs:

[TH] only

Required
settings:

B098 and B099

Description

Notes:
• Be sure the thermistor is connected to terminals [TH] and [CM1]. If the resistance is
above or below (depending on whether NTC
or PTC) the threshold the inverter will trip.
When the motor cools down enough, the
thermistor resistance will change enough to
permit you to clear the error. Press the STOP/
Reset key to clear the error.

An open circuit in the thermistor causes a
trip, and the inverter turns OFF the output
Example:

TH
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

thermistor

Motor

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

Three-wire
Interface
Operation

4–29

The 3-wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface. This function uses two
inputs for momentary contact start/stop control, and a third for selecting forward or reverse
direction. To implement the 3-wire interface, assign 20 [STA] (Start), 21 [STP] (Stop), and 22
[F/R] (Forward/Reverse) to three of the intelligent input terminals. Use momentary contact for
Start and Stop. Use a selector switch, such as SPST for the Forward/Reverse input. Be sure to
set the operation command selection A002=01 for input terminal control of motor.
If you have a motor control interface that needs logic-level control (rather than momentary
pulse control), use the [FW] and [RV] inputs instead.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

STA

STP

F/R

Function Name
Start Motor

Stop Motor

Forward/Reverse

Input
State

Description

Start motor rotation on momentary
contact (uses acceleration profile)

OFF

No change to motor operation

OFF

Stop motor rotation on momentary contact
(uses deceleration profile)

Select reverse direction of rotation

OFF

Select forward direction of rotation

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A002=01

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
STP
F/R STA

Notes:
• The STP logic is inverted. Normally the
switch will be closed, so you open the switch
to stop. In this way, a broken wire causes the
motor to stop automatically (safe design).
• When you configure the inverter for 3-wire
interface control, the dedicated [FW] terminal
is automatically disabled. The [RV] intelligent
terminal assignment is also disabled.

TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

The diagram below shows the use of 3-wire control. STA (Start Motor) is an edge-sensitive
input; an OFF-to-ON transition gives the Start command. The control of direction is levelsensitive, and the direction may be changed at any time. STP (Stop Motor) is also a levelsensitive input.
[STA] terminal
[STP] terminal
[F/R] terminal

Motor revolution speed

Forward
Reverse
t

Operations
and Monitoring

Valid for
inputs:

4–30

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

PID ON/OFF
and PID Clear

The PID loop function is useful for controlling motor speed to achieve constant flow, pressure,
temperature, etc. in many process applications. The PID Disable function temporarily suspends
PID loop execution via an intelligent input terminal. It overrides the parameter A071 (PID
Enable) to stop PID execution and return to normal motor frequency output characteristics. the
use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal is optional. Of course, any use of the PID
loop control requires setting PID Enable function A071=01.
The PID Clear function forces the PID loop integrator sum = 0. So, when you turn ON an intelligent input configured as [PIDC], the integrator sum is reset to zero. This is useful when
switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is stopped.
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter
is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor to decelerate
rapidly, resulting in a trip.

Opt.
Code

Symbol

PID

Operations
and Monitoring

PIDC

Function Name
PID Disable

PID Clear

Input
State

Description

Disables PID loop execution

OFF

Allows PID loop execution if A71=01

Force the value of the integrator to zero

OFF

No change to PID loop execution

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A071

Notes:
• The use of [PID] and [PIDC] terminals are
optional. Use A071=01 if you want PID loop
control enabled all the time.
• Do not enable/disable PID control while the
motor is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
• Do not turn ON the [PIDC] input while the
motor is running (inverter is in Run Mode).

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
PID
PIDC
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

Internal Speed
Loop Gain
Settings

4–31

When sensorless vector control, 0Hz sensorless vector control, or vector control with sensor is
selected for the control method, the Control Gain Switching function selects between two sets
of gains in the internal speed loop. These gains are used in proportional and integral compensation. Use option code 26 to assign the [CAS] function to an intelligent input terminal. Use
option code 43 to select between P and PI control.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

CAS

PPI

Function Name
Control Gain
Switching

P / PI Control
Switching

Input
State

Description

Gains in parameters H070, H071, and
H072 are selected

OFF

Gains in parameters H050, H051, H052;
or, H250, H251, H252 (2nd motor) are
selected

Selects Proportional control (P)

OFF

Selects Proportional-Integral control (PI)

Valid for
inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A044 / A244 / A344 =
03 (SLV), or
04 (0 Hz domain), or
05 (V2)

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
CAS
PPI
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

Notes:
• When Control Gain Switching is not selected
for an intelligent input terminal, the default
gains in effect correspond to the OFF state of
[CAS].

See I/O
specs on
page 4–9.

The table below lists the functions and parameter settings related to internal speed loop gains.
Function Code

A044 / A244 /
A344

C001 - C008

Parameter

Control method
selection

Intelligent input
selection

Setting Range

Description

SLV (does not use A344)

0-Hz Domain SLV (does not
use A344)

V2 (does not use A244 or
A344)

PPI : P/I switching

H005 / H205

Speed response

0.001 to 65.53

No dimension

H050 / H250

PI proportional gain

0.0 to 999.9/1000

% gain

H051 / H251

PI integral gain

0.0 to 999.9/1000

% gain

H052 / H252

P proportional gain

0.01 to 10.00

H070

PI proportional gain
for switching

0.0 to 999.9/1000

% gain

H071

PI integral gain for
switching

0.0 to 999.9/1000

% gain

H072

P proportional gain
for switching

0.0 to 10.0

No dimension

4–32

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

The speed control mode is normally proportionalintegral compensation (PI), which attempts to
keep the deviation between the actual speed and
speed command equal to zero. You can also select
proportional (P) control function, which can be
used for droop control (i.e. several inverters
driving one load). Droop is the speed difference
resulting from P control versus PI control at 100%
output torque as shown in the graph. Set the P/PI
switching function (option 43) to one of the intelligent input terminals [1] to [8]. When the P/PI
input terminal is ON, the control mode becomes
proportional control (P). When the P/PI input
terminal is OFF, the control mode becomes
proportional-integral control.

P Control

Droop
100%

Speed of rotation

The proportional gain Kpp value determines the
droop. Set the desired value using parameter
H052. The relationship between the Kpp value and the droop is shown below:
Droop =

10
-------------------------------(%)
(Kpp Set Value)

The relationship between the droop and the rated rotation speed is shown below:

Operations
and Monitoring

Droop =

PI Control

Torque

Speed error at rated torque
--------------------------------------------------------------------Synchronous speed base frequency

4–33

SJ300 Inverter

Remote Control
Up and Down
Functions

The [UP] [DWN] terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control while
the motor is running. The acceleration time and deceleration time used with this function is the
same as for normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 (2ACC1,2DEC1). The input terminals operate
as follows:
• Acceleration - When the [UP] contact is turned ON, the output frequency accelerates from
the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current value.
• Deceleration - When the [DWN] contact is turned ON, the output frequency decelerates
from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current
value.
In the graph below, the [UP] and [DWN] terminals activate while the Run command remains
ON. The output frequency responds to the [UP] and [DWN] commands.
Output
frequency
[UP]
[DWN]
[FW, RV]
t

It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the [UP] and [DWN] terminals
through a power loss. Parameter C101 enables/disables the memory. If disabled, the inverter
retains the last frequency before an UP/DWN adjustment. Use the [UDC] terminal to clear the
memory and return to the original set output frequency.

Symbol

DWN

UDC

Function Name
Remote Control
UP Function

Remote Control
DOWN Function

Remote Control
Data Clear

Input
State

Description

Accelerates (increases output frequency)
motor from current frequency

OFF

Output to motor operates normally

Decelerates (decreases output frequency)
motor from current frequency

OFF

Output to motor operates normally

Clears the Up/down frequency memory

OFF

No effect on Up/down memory

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A001 = 02
C101 = 01 (enables memory)

Notes:
• This feature is available only when the
frequency command source is programmed
for operator control. Confirm A001 is set to
02.
• This function is not available when [JG] is in
use.
• The range of output frequency is 0 Hz to the
value in A004 (maximum frequency setting).
• The Remote Control Up/Down function
varies the inverter speed by directly writing to
the F001 output frequency setting.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
UP
UDC DWN
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

Opt.
Code

4–34

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Operations
and Monitoring

Force Operation
from Digital
Operator

This function permits a digital operator interface to override the Run command source setting
(A002) when it is configured for a source other than the operator interface. When the [OPE]
terminal is ON and the operator interface gives a Run command, the inverter uses the standard
output frequency settings to operate the motor.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

OPE

Function Name
Force Operation
from Digital
Operator

Input
State

Description

Forces the operator interface Run
command to over-ride commands from
input terminals (such as [FW], [RV]).

OFF

Run command operates normally, as
configured by A002

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

A001
A002 (set not equal to 02)

Notes:
• When changing the [OPE] state during Run
Mode (inverter is driving the motor), the
inverter will stop the motor before the new
[OPE] state takes effect.
• If the [OPE] input turns ON and the digital
operator gives a Run command while the
inverter is already running, the inverter stops
the motor. Then the digital operator can
control the motor.

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
OPE
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

SJ300 Inverter

Overload
Restriction

4–35

The inverter constantly monitors the motor current during acceleration, deceleration, and
constant speed. If the inverter reaches the overload restriction level, it adjusts the output
frequency automatically to limit the amount of overload. This function prevents an over-current
trip by inertia during rapid acceleration or large changes in load at constant speed. It also
attempts to prevent an over-voltage trip on deceleration due to regeneration. It accomplishes
this by temporarily suspending deceleration and/or increasing the frequency in order to dissipate regenerative energy. Once the DC bus voltage falls sufficiently, deceleration will resume.
OLR Parameter Selection – Two sets of overload restriction parameter settings and values are
available as outlined in the table below. Use the B021—B026 group of settings to configure the
two set of parameters as needed. By assigning the Overload Restriction function [OLR] to an
intelligent terminal, you can select the set of restriction parameters that is in effect.
Function Code
Function

Data or Range
Set 1

Overload Restriction
Operation Mode

B021

Description

Set 2
B024

Disable

Enabled during accel
and constant speed

Enabled during constant
speed

Enabled during accel,
constant speed, and
decel

B022

B025

Rated current * 0.5
to rated current * 2

Current value at which
the restriction begins

Deceleration Rate at
Overload Restriction

B023

B026

0.1 to 30 seconds

Deceleration time when
overload restriction
operates

Opt.
Code

Symbol

OLR

Function Name
Overload Restriction Selection

Input
State

Description

Selects Overload Restriction Set 2,
B024, B025, B026 settings in effect

OFF

Selects Overload Restriction Set 1,
B021, B022, B023 settings in effect

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B021, B022, B023 (Mode 1),
B024, B025, B026 (Mode 2)

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
OLR

Notes:
• If the overload restriction constant (B023 or
B026) is set too short, an over-voltage trip
during deceleration will occur due to regenerative energy from the motor.
• When an overload restriction occurs during
acceleration, the motor will take longer to
reach the target frequency, or may not reach
it. The inverter will make the following
adjustments:
a) Increase the acceleration time
b) Raise torque boost
c) Raise overload restriction level

TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

1
2

Operations
and Monitoring

Overload Restriction
Setting

4–36

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

The figure below shows the operation during an overload restriction event. The overload
restriction level is set by B022 and B025. The overload restriction constant is the time to decelerate to 0Hz from maximum frequency. When this function operates, the acceleration time will
be longer than the normal acceleration time.
Output
frequency
Overload
restriction level

B022 / B025

Deceleration rate
at overload restriction
Maximum
frequency

A004
F001
Target frequency

t
B023 / B026

Deceleration rate at overload restriction

Operations
and Monitoring

NOTE: The Overload Advance Notice function for intelligent outputs is related to Overload
Restriction operation, discussed in “Overload Advance Notice Signal” on page 4–46.

SJ300 Inverter

Torque Limit

4–37

The Torque Limit function limits the motor output torque for sensorless vector control, sensorless vector control 0Hz domain, or vector control with feedback.
In the torque limit function, the following operational modes are available (selected by B040):
1. Four-quadrant individual setting mode – This mode sets torque limit in 4 zones, forward
driving and regenerating, reverse driving and regenerating. Limits for each quadrant are set
with B041 – B044 individually.
2. Terminal selection mode – By use of torque limit select intelligent input terminals 1 and 2,
this mode changes and uses torque limits 1 – 4 set in B041 – B044. Selected torque limit
range is valid in all four quadrants.
3. Analog input mode – This mode sets torque limit value by the voltage applied to terminal
[O2] (referenced to [L] for ground. An input of 0 – 10V corresponds to the torque limit
value of 0 to 200%. The selected torque limit value is valid in all four quadrants (whether
forward or reverse move, driving or regenerating).
4. Expansion Cards 1 and 2 – This function is valid when using the expansion card (SJ-DG).
Please refer to the SJ-DG instruction manual.
When the torque limit enable function [TL] is assigned to an intelligent input terminal, torque
limiting occurs only when [TL] is ON. When the [TL] input is OFF, the inverter always uses the
default torque control limit of 200% maximum. That torque limit value corresponds to 200% of
the maximum inverter output current. Therefore, the output torque also depends on the particular motor in use. When the over-torque output [OTQ] is assigned in the intelligent output selection, it turns ON when the inverter is performing torque limiting.

Code

Data or Range

Control method
selection

00
01
02
03
04
05

V/f Constant torque
V/f Variable torque
V/f Free-setting torque *1
Sensorless vector *1
Sensorless vector, 0 Hz domain *1
Vector control with sensor *2

Torque limit
selection

00
01
02
03
04

4-quadrant individual setting
Terminal selection
Analog [O2] input
Expansion card 1
Expansion card 2

B040

Description

B041

Torque limit 1

0 to 200%

Forward-driving in 4-quadrant mode

B042

Torque limit 2

0 to 200%

Reverse-regenerating in 4-quadrant
mode

B043

Torque limit 3

0 to 200%

Reverse-driving in 4-quadrant mode

B044

Torque limit 4

0 to 200%

Forward-regenerating in 4-quadrant
mode

C001
to
C008

Intelligent input
terminal [1] to [8]
function

40
41
42

Torque limit enable
Torque limit selection, bit 1 (LSB)
Torque limit selection, bit 2 (MSB)

C021
to
C025

Intelligent output
terminal [11] to [15]
function

In torque limit

Note 1: Unavailable for A344
Note 2: Unavailable for A244 and A344

Operations
and Monitoring

A044 /
A244

Function

4–38

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

The 4-quadrant operation mode for torque
limiting (B040=00) is illustrated in the figure
to the right. The instantaneous torque depends
on inverter activity (acceleration, constant
speed, or deceleration), as well as the load.
These factors determine the operating quadrant
at any particular time. The parameters in B041,
B042, B043 and B044 determine the amount of
torque limiting that the inverter applies.

Torque
Reverse-regenerating

B40=00

Forward-driving

B042

B041

Reverse-driving

Forward-regenerating

B043

B044

Operations
and Monitoring

The terminal selection mode (B040=01) uses two intelligent inputs [TRQ1] and [TRQ2] for the
binary-encoded selection of one of the four torque limit parameters B041, B042, B043 and
B044.

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

Input
State

Torque limit enable

Enables torque limiting

OFF

Disables torque limiting

Description

TRQ1

Torque limit select 1

0/1

Torque limit select, Bit 1 (LSB)

TRQ2

Torque limit select 2

0/1

Torque limit select, Bit 2 (MSB)

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B040, B041, B042, B043,
B044

Notes:
• Both the 4-quadrant mode and terminal
switching mode of torque limiting use input
[TL] for enable/disable.
• Inputs TRQ1 and TRQ2 apply only to
terminal switching mode.
Intelligent
Inputs

Torque limit
parameter

TRQ2

TRQ1

OFF

B041

OFF

B042

OFF

B043

B044

Examples: (Require input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
TL
TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

TL
TRQ2 TRQ1
TH FW 8 CM1 5

• When using the torque limit function at low
speed, also use the overload restriction
feature.

P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

SJ300 Inverter

4–39

External Brake
The External Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external electromechanical
Control Function brake systems with a particular safety characteristic. For example, elevator control systems
maintain the brake on the load until the drive motor has reached a releasing frequency (point at
which the external mechanical brake is released). This ensures that the load does not have an
opportunity to begin coasting before the inverter begins driving the motor. The External Brake
Control function can be enabled by setting parameter B120=01. The diagram below shows the
signals that are important to this function.

Inverter

[BRK] Brake release
[BOK] Brake confirmation

[BER] Brake error

External Brake
System

Emergency Brake
(or alarm, etc.)

The steps below describe the timing diagram of events on the following page.
1. When the Run command turns ON, the inverter begins to operate and accelerate to releasing
frequency (B125).

3. While the brake release output [BRK] is ON, the inverter drives the motor but does not
accelerate immediately. The inverter waits for confirmation from the external brake. When
the external brake system properly releases, it signals the inverter by using the Brake OK
input terminal [BOK].
4. When the brake operates properly and signals with the [BOK] input, the inverter waits for
the required time for acceleration (B122), and then begins to accelerate to the set target
frequency.
5. When the Run command turns OFF, the procedure outlined above happens in reverse. The
idea is to engage the brake before the motor comes completely to a stop. The inverter decelerates to the releasing frequency (B125) and turns the brake release output [BRK] OFF to
engage the brake.
6. The inverter does not decelerate further during just the waiting time for brake confirmation
(B121). If the brake confirmation signal does not turn OFF within the waiting time for brake
confirmation, the inverter causes a trip alarm and outputs the brake error signal [BER]
(useful for engaging an emergency brake system).
7. Normally, the brake confirmation signal [BOK] turns OFF, and the inverter waits the
required waiting time. Then the inverter begins to decelerate again and brings motor and
load to a complete stop (see timing diagram on next page).
Code

Function

Data or Range

Description

B120

Brake control
enable

00=Disable
01=Enable

Enables external brake control function within the
inverter

B121

Brake waiting
time for release

0.00 to 5.00 sec.

Sets the time delay after arrival at release
frequency (B125) before the inverter outputs brake
release signal [BRK]

B122

Brake wait time
for acceleration

0.00 to 5.00 sec.

Sets time delay after brake confirmation signal
[BOK] is received until the inverter begins to accelerate to the set frequency

Operations
and Monitoring

2. After the output frequency arrives at the set releasing frequency (B125), the inverter waits
for the brake release confirmation, set by B121. The inverter outputs the braking release
signal [BRK]. However, if the output current of the inverter is less than the releasing current
set by B126, the inverter does not turn ON the brake release output [BRK]. The lack of the
proper current level indicates a fault (such as open wire to motor). In this case, the inverter
trips and outputs the braking error signal [BER]. This signal is useful to engage an
emergency brake to ensure the load does not move, if the primary braking system has failed.

4–40

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Code

Function

Data or Range

Description

B123

Brake wait time
for stopping

0.00 to 5.00 sec.

Sets the time delay after brake confirmation signal
[BOK] turns OFF (after [BRK] turns OFF) until
decelerating the inverter to 0 Hz

B124

Brake wait time
for confirmation

0.00 to 5.00 sec.

Sets the wait time for [BOK] signal after turn ON/
OFF of [BRK] signal. If [BOK] is not received
during the specified time, the inverter will trip with
an external brake error [BER].

B125

Break release
frequency setting

B126

Brake release
current setting

0.00 to 99.99 Hz / Sets the frequency at which the inverter outputs the
100.0 to 400.0 Hz brake release signal [BRK] after delay set by B121
0% to 200% of
rated current

Sets the minimum inverter current level above
which the brake release signal [BRK] will be
permitted

The diagram below shows the event sequence described in the steps on the previous page.
Output
frequency
Brake wait time for accel

Brake wait time for stop-

B122

B123

B125

Brake release
frequency

B125

Operations
and Monitoring

0
t
Run command
Brake release output [BRK]

B121 Brake wait time to release

Brake OK input [BOK]
Brake error output [BER]

Brake wait time
for confirmation

B124

The following table pertains to the brake confirmation input.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

Input
State

BOK

Brake confirmation

Indicates external brake is not engaged

OFF

Indicates external brake is engaged

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008

Required
settings:

B120=01
B121 to B126 set

Description

Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
BOK

Notes:
• The signal [BOK] turns ON to indicate that an
external brake system has released. If external
brake control is enabled (B120=01), then the
[BOK] signal must work properly to avoid an
inverter trip event.

TH FW 8 CM1 5
P24 PLC CM1 7

3
4

1
2

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

SJ300 Inverter

Expansion Card
Input Signals

4–41

Other inputs listed below require the expansion card SJ-FB Encoder Feedback. Please see the
SJ-FB manual for more information.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

ORT

Orientation

Orientation (home search sequence)

LAC

LAD Cancel

Cancels the linear acceleration/deceleration position control in the feedback card

PCLR

Position deviation clear

Forces the position error to zero

STAT

Pulse train input enable

Starts the pulse train control of motor
frequency

Function Name

Description

The diagram below shows how the Input/Output connections for the SJ–FB feedback board.
The inverter’s internal connections and parameter configuration make these signals available on
intelligent input and output terminals.

SJ300 inverter
ORT
LAC
PCLR

ZS
SJ-FB Feedback
Expansion Card

DSE
POK

STAT

Input
terminals

Output assignments

Output
terminals

Control and logic connector

The information on outputs related to the SJ-FB expansion card is in “Expansion Card Output
Signals” on page 4–58.

Operations
and Monitoring

Input assignments

4–42

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Using Intelligent Output Terminals
The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intelligent input
terminals. The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to five
physical logic outputs. Along with these solid-state outputs, the alarm relay output has type
Form C (normally open and normally closed) contacts. The relay is assigned the alarm function
by default, but you can assign it to any of the functions that the open-collector outputs can use.
SJ300 inverter
Sinking outputs
(open collector)

Output circuits

common

CM2

Operations
and Monitoring

External
system

–+
24VDC

TIP: The open-collector transistor outputs can handle up to 50mA each. We highly recommend
that you use an external power source as shown. It must be capable of providing at least 250mA
to drive the outputs at full load.

If you need output current greater than 50mA, use the
inverter output to drive a small relay. Be sure to use a
diode across the coil of the relay as shown (reversebiased) in order to suppress the turn-off spike, or use a
solid-state relay.
CM2

+
–

4–43

SJ300 Inverter

Run Signal

When the [RUN] signal is selected as an
intelligent output terminal, the inverter
outputs a signal on that terminal when it is
in Run Mode. The output logic is active
low, and is the open collector type (switch
to common).

[FW, RV]
Motor
speed
start freq.

B82
Run
Signal

ON
t

Opt.
Code

Symbol

RUN

Function Name
Run signal

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

(none)

Output
State

Description

when inverter is in Run Mode

OFF

when inverter is in Stop Mode
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
Inverter output terminal circuit

Notes:
• The inverter outputs the [RUN] signal
whenever the inverter output exceeds the start
frequency specified by parameter B082. The
start frequency is the initial inverter output
frequency when it turns ON.

RUN
14 13 11

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

NOTE: The example circuit in the table above drives a relay coil. Note the use of a diode to
prevent the negative-going turn-off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter’s
output transistor.

Operations
and Monitoring

15 CM2 12

4–44

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Frequency Arrival The Frequency Arrival group of outputs help coordinate external systems with the current
velocity profile of the inverter. As the name implies, output [FA1] turns ON when the output
Signals
frequency arrives at the standard set frequency (parameter F001). Outputs [FA2] through [FA5]
provide variations on this function for increased flexibility, relying on two programmable accel/
decel thresholds. For example, you can have an output turn ON at one frequency during acceleration, and have it turn OFF at a different frequency during deceleration. All transitions have
hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the output frequency is near one of the thresholds.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

FA1

Operations
and Monitoring

FA2

FA3

FA4

FA5

Function Name
Frequency arrival
type 1 – constant
speed

Frequency arrival
type 2 – overfrequency

Frequency arrival
type 3 – at
frequency

Frequency arrival
type 4 – overfrequency (2)

Frequency arrival
type 5 –
at frequency (2)

Output
State

Description

when output to motor is at the standard set
frequency F001

OFF

when output to motor is not at the set
frequency F001

when output to motor is at or above the FA
threshold 1(C042) during accel

OFF

when the output to motor is below the FA
threshold 1 (C043) during decel

when output to motor is at the FA threshold 1 (C042) during accel, or at C043
during decel

OFF

when the output to motor is not at either
the FA threshold 1 (C042) during accel or
at C43 during decel

when output to motor is at or above the FA
threshold 2 (C045) during accel

OFF

when the output to motor is below the FA
threshold 2 (C046) during decel

when output to motor is at the FA threshold 2 (C045) during accel, or at C046
during decel

OFF

when the output to motor is not at either
the FA threshold 2 (C045) during accel or
at C046 during decel

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

F001, for FA1
C042 & C043, for FA2 & FA3
C045 & C046, for FA4 & FA5

Notes:
• For most applications you will need to use
only one or two of the frequency arrival type
outputs (see example). However, it is possible
assign all five output terminals to output
functions [FA1] through [FA5].
• For each frequency arrival threshold, the
output anticipates the threshold (turns ON
early) by an amount equal to 1% of the
maximum frequency set for the inverter.
• The output turns OFF as the output frequency
moves away from the threshold, delayed by
an amount equal to 2% of the max. frequency.

Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FA1

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

SJ300 Inverter

Frequency arrival output [FA1] uses the
standard output frequency (parameter F001)
as the threshold for switching. In the figure
to the right, the inverter accelerates to the
set output frequency, which serves as the
threshold for [FA1]. Parameters Fon and Foff
illustrate the hysteresis that prevents output
chatter near the threshold value.

Output
frequency
Hz
Foff

Fon

Threshold
F001

• Fon is 1% of the max. output frequency

0
t

• Foff is 2% of the max. output frequency
The hysteresis effect causes the output to
turn ON slightly early as the speed
approaches the threshold. Then the turnOFF point is slightly delayed. The 1% and
2% values also apply to the remaining
Frequency arrival outputs, discussed below.

FA1

Output
frequency
Hz
Thresholds

Fon
Foff

C042/C045
C043/C046
0

t
ON

FA2/FA4

Frequency Arrival outputs [FA3] and [FA5] use the same threshold parameters as [FA2] and
[FA4] above, but operate in a slightly different way. Refer to the diagram below. After the
frequency arrives at the first threshold during acceleration and turns ON [FA3] or [FA5], they
turn OFF again as the output frequency accelerates further. The second thresholds work
similarly during deceleration. In this way, we have separate ON/OFF pulses for acceleration
and deceleration.
Output
frequency
Hz
Thresholds
C043/C046
Fon
Foff

C042/C045

Fon
Foff

0
t
FA3/FA5

Operations
and Monitoring

Frequency Arrival outputs [FA2] and
[FA4] work the same way; they just use
two separate threshold pairs as shown in
the figure. These provide for separate
acceleration and deceleration thresholds
to provide more flexibility than for
[FA1]. [FA2] uses C042 and C045 for
ON and OFF thresholds, respectively.
[FA4] uses C043 and C046 for ON and
OFF thresholds, respectively. Having
different accel and decel thresholds
provides an asymmetrical output
function. However, you can use equal
ON and OFF thresholds, if desired.

4–45

4–46

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Overload
Advance Notice
Signal

When the output current exceeds a
preset value, the [OL] or [OL2]
terminal signal turns ON. The parameter C041 (or C111, respectively) sets
the overload threshold. The overload
detection circuit operates during
powered motor operation and during
regenerative braking. The output
circuits use open-collector transistors,
and are active low.

Current
Set
value

threshold
power running

C041
C041

regeneration
threshold

[OL]
Signal

ON
t

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Operations
and Monitoring

OL2

Function Name
Overload advance
notice signal (1)

Overload advance
notice signal (2)

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

C041, C111

Output
State

Description

when output current is more than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C041)

OFF

when output current is less than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C041)

when output current is more than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C111)

OFF

when output current is less than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C111)
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
Inverter output terminal circuit
OL

Notes:
• The default value is 100%. To change the
level from the default, set C041 or
C111(overload level).
• The accuracy of this function is the same as
the function of the output current monitor on
the [FM] terminal (see “Analog Output
Operation” on page 4–62).

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

4–47

SJ300 Inverter

Output Deviation The PID loop error is defined as the
magnitude (absolute value) of the differfor PID Control
ence between the Setpoint (target value)
and the Process Variable (actual value).
When the error magnitude exceeds the
preset value for C044, the [OD] terminal
signal turns ON. Refer to “PID Loop
Operation” on page 4–71.

Error
(SP-PV)
Set
value

Process variable
Setpoint

C044
C044

[OD]
Signal

ON
t

Opt.
Output
Symbol Function Name
Code
State
04

Output deviation
for PID control

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

C044

Description

when PID error is more than the set
threshold for the deviation signal

OFF

when PID error is less than the set threshold for the deviation signal
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53):
Inverter output terminal circuit

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

Operations
and Monitoring

Notes:
• The default deviation value is set to 3%. To
change this value, change parameter C044
(deviation level).

4–48

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Alarm Signal

The inverter alarm signal is active when a fault has
occurred and it is in the Trip Mode (refer to the
diagram at right). When the fault is cleared the
alarm signal becomes inactive.

STOP

Run

RESET

Stop

RUN

Operations
and Monitoring

We must make a distinction between the alarm
STOP
RESET
signal AL and the alarm relay contacts [AL0],
Fault
[AL1] and [AL2]. The signal AL is a logic
Trip
Fault
function, which you can assign to the open collector output terminals [11] to [15], or the relay
Alarm signal
outputs. The most common (and default) use of
active
the relay is for AL, thus the labeling of its terminals. Use an open collector output (terminals [11] to [15]) for a low-current logic signal interface or to energize a small relay (50 mA maximum). Use the relay output to interface to higher
voltage and current devices (10 mA minimum).
Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name
Alarm signal

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

C026, C036

Output
State

Description

when an alarm has occurred and has not
been cleared

OFF

when no alarm has occurred since the last
clearing of alarm(s)

Notes:
• When the alarm output is set to normally
closed, a time delay of less than 2 seconds
occurs until the contact is closed when the
power is turned ON.
• Terminals [11] – [15] are open collector
outputs, so the electrical specifications of
[AL] are different from the contact output
terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2].
• When the inverter power supply is turned
OFF, the alarm signal output is valid as long
as the external control circuit has power.
• This signal output has the delay time (300ms
nominal) from the fault alarm output.
• The relay contact specifications are in
“Specifications of Control and Logic
Connections” on page 4–9. The contact
diagrams for different conditions are on the
next page.

Example for terminals [11] to [15]:
(Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]:
(Default output configuration shown—see
page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit
Relay position
shown during
normal running
(no alarm)

AL1
AL0 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–9.

Power
Supply

Load

SJ300 Inverter

4–49

The alarm output terminals operate as shown below (left) by default. The contact logic can be
inverted as shown (below right) by using the parameter setting C036. The relay contacts
normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.O.) convention uses “normal” to mean the
inverter has power and is in Run or Stop Mode. The relay contacts switch to the opposite
position when it is in Trip Mode or when input power is OFF.
N.C. contacts (after initialization)
During normal running

N.O. contact (inverted by C036 setting)

When an alarm occurs or
power is turned OFF

During normal running or
power is turned OFF

When an alarm occurs

AL1

AL0 AL2

Power

Run
State

AL0AL1

AL0AL2

N.C.
(after
initialize,
C036=01)

Normal

Closed

Open

Trip

Open

Closed

OFF

–

Open

Closed

Contact

Power

Run
State

AL0AL1

AL0AL2

N.O.
(set
C036=00)

Normal

Open

Closed

Trip

Closed

Open

OFF

–

Open

Closed

Operations
and Monitoring

Contact

4–50

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Over-torque
Signal

The Over-torque function [OTQ] turns ON when the estimated value of output torque of motor
increases more than the arbitrary level set for the output. Recall that the torque limit function,
covered in “Torque Limit” on page 4–37, actually limits the torque during certain operating
conditions. Instead, the over-torque output feature only monitors the torque, turning ON output
[OTQ] if the torque is above programmable thresholds you set. The [OTQ] function is valid
only for sensorless vector control, 0-Hz domain sensorless vector control, or vector control
with sensor. Do not use the [OTQ] output, except for these inverter operational modes.
Code

Function/Description

Data or Range

C055

Over-torque, forward-driving level setting

0 to 200%

C056

Over-torque, reverse-regenerating, level setting

0 to 200%

C057

Over-torque, reverse-driving, level setting

0 to 200%

C058

Over-torque, forward-regenerating, level setting

0 to 200%

C021
to
C025

Intelligent output terminal [11] to [15] function

Operations
and Monitoring

The assignment of the Over-torque function to an output terminal [OTQ] is detailed in the
following table.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

OTQ

Function Name
Over-torque

Output
State

Description

when estimated torque exceeds the level
set in C055 to C058

OFF

when estimated torque is below the levels
set in C055 to C058

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

C055, C056, C057, C058
A044 = 03 or 04 or 05

Notes:
• This output is valid only for sensorless
vector control, 0-Hz domain sensorless vector
control, or vector control with sensor

Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit
OTQ
14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

SJ300 Inverter

Instantaneous
Power Failure /
Under-voltage
Signal

4–51

An instantaneous power failure (complete loss) or under-voltage condition (partial loss) of
inverter input voltage can occur without warning. SJ300 Series inverters can be configured to
respond to these conditions in different ways. You can select whether the inverter trips or retries
(restart attempt) when an instantaneous power failure or under-voltage condition occurs. You
can select the retry function with parameter B001.
When enabled, the Retry Function operates in the following ways:
• Under-voltage conditions – When an instantaneous power failure or under-voltage condition occurs, the inverter will attempt to restart up to 16 times. A trip condition will occur on
the 17th attempt, which must be cleared with the Stop/Reset key.
• Over-current/voltage conditions – When retry function is selected and an over-current or
an over-voltage condition occurs, a restart is attempted 3 times. A trip will occur on the 4th
failed restart attempt. Use parameter B004 to select the trip and alarm response to instantaneous power failure and under-voltage conditions. The following table shows the related
parameters to these power fault conditions, and timing diagrams are on the next page.
Code
B001

Function
Selection of
automatic restart
mode

Data or Range

Description
Alarm output after trip, automatic
restart disabled

Restart at 0 Hz

Retry with frequency matching to
present motor speed

Retry with frequency matching
followed by deceleration to stop—
then trip alarm

B002

Allowable undervoltage power failure
time

0.3 to 1.0 sec.

The amount of time a power input
under-voltage can occur without
tripping the power failure alarm. If
under-voltage exists longer than this
time, the inverter trips, even if the
restart mode is selected. If it exists
less than this time retry will be
attempted.

B003

Retry wait time
before motor restart

0.3 to 100 sec.

Time delay after a trip condition goes
away before the inverter restarts the
motor

B004

Instantaneous power
failure / voltage trip
alarm enable

Disable

Enable

Disable during stop and ramp to stop

Number of restarts
on power failure /
under-voltage trip
events

Restart up to 16 times on instantaneous power failure or under-voltage

Always restart on instantaneous
power failure or an under-voltage
condition

Restart frequency
threshold

0.00 to 400.0 Hz

B005

B007

When frequency of the motor is less
than this value, the inverter will
restart at 0 Hz

Operations
and Monitoring

4–52

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name
Instantaneous
Power Failure

Under-voltage
condition

Output
State

Description

when the inverter detects a loss of input
power

OFF

when the inverter has input power

when the inverter input power is less than
the specified input range

OFF

when the inverter input power is within
the voltage specification

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

B001, B002, B003, B004,
B005, B007

Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)

Operations
and Monitoring

Notes:
• If an over-voltage or over-current trip occurs
during the deceleration and an instantaneous
power failure error (E16) is displayed the
inverter goes into free-run stop. In this case
make the deceleration time longer.
• When connecting control power supply
terminals [Ro]-[To] to the DC bus [P]-[N], an
under-voltage may be detected at power-off
and cause a trip. If this is undesirable, set
B004 to 00 or 02.
• Frequency matching: The inverter reads the
motor RPM and direction. If this speed is
higher than the matching setting (B007), the
inverter waits until they are equal and then
engages the output to drive the motor
(example 3). If the actual motor speed is less
than the restart frequency setting, the inverter
waits for t2 (value in B003) and restarts from
0 Hz (example 4). The display shows
“oooo” during an actual frequency
matching event.

Inverter output
terminal circuit

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

In the following examples, t0= instantaneous power failure time, t1 = allowable under-voltage /
power failure time (B002), and t2= retry wait time (B003).
Example 1: Power failure within allowed limits; resume
Power supply

Example 2: Power failure longer than limits; trip
Power supply

Inverter output

Inverter output
Free-run

Motor
frequency
t0

t2
t1

After waiting for t2 seconds when t0 < t1; restart

Free-run
Motor
frequency
t0
t1
Inverter trips when t0 > t1

SJ300 Inverter

4–53

Examples 3 and 4 relate to configuring the inverter to retry upon power failure. Frequency
matching is possible if the inverter frequency is greater than the B007 value.
Example 3: Motor resumes via frequency-matching

Example 4: Motor restarts from 0Hz
Power supply

Power supply

Inverter output

Inverter output
Free-run

Free-run

B007

Motor
frequency
t0

Motor
frequency

t
Frequency matching

Motor frequency > B007 value at t2

B007
t0

t
0Hz restart

Motor frequency < B007 value at t2

The Instantaneous Power Failure and Alarm output responses during various power loss conditions are shown in the diagram below. Use B004 to enable/disable the alarm output when
instantaneous power failure or under-voltage occurs. The alarm output will continue while the
control power of the inverter is present, even if the motor is stopped. Examples 5 to 7 correspond to normal wiring of the inverter’s control circuit. Examples 8 to 10 correspond to the
wiring of the inverter’s control circuit for controlled deceleration after power loss (see
“Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss” on page 4–4).

Example 5

Inverter : Stop

1
0
Run command 1
0

Inverter : Run

Instantaneous power failure operation with R0–T0
connected to P–N
Example 8

Inverter : Stop

1
0
Run command 1
0

1
0
1
Run command
0

Inverter : Run
1
0
Run command 1
0

Power

Output

1
Alarm
0
Inst. Power Fail 1
0

Example 6

Inverter : Stop

Output
1
0
1
Inst. Power Fail
0

1
0
1
Run command 0

Example 9

Output

1
0
1
Inst. Power Fail
0

Alarm

1
0
Inst. Power Fail 1
0

Alarm

Inverter : Stop

Inverter : Run
1
0
1
Run command 0

Inverter : Stop

Example 10
1
0
1
Run command 0

Inverter : Run
1
0
1
Run command 0

1
0
1
Run command 0

Power

Alarm

Example 7

Inverter : Run
1
0
1
Run command 0

1
0
1
Run command 0

Power

1
0
1
Inst. Power Fail
0

Alarm

Power

Output
1
0
Inst. Power Fail 1
0

Alarm
(under-voltage)

Inverter : Stop

Inverter : Run
1
0
1
Run command 0

Power

Output

1
Alarm
0
Inst. Power Fail 1
0

Alarm

1
0
Inst. Power Fail 1
0

Operations
and Monitoring

Instantaneous power failure operation with standard
R0–T0 connections

4–54

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Torque Limit
Signal

The Torque Limit output [TRQ] works in conjunction with the torque limit function covered in
the intelligent input section. The torque limit function limits the motor torque according to the
criteria selected by parameter B040. When torque limiting occurs, the [TRQ] output turns ON,
then going OFF automatically when the output torque falls below the specified limits. See
“Torque Limit” on page 4–37 in the intelligent input section.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

TRQ

Function Name
Torque Limit

Output
State

Description

when the inverter is limiting torque

OFF

when the inverter is not limiting torque

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

B040... if B040=00 then
B041, B042, B043, B044 are
required

Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit

Operations
and Monitoring

Notes:
• The Torque Limit input [TL] must be ON in
order to enable torque limiting and its related
output, [TRQ].

TRQ

14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

Run Time /
Power-On Time
Over Signals

SJ300 Series inverters accumulate the total hours in Run Mode (run time) and the total hours of
power-ON time. You can set thresholds for these accumulating timers. Once the threshold is
exceeded, an output terminal will turn ON. One use of this is for preventative maintenance. A
signal light or audible alert could signal the need for servicing, calibration, etc.
Opt.
Code

Symbol

RNT

ONT

Function Name
Run Time Over

Power-ON Time
Over

Output
State

Description

when the accumulated time spent in Run
Mode exceeds the limit (B034)

OFF

when the accumulated time in Run Mode
is still less than the limit (B034)

when the accumulated power-ON time
exceeds the limit (B034)

OFF

when the accumulated power-ON time is
less than the limit (B034)

4–55

SJ300 Inverter

Opt.
Code

Symbol

Function Name

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

B034

Output
State

Description
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit

Notes:
• The two outputs [RNT] and [ONT] share the
same time threshold parameter, B040.
Typically, you will use either the [RNT] or the
[ONT] output only—not both at once.
• These outputs are useful for the notification
that a preventative maintenance interval has
expired.

RNT or
ONT
14 13 11
15 CM2 12

+
–

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

calculates the thermal rise (heating) of the motor using the current output to the motor squared,
integrated over the time spent at those levels. This feature allows the motor to draw excessive
current for relatively short periods of time, allowing time for cooling.
The Thermal Warning output [THM] turns ON to provide a warning before the inverter trips for
electronic thermal protection. You can set a unique thermal protection level for each of the
three motor profiles, as shown in the table below.
Function
Code

Function/Description

Data or Range

B012 / B212 Electronic thermal setting (calculated
/ B312
within the inverter from current output)
For example, suppose you have inverter model
SJ300-110LFE. The rated motor current is 46A.
The setting range is (0.2 * 46) to (1.2 *46), or
9.2A to 55.2A. For a setting of B012=46A
(current at 100%), the figure to the right shows
the curve.
The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the
way the inverter calculates thermal heating,
based on the type of torque control the inverter
uses.
CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower
speeds, the cooling effect of the motor’s internal
fan decreases.

Range is 0.2 * rated current to
1.2 * rated current

Trip
time (s)
60

0.5
0

A
53.4

116% 150%

92
200%

Trip current at 60 Hz

Operations
and Monitoring

Thermal Warning The purpose of the electronic thermal setting is to protect the motor from overloading,
overheating and being damaged. The setting is based on the rated motor current. The inverter
Signal

4–56

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

The table below shows the settings and their meanings. Use the one that matches your load.
Function Code

Data

B013 / B213 /B313

Function/Description

Reduced torque

Constant torque

Free-setting

Trip
time (s)

x 1.0
60
x 0.8
x 0.6
0.5
0

Hz
5

42.7 55.2

73.6

92.8% 120%

160%

Operations
and Monitoring

Reduced trip current at 20 Hz

Trip
time (s)

x 0.9
x 0.8

0.5
0

Hz
2.5

47.8 62.1

82.8

104% 135% 180%
Reduced trip current at 2.5 Hz

Free Thermal Characteristic - It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a
free-form curve defined by three data points, according to the table below.
Function
Code

Name

Description

Range

B015 /
B017 /
B019

Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency 1, 2, 3

Data point coordinates for Hz axis
(horizontal) in the free-form curve

B016 /
B018 /
B020

Free setting electronic
thermal current 1, 2, 3

Data point coordinates for Ampere 0.0 = (disable)
axis (vertical) in the free-form curve 0.1 to 1000.

0 to 400Hz

SJ300 Inverter

4–57

Output
current (A)
B020
B018

x 0.8
Setting range

B016
0

Hz
5

Output freq.

400

Hz
max.
freq.
B015 B017 B019 Ax04

Suppose the electronic thermal setting (B012) is set to 44 Amperes. The graph below shows the
effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve. For example, at (B017) Hz, the output
current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is reduced to (B018) A. Points (x), (y),
and (z) show the adjusted trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times.
Trip
time (s)
60

(x) = B018 value x 116%
(y) = B018 value x 120%
(z) = B018 value x 150%

0.5

(x)

(y)

(z)

Reduced trip current at (B017) Hz

Thermal Warning Output – Using parameter C061, you can set the threshold from 0 to 100%
of trip level for turning ON the intelligent output [THM] at that level. In this way, the inverter
provides an early warning before the electronic thermal overload trips and turns OFF the output
to the motor.

Opt.
Output
Symbol Function Name
Code
State
13

THM

Thermal Warning

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

C061

Description

when the electronic thermal calculation
exceeds the set limit

OFF

when the electronic thermal calculation is
less than the set limit

Notes:
• The electronic thermal overload function uses
the output current and time to calculate
thermal heating of the motor.
• The thermistor input of the inverter is a
separate function from the electronic thermal
function. You can set a threshold for it to
cause a trip alarm at a particular thermistor
resistance.

Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit

THM

14 13 11
See I/O specs
on page 4–9.

15 CM2 12

+
–

Operations
and Monitoring

4–58

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Brake Control
Signals

The Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external braking systems with a
particular safety characteristic. A complete discussion of the operation of brake control is in
“External Brake Control Function” on page 4–39. The block diagram and table that follow
describe the configuration of the outputs [BRK] Brake Release and [BER] Brake Error.
Inverter

[BRK] Brake release
Brake System
[BOK] Brake confirmation

[BER] Brake error

Emergency Brake

Opt.
Output
Symbol Function Name
Code
State
19

Operations
and Monitoring

BRK

BER

Brake Release

Brake Error

Description

when the inverter signals the external
brake system to release (open) its brake

OFF

when the inverter is not driving the motor,
and needs the external brake engaged

when the output current is less than the set
releasing current

OFF

when the brake function is not in use, or
when the output current to the motor is
correct and it is safe to release the brake

Valid for
outputs:

11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2

Required
settings:

B120, B121, B122, B123,
B124, B125, B126

Notes:
• The brake release logic convention is such that
an open circuit fault (such as loose wire)
causes the external brake to engage.

Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Inverter output
terminal circuit

14 13 11
See I/O specs on
page 4–9.

Expansion Card
Output Signals

BRK
BER

15 CM2 12

+
–

Other outputs listed below require expansion card SJ-FB Encoder Feedback board. Please see
the SJ-FB manual for more information.

Opt.
Symbol
Code
21

22
23

Function Name

Description

Zero Speed Detect signal

Signal indicates the encoder pulses of the
motor have stopped

DSE

Speed Deviation Excessive

Velocity error exceeds the error threshold
defined by parameter P026

POK

Positioning Completion

Indicates the load position is at the target

SJ300 Inverter

4–59

Analog Input Operation
Input Terminal
Signals

The SJ300 inverters provide for an external analog
input to command the inverter frequency output
value. The analog input terminal group includes
the [L], [OI], [O], [O2], and [H] terminals on the
control connector, which provide for Voltage [O]
and [O2] or Current [OI] input. All analog input
signals must use the analog ground [L].

H O2 AM FM
L

O OI AMI

A GND
+V Ref.
0—10V input

If you use either the voltage or current analog
input, you must select one of them using the logic
-10 / 0 / +10V
input terminal function [AT] analog type. If
terminal [AT] is OFF, the voltage input [O] can
4—20mA input
command the inverter output frequency. If terminal
[AT] is ON, the current input [OI] can command
the inverter output frequency. The [AT] terminal function is covered in “Analog Input Current/
Voltage Select” on page 4–26. Remember that you must also set A001 = 01 to select analog
input as the frequency source.
O2

A005

A001=01 Frequency
source setting

Terminals 1
0

(Keypad)

Frequency setting

V – I select

O OI AMI
OI
O2
O

4-20 mA

+–
+–

AT=ON

A005=00

-10 / 0 / +10V

AT=ON

A005=01

0 – 10V

AT=OFF

Input Filter

Parameter A016 adjusts an analog input sampling filter that evenly affects all analog inputs
shown above. The parameter range is from 1 to 30. Before increasing the filter setting, we
recommend trying to find the cause of input analog noise. Check for the following:
• Look for nearby high-current wiring—avoid any parallel runs to the analog signal wires
• Check the impedance between the chassis grounds of the inverter and the analog signal
source equipment—a good connection will have a low impedance
• Check the analog signal ground impedance from the inverter to the analog signal source
• Avoid ground loops... measure the current (or voltage drop) on the chassis ground and signal
ground connections; the ideal value is zero
After taking steps to minimize the analog signal noise sources, increase the filter time constant
(A016) until the motor output frequency (when commanded by analog inputs) becomes stable.

Operations
and Monitoring

AT
H O2 AM FM

4–60

Analog Input Operation

The following tables show the available analog input settings. Parameters A006, A005, and
input terminal [AT] determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are available and how they function. The Trim Frequency input [O2]—[L] is available (when check
marked) for some settings. Other settings make the reverse direction (in addition to forward)
available for bipolar input settings (when check marked). A bipolar input responds to positive
input voltages with a forward motor rotation, and to negative input voltages with reverse motor
rotation.

A006

A005

[AT]

External Frequency
Command Input

Trim Frequency
Command Input

Reverse avail.
(bipolar input)

OFF

[O]

✘

[OI]

✘

OFF

[O]

✘

[O2]

✘

✔

00
Example
1

OFF

[O]

[O2]

✘

[OI]

[O2]

✘

OFF

[O]

[O2]

✘

[O2]

✘

✔

00
Example
2

OFF

[O]

[O2]

✔

[OI]

[O2]

✔

OFF

[O]

[O2]

✔

[O2

✘

✔

Operations
and Monitoring

The table below applies when the [AT] input function is not assigned to any intelligent input
terminal. The A005 setting, normally used in conjunction with an [AT] input, is ignored.

A006

A005

—

[AT]
(not
assigned
to any
input
terminal)

External Frequency
Command Input

Trim Frequency
Command Input

Reverse avail.
(bipolar input)

[O2]

✘

✔

Summation of
[O] and [OI]

[O2]

✘

Summation of
[O] and [OI]

[O2]

✔

CAUTION: Whenever the [AT] input function is not assigned to any input terminal and
reverse rotation is not desired or is unsafe, be sure to set A006 = 01. This setting makes the
[O2] input unipolar only.

SJ300 Inverter

4–61

The examples below show how the use of the [AT] input during operation enables/disables the
Trim Frequency Command input [O2]—[L]. The [O2]—[L] input may be used alone, or as an
offset control for the primary analog input.
Example 1: Without reverse

Example 2: With reverse

[FW] terminal

[AT] terminal

[AT] terminal
FOI

External frequency
command
[O/OI] terminal 0

FO
FO2

Trim frequency
0
command
[O2] terminal

Actual frequency 0
command

FOI

External frequency
command
[O/OI] terminal 0

FO
FO2

Trim frequency
0
command
[O2] terminal

forward
reverse

Actual frequency 0
command
FO + FO2

FOI + FO2

FO + FO2

FOI + FO2

Wiring Examples Using an external potentiometer is a common way to
H O2 AM FM
L

O OI AMI

1 to 2 kΩ, 2W
L

Voltage Input – The 0–10V voltage input circuit uses terminals [L] and [O]. Attach the signal
cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only. DO NOT ground the shield at its other
end. Maintain the voltage within specifications (do not apply negative voltage). Normally a
full-span input level (10V) will give the maximum motor frequency. You can use parameter
A014 to select a lower voltage for full output frequency (such as using a 5V input signal).
Bipolar Voltage Input – The -10 / 0 / +10V voltage input circuit uses terminals [L] and [O2].
Attach the cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only. Maintain the voltage within
specifications. Only apply a negative voltage if this input is configured for bipolar use.
Current Input – The current input circuit uses terminals [OI] and [L]. The current comes from
a sourcing type transmitter; a sinking type will not work! This means the current must flow into
terminal [OI], and terminal [L] is the return back to the transmitter. The input impedance from
[OI] to [L] is 250 Ohms. Attach the cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only.
Standard Voltage Input

Bipolar Voltage Input

H O2 AM FM
O OI AMI

+–
0 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal

H O2 AM FM
L

O OI AMI

H O2 AM FM
L

O OI AMI

+–

Current Input

-10 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal
See I/O specs on page 4–9.

4 to 19.6 mA DC,
4 to 20 mA nominal

Operations
and Monitoring

control the inverter output frequency (and a good way
to learn how to use the analog inputs). The potentiometer uses the built-in 10V reference [H] and the analog
ground [L] for excitation, and the voltage input [O] for
the signal. By default, the [AT] terminal selects the
voltage input when it is OFF. Take care to use the
proper resistance for the potentiometer, which is
1 to 2kΩ, 2 Watts.

4–62

Analog Output Operation

Analog Output Operation
In the system design for inverter applications it is sometimes useful to monitor inverter operation from a remote location. In some cases, this requires only a panel-mounted analog meter
(moving-coil type). In other cases, a controller device such as a PLC may monitor and
command the inverter frequency and other functions. The inverter can transmit the (real-time)
output frequency, current, torque, or other parameters to the controller to confirm actual operation. The monitor output terminal [FM] serves these purposes.

[FM] Terminal

The inverter provides an analog/digital output on
terminal [FM] (frequency monitor). It uses
terminal [CM1] as digital GND reference. While
many applications use this terminal to monitor
the output frequency, you can configure terminal
[FM] to transmit one of several parameters.
Most use pulse-width modulation (PWM) to
represent the value, while one parameter uses
frequency modulation (FM) to represent the
value. Do not confuse the notation for terminal
[FM] (with brackets) with FM signal type.

H O2 AM FM TH FW
L

O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1

Analog/digital Output
D GND
See I/O specs on page 4–9.

The following table lists the configurations for terminal [FM]. Use function C027 to configure.

Operations
and Monitoring

Func.

C027

PWM Signal Type

Code

Description

Waveform

Full Scale Value

Output frequency

PWM

0 – Max. frequency (Hz)

Output current

PWM

0 – 200%

Output torque *1

PWM

0 – 200%

Output frequency

0 – Max. frequency (Hz)

Output voltage

PWM

0 – 100%

Input electric power

PWM

0 – 200%

Thermal load ratio

PWM

0 – 100%

LAD frequency

PWM

0 – Max. frequency (Hz)

Note 1: Display substitutes only during sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain sensorless
vector control, and vector control
The pulse-width modulated signal at terminal
H O2 AM FM TH FW
[FM] is primarily designed for driving a movingcoil meter. The pulse-width modulated signal is
L O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1
automatically averaged by the inertia of the
moving-coil mechanism—converting the PWM
+
–
signal to an analog representation. Be sure to use
a 10V full-scale DC voltmeter.
0 to 10V,
1 mA

The signal characteristics of terminal [FM] in
PWM signal configuration is shown below
[FM]

[FM] output value = --tT

10V

B081 = [FM] terminal 8-bit gain setting
0V
T
Period T = 6.4ms constant (156 Hz)

C27=00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 07
Selects FM type output

4–63

SJ300 Inverter

To calibrate the meter reading, generate a full-scale output (always ON) at terminal [FM]. Then
use parameter B081(gain setting from 0 to 255) to adjust the corresponding full-scale reading
of the meter. For example, when the inverter output frequency is 60 Hz, change the value of
B081 so that the meter reads 60 Hz.
TIP: When using the analog meter for monitoring, adjust the meter so it has a zero reading
when the [FM] output is zero. Then use scale factor B081 to adjust the [FM] output so the
maximum frequency in the inverter corresponds to a full-scale reading on the meter.

NOTE: The indicator accuracy after adjustment is about ±5%. Depending on the motor, the
accuracy may exceed this value.
PWM Smoothing Circuit – Note that
standard analog output signals are available on terminals [AM] and [AMI],
covered in the next section. However, you
may also wish to smooth the PWM signal
at the [FM] terminal and convert it to an
analog signal. The [FM] terminal will then
generate a relatively stable DC analog
voltage that represents the output value.
To do this, use the circuit shown to the
right. Note the output impedance of the
circuit is at least 82kΩ, so the monitoring
device needs an input impedance of 1MΩ
or greater. Otherwise, the impedance of
the smoothing circuit will cause a nonlinearity in the reading.

O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1

+
33kΩ

82kΩ

+
1µF

–

Volts

–

The frequency-modulated output at terminal [FM] varies its frequency with the inverter output
frequency (when C027=03). This frequency is digitally controlled for accuracy, and does not
use the B081 gain setting when C027=03 (frequency modulation).
50% fixed duty cycle
[FM]

1
[FM] Output Frequency = --T

10V
0V

C027=03

T
1
T = -------------------------------------------------------[FM] Output Frequency

Selects FM type output

Operations
and Monitoring

FM Signal Type

H O2 AM FM TH FW

4–64

Analog Output Operation

[AM] and [AMI]
Terminals

The [AM] and [AMI] terminals provide signals
to monitor various inverter parameters such as
output frequency, output current, and torque.
The terminals provide these analog signal types:

O OI AMI

• [AM] terminal: 0–10V analog output signal

A GND

• [AMI] terminal: 4–20mA analog output
signal

0–10V analog output

These signals both use the [L] terminal for signal
return. Eight different inverter parameters may
be monitored independently at either the [AM]
or [AMI] terminal, as listed in the table below.
Use C028 to configure terminal [AM], and C029
to configure terminal [AMI].

4–20mA analog output

Func.

C028 /
C029

Operations
and Monitoring

H O2 AM FM

Terminal

[AM] /
[AMI]

Code

Description

See I/O specs on page 4–9.

Full Scale Value

Output frequency

0 – Max. frequency (Hz)

Output current

0 – 200%

Output torque *1

0 – 200%

Output voltage

0 – 100%

Input electric power

0 – 200%

Thermal load ratio

0 – 100%

LAD frequency

0 – Max. frequency (Hz)

Note 1: Display of torque is possible only during sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain
sensorless vector control, and vector control with feedback
The analog signals may need some adjustment for gain or offset to compensate for variances in
the system. For example, the signals may drive a panel meter and require a full-scale gain
adjustment. The table below lists the function codes and their descriptions. The [AM] and
[AMI] terminals have separate gain and offset adjustments. Note the default values.
Func.

Terminal

Description

B080

[AM]

Gain adjustment

C086

[AM]

Offset Adjustment

C087

[AMI]

Gain adjustment

C088

[AMI]

Offset Adjustment

Range

Default

0 – 255

180

0.0 – 10.0V

0.0V

0 – 255

0.0 – 20.0mA

0.0mA

SJ300 Inverter

4–65

Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
Introduction

These advanced torque control algorithms improve performance, particularly at low speeds:
• Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz.
Use A044=03 (1st motor) or A244=03 (2nd motor) to select sensorless vector control.
• Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz. Use A044=04 (1st motor) or A244=04 (2nd motor) to select sensorless
vector control, 0Hz domain.
• Sensorless Vector Control with Feedback – improved torque control at all speeds, while
providing the most accurate speed regulation of all torque control algorithms. Use A044=05
to select sensorless vector control with feedback.
These three control algorithms require the inverter’s motor constants to accurately match the
characteristics of the particular motor connected to your inverter. Simply using the inverter’s
default parameters with the vector control modes may not produce satisfactory results. The
auto-tuning procedure described later in this section is recommended for most applications
needing vector control. It determines and records the characteristics of the attached motor.
However, it is possible to enter the motor constants directly if the motor manufacturer has
provided that data.
After performing an initial auto-tuning procedure for your motor, you have an additional
option: adaptive tuning. The adaptive tuning parameters use the auto-tuning procedure’s results
as starting values. Then, each time the motor runs normally in your application, the inverter
tunes the parameters again to match the motor. This compensates for temperature changes, etc.,
further optimizing the values.

Func.

A044 /
A244 /
A344

H002

Name

V/f characteristic curve selection,
1st / 2nd / 3rd motors

Motor data selection, 1st motor

Data

Notes

V/f constant torque

V/f variable torque

V/f free-setting curve

Sensorless vector control (SLV)

Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain

Vector control with encoder feedback

Standard motor parameters

Auto-tuning parameters

Adaptive tuning parameters

Motor capacity, 1st motor

0.2 – 75,
0.2 – 160

kW, up to –550xxx models
kW, –750xxx to –1500xxx models

H004

Motor poles setting, 1st motor

2/4/6/8

Units: poles

H020

Motor constant R1, 1st motor

0.000–65.53

Units: ohms

H021

Motor constant R2, 1st motor

0.000–65.53

Units: ohms

H022

Motor constant L, 1st motor

0.00–655.3

Units: mH

H023

Motor constant Io, 1st motor

0.00–655.3

Units: A

H024

Motor constant J, 1st motor

0.001–9999

Units: kgm2

H030

Auto-tuned constant R1, 1st motor

0.000–65.53

Units: ohms

H003

Operations
and Monitoring

The following table lists the parameters associated with motor constant settings. Function H002
selects the set of motor constants that you want the inverter to use in normal use. Standard
constants (select with H002=00) include H020 to H024. Auto-tuned constants (select with
H002=01) include H030 to H034. Remember that you have to do the auto-tuning procedure in
this section before using either auto-tuned constants or the adaptive mode (H002=02).

4–66

Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control

Func.

Name

Data

Notes

H031

Auto-tuned constant R2, 1st motor

0.000–65.53

Units: ohms

H032

Auto-tuned constant L, 1st motor

0.00–655.3

Units: mH

H033

Auto-tuned constant Io, 1st motor

0.00–655.3

Units: A

H034

Auto-tuned constant J, 1st motor

0.001–9999

Units: kgm2

The inverter has three separate motor constant sets named 1st, 2nd, and 3rd. The 1st motor
constant set is the default, while the SET and SET2 intelligent inputs select the 2nd and 3rd
constant sets, respectively. The torque control methods are valid to use only if a particular
motor constant set includes parameters for the selected control method. The following table
lists the vector control methods and shows the ones that are valid for each motor constant set.:

Operations
and Monitoring

Vector Control Method

1st motor

2nd motor

3rd motor

V/f constant torque

✔

V/f variable torque

✔

V/f free-setting curve

✔

✘

Sensorless vector control (SLV)

✔

✘

Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain

✔

✘

Vector control with encoder feedback

✔

✘

The motor data selection is available only to the 1st motor constant set, selected by function
H004. By default, the 2nd and 3rd motor constants sets only store standard motor parameters.
The table below shows this arrangement.
Motor data selection

1st motor

2nd motor

3rd motor

Standard motor parameters

✔

Auto-tuning parameters

✔

✘

Adaptive tuning parameters

✔

✘

When motor constant values are available from the motor manufacturer, you can enter them
directly. The available motor constant parameters (storage locations) depend on the motor
constant set (1st, 2nd, or 3rd) according to the following table.
Motor data selection

1st motor

2nd motor
H220 to H224

3rd motor

Standard motor parameters

H020 to H024

—

Auto-tuning parameters

H030 to H034

—

Adaptive tuning parameters

H030 to H034

—

SJ300 Inverter

Auto-tuning of
Motor Constants

4–67

The SJ300 inverter features auto-tuning, which detects and records the motor characteristic
parameters to use in all vector control modes. Auto-tuning determines the resistance and inductance of motor windings. Therefore, the motor must be connected to the inverter for this procedure. Note that the auto-tuning feature is not associated with PID loop operation, which is
common on some control devices. The auto-tuning procedure must be conducted while the
inverter is stopped (not in Run mode), so it can use special output pulses to detect motor
characteristics.
When using the inverter in sensorless vector control, sensorless vector control - 0Hz domain, or
vector control with encoder feedback, the motor circuit constants are important. If they are
unknown, then you must first conduct the auto-tuning procedure. The inverter will determine
the constants and write new values for the related “H” Group settings. The auto-tuning procedure requires that the inverter be configured to operate the 1st motor (do not set the inverter to
use 2nd and 3rd motor data during an auto-tuning procedure).

Func.

Name
Auto-tuning setting

Range

Notes
Disabled

Enabled, without motor rotation

Enabled, with motor rotation

Standard motor parameters

Auto-tuning parameters

Adaptive tuning parameters

Motor capacity, 1st motor

0.2 – 75,
0.2 – 160

kW, up to –550xxx models
kW, –750xxx to –1500xxx
models

H004

Motor poles setting, 1st motor

2/4/6/8

Units: poles

H030

Auto-tuned motor constant R1,
1st motor

—

Units: ohms

H031

Auto-tuned motor constant R2,
1st motor

—

Units: ohms

H032

Auto-tuned motor constant L,
1st motor

—

Units: mH

H033

Auto-tuned motor constant Io,
1st motor

—

Units: A

H034

Auto-tuned motor constant J, 1st
motor

—

Units: kgm2

A003

Base frequency setting

H001

Motor data selection, 1st motor
H002

H003

DC braking enable

30 to maximum freq.
00

Disabled (Disable during autotuning)

Enabled

A051
AVR voltage select
A082

Units: Hz

200/215/220/230/240 Valid for 200V class inverters
380/400/415/440/
460/480

Valid for 400V class inverters

Please read the following Warning before running the auto-tuning procedure on the next page.
WARNING: You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before performing autotuning. The inverter runs the motor forward and backward for several seconds without regard to
load movement limits.

Operations
and Monitoring

4–68

Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control

Preparation for Auto-tuning Procedure – Be sure to study the preparation items and verify
the related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure.
1. Adjust the motor base frequency (A003) and the motor voltage selection (A082) to match
the specifications of the motor used in the auto-tuning procedure.
2. Verify that the motor is not more than one frame size smaller than the rated size for he
inverter. Otherwise, the motor characteristic measurements may be inaccurate.
3. Be sure that no outside force will drive the motor during auto-tuning.
4. If DC braking is enabled (A051=01), the motor constants will not be accurately set. Therefore, disable DC braking (A051=00) before starting the auto-tuning procedure.
5. When auto-tuning with motor rotation (H002=02), take care to verify the following points:
a. The motor will rotate up to 80% of the base frequency; make sure that this will not cause
any problem.
b. Do not attempt to either run or stop the motor during the auto-tuning procedure unless it
is an emergency. If this occurs, initialize the inverter’s parameters to the factory default
settings (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9). Then reprogram the
parameters unique to your application, and initiate the auto-tuning procedure again.
c. Release any mechanical brake that would interfere with the motor rotating freely.
d. Disconnect any mechanical load from the motor. The torque during auto-tuning is not
enough to move some loads.
e. If the motor is part of a mechanism with limited travel (such as lead screw or elevator),
select H001=01 so that the auto-tuning will not cause motor rotation.

Operations
and Monitoring

6. Note that even when you select H001=01 for no rotation, sometimes the motor will rotate.
7. When using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter rating, enable the
overload restriction function. Then set the overload restriction level to 1.5 times the rated
output current of the motor.

Auto-tuning
Procedure

After the preparations above are complete, perform the auto-tuning procedure by following the
steps below.
1. Set H001=01 (auto-tuning without motor rotation) or H001=02 (auto-tuning with motor
rotation).
2. Turn the Run command ON. The inverter will then automatically sequence through the
following actions:
a. First AC excitation (motor does not rotate)
b. Second AC excitation (motor does not rotate)
c. First DC excitation (motor does not rotate)
d. V/F running—this step occurs only if H001=02 (motor accelerates up to 80% of the
base frequency)
e. SLV running—this step occurs only if H001=02 (motor accelerates up to x% of the base
frequency), where “x” varies with time T during this step:
x=40% when T < 50s
x=20% when 50s < T < 100s
x=10% when T => 100s
f. Second DC excitation
g. Displays the pass/fail result of the auto-tuning (see next page)

NOTE: During the AC and DC motor excitation steps above, you may notice that the motor
makes a slight humming sound. This sound is normal.

SJ300 Inverter

4–69

If the auto-tuning procedure is successful, the inverter updates
the motor characteristic parameters and indicates normal termination of the procedure as shown. Pressing any key on the
keypad will clear the result from the display.
• Trip during auto-tuning – A trip event will cause the autotuning sequence to quit. The display will show the error code
for the trip rather than the abnormal termination indication.
After eliminating the cause of the trip, then conduct the autotuning procedure again.

Normal termination

• Power loss or stop during auto-tuning – If the auto-tuning
Abnormal termination
procedure is interrupted by power loss, the Stop key, or by
turning OFF the Run command, the auto-tuning constants
may or may not be stored in the inverter. It will be necessary to restore the inverter’s factory
default settings (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9). After initializing the
inverter, then perform the auto-tuning procedure again.
• Free V/F setting – The auto-tuning procedure will have an abnormal termination if the
control mode of the inverter is set for free V/F setting.

Adaptive Autotuning of Motor
Constants

The adaptive auto-tuning feature refines the motor constants by checking the motor characteristic while it in the normal running temperature range.
Preparation for Adaptive Auto-tuning – Be sure to study the preparation items and verify the
related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure.
1. It is necessary to first perform the auto-tuning procedure in the section above, since adaptive
auto-tuning requires accurate initial constant values.

3. The adaptive auto-tuning sequence actually begins as the motor decelerates to a stop from a
Run command you initiate. However, the sequence still continues for five (5) more seconds.
Giving another Run command during this 5-second time period will halt the adaptive autotuning. It will resume the next time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop.
4. If DC braking is enabled, then the adaptive auto-tuning sequence executes after DC braking
brings the motor to a stop.
After reading and following the preparation steps above, then configure the inverter for
adaptive auto-tuning by following these steps:
1. Set H002=02 for adaptive auto-tuning procedure
2. Set H001=00 to disable the (manual) auto-tuning procedure
3. Turn the Run command ON.
4. Run the motor for an appropriate time until it reaches its normal operating temperature
range. Remember that the purpose of adaptive auto-tuning is optimize the inverter for
typical running conditions.
5. Stop the motor (or turn the Run command OFF), which initiates an adaptive auto-tuning.
Wait at least five (5) seconds before issuing any other command to the inverter.
With the above configuration, the inverter automatically runs the adaptive auto-tuning sequence
each time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop. This continuously adapts the SLV control
algorithm to slight changes in the motor constants during operation.
NOTE: It is not necessary to wait 5 seconds after each time the motor runs before running
again. When the motor stops for less than 5 seconds before running again, the inverter stops the
adaptive tuning sequence and keeps the current motor constant values in memory. The inverter
will attempt the adaptive auto-tuning at the next run/stop event of the motor.

Operations
and Monitoring

2. Adaptive auto-tuning is valid only for the 1st motor data (do not use 2nd or 3rd motor data
settings).

4–70

Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control

Manual Setting of With vector control, the inverter uses the output current, output voltage, and motor constants to
Motor Constants estimate the motor torque and speed. It is possible to achieve a high starting torque and accurate
speed control at low frequency
• Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz.
Use A044=03 (1st motor) or A244=03 (2nd motor) to select sensorless vector control.
• Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz. Use A044=04 (1st motor) or A244=04 (2nd motor). For this vector control
method, we recommend using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter size.
• Sensorless Vector Control with Feedback – improved torque control at all speeds, while
providing the most accurate speed regulation
If you do use any vector control methods, it is important that the motor constants stored in the
inverter match the motor. We recommend first using the auto-tuning procedure in the previous
section. If satisfactory performance through auto-tuning cannot be fully obtained, please adjust
the motor constants for the observed symptoms according to the table below.
CAUTION: If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the motor in use, the
inverter may not achieve its full performance specifications.
CAUTION: You must use a carrier frequency of more than 2.1kHz. The inverter cannot
operate in vector control mode at less than 2.1 kHz carrier frequency.

Operation Status

Symptom

Adjustment

Parameter

When the speed deviation
is negative

Slowly increase the motor constant
R2 in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 1 to 1.2 times preset R2

H021 / H221

When the speed deviation
is positive

Slowly decrease the motor constant
R2 in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 0.8 to 1 times preset R2

H021 / H221

Regeneration
When low frequency (a
(status with a decel- few Hz) torque is insuffierating torque)
cient

Slowly increase the motor speed
constant R1 in relation to autotuning data within 1 to 1.2 times R1

H020 / H220

Slowly increase the motor constant
IO in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 1 to 1.2 times preset IO

H023 / H223

During acceleration A sudden jerk at start of
rotation

Increase motor constant J slowly
within 1 to 1.2 times the preset
constant

H024 / H224

During deceleration Unstable motor rotation

Decrease the speed response

H05, H205

Set motor constant J smaller than
the preset constant

H024, H224
B021,
B041 to B044

Operations
and Monitoring

Powered running

During torque
limiting

Insufficient torque during
torque limit at low speed

Set the overload restriction level
lower than the torque limit level

At low-frequency
operation

Irregular rotation

Set motor constant J larger than the
preset constant

H024, H244

When using a motor one frame size smaller than the inverter rating, the torque limit value
(B041 to B044) is from the following formula and the value of the actual motor torque limit is
calculated by the formula. Do not set a value in B041 to B044 that results in an actual torque
greater than 200% or you risk motor failure.
For example, suppose you have a 0.75kW inverter and a 0.4kW motor. The torque limit setting
value that is for T=200% is set (entered) as 106%, shown by the following formula:
Torque limit setting =

200% × 0.4kW
Actual torque limit × Motor capacity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------- = 106%
0.75kW
Inverter capacity

SJ300 Inverter

4–71

PID Loop Operation
In standard operation, the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter A001 for the
output frequency, which may be a fixed value (F001), a variable set by the front panel potentiometer, or value from an analog input (voltage or current). To enable PID operation, set A071 =
01. This causes the inverter to calculate the target frequency, or setpoint. An optional intelligent
input assignment (code 23), PID Disable, will temporarily disable PID operation when active.
A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages. It lets the inverter adjust the motor
speed to optimize some other process variable of interest, potentially saving energy as well.
Refer to the figure below. The motor acts upon the external process. To control that external
process, the inverter must monitor the process variable. This requires wiring a sensor to either
the analog input terminal [O] (voltage) or terminal [OI] (current).
Inverter
Setpoint
SP

∑

Error

PID
Calculation

Freq.

Inverter
Output

External
Process

Motor

PV
Analog input

Process Variable (PV)
Sensor

Scale factor
A075

Standard
setting

Setpoint
(Target)

F001

Scale factor
reciprocal

Multi-speed
settings

1/A075

F001

PID Enable

Frequency
source select

A071

PID Disable
C023
optional
intelligent input

A001

P gain

A020 to A035

A072

Potentiometer
on keypad

Normal

Error
SP

V/I input
select
[AT]

∑

I gain
A073

PV
Process Variable
(Feedback)

Voltage

∑

PID
Frequency
setting

D gain
A074

Analog input scaling

O
A GND

A012

A011
A015 A013 A014

OI
Current

A076
PID V/I
input select

Scale factor
A075

Monitor
D004

Operations
and Monitoring

When enabled, the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop error.
This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a particular frequency, but we specify
the ideal value for the process variable. That ideal value is called the setpoint, and is specified
in the units of the external process variable. For a pump application it may be gallons/minute,
or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit. Parameter A075 is a scale factor
that relates the external process variable units to motor frequency. The figure below is a more
detailed diagram of the PID function.

4–72

Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors

Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors
Simultaneous
Connections

For some applications, you may need to connect two
or more motors (wired in parallel) to a single
inverter’s output. For example, this is common in
conveyor applications where two separate conveyors
need to have approximately the same speed. The use
of two motors may be less expensive than making the
mechanical link for one motor to drive multiple
conveyors.
Some of the requirements when using multiple
motors with one drive are:

Inverter

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

Motor 1

Motor 2
to Nth motor

• Use only V/F (variable-frequency) control; do not use SLV (sensorless vector control).
• The inverter output must be rated to handle the sum of the currents from the motors.
• You must use separate thermal protection switches or devices to protect each motor. Locate
the device for each motor inside the motor housing or as close to it as possible.
• The wiring for the motors must be permanently connected in parallel (do not remove one
motor from the circuit during operation).

Operations
and Monitoring

NOTE: The motor speeds are identical only in theory. That is because slight differences in
their loads will cause one motor to slip a little more than another, even if the motors are identical. Therefore, do not use this technique for multi-axis machinery that must maintain a fixed
position reference between its axes.

Inverter
Configuration for
Multiple Motor
Types

Some equipment manufacturers may have a single type of machine that has to support three
different motor types—and only one motor will be connected at a time. For example, an OEM
may sell basically the same machine to the US market and the European market. Some reasons
why the OEM needs two motor profiles are:
• The inverter power input voltage is different for these markets.
• The required motor type is also different for each destination.
In other cases, the inverter needs two profiles because the machine characteristics vary according to these situations:
• Sometimes the motor load is very light and can move fast. Other times the motor load is
heavy and must move slower. Using two profiles allows the motor speed, acceleration and
deceleration to be optimal for the load and avoid inverter trip (fault) events.
• Sometimes the slower version of the machine does not have special braking options, but a
higher performance version does have braking features.
Having multiple motor profiles lets you store several “personalities” for motors in one
inverter’s memory. The inverter allows the final selection between the three motor types to be
made in the field through the use of intelligent input terminal functions [SET] and [SET3]. This
provides an extra level of flexibility needed in particular situations. See the following page.

SJ300 Inverter

4–73

Parameters for the second motor and third motors have function codes of the form x2xx and
x3xx respectively. They appear immediately after the first motor’s parameter in the menu
listing order. The following table lists the parameters that have the second/third parameter
registers for programming.
Parameter Codes
Function Name
2nd motor

3rd motor

Multi-speed frequency setting

A020

A220

A320

Acceleration time setting (Acceleration 1)

F002

F202

F302

Deceleration time setting (Deceleration 1)

F003

F203

F303

Second acceleration time setting (Acceleration 2)

A092

A292

A392

Second deceleration time setting (Deceleration 2)

A093

A293

A393

Select method to use 2nd acceleration/deceleration

A094

A294

—

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point

A095

A295

—

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point

A096

A296

—

Level of electronic thermal setting

B012

B212

B312

Select electronic thermal characteristic

B013

B213

B313

Torque boost method selection

A041

A241

—

Manual torque boost value

A042

A242

—

Manual torque boost frequency adjustment

A043

A243

A343

V/F characteristic curve selection

A044

A244

A344

Base frequency setting

A003

A203

A303

Maximum frequency setting

A004

A204

A304

Select motor constant

H002

H202

—

Motor capacity setting

H003

H203

—

Motor poles setting

H004

H204

—

Motor constant R1 setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H020/H030

H220/H230

—

Motor constant R2 setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H021/H031

H221/H231

—

Motor constant L setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H022/H032

H222/H232

—

Motor constant Io setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H023/H033

H223/H233

—

Motor constant J setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H024/H034

H224/H234

—

Motor constant Kp setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)

H005

H205

—

Motor stabilization constant

H006

H206

—

Operations
and Monitoring

1st motor

Inverter System
Accessories
In This Chapter....

5
page

— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Component Descriptions .................................................................. 3
— Dynamic Braking............................................................................... 6

5–2

Introduction

Introduction
A motor speed control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as fuses for
safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started, that’s all
you may need for now. But a fully developed system can also have a variety of additional
components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the inverter’s
braking performance. The figure below shows a system with several possible optional components, and the table gives part number information.
From power supply

Part No. Series
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI

Name

RF noise filter
EMI filter
Switch
Ferrite core
Capacitive filter

T
+1

Inverter

Motor Control
Accessories

Expansion bay

DC link choke
Braking
resistor

Digital input
expansion card

Braking
unit

RB
Encoder input
expansion card

–

RF noise
filter

ALI–xxx

HRL–x

5–3

RF noise filter,
input side

ZCL–x

5–4

EMI filter
(EMC Class A)

NF–CEHx

NF–CEHxx

5–4

EMI filter
(EMC Class B)

NF–CEHx,
with FC–Hx

NF–CEHxx,
with FC–Hx

5–4

Capacitive filter

CFI–x

5–4

DC link choke

—

HDC–xxx

5–4

Braking resistor

JRB–xxx–x,
SRB–xxx–x

JRB–xxx,
SRB–xxx

5–9

Braking resistor,
NEMA-rated

—

HRB1-x,
HRB2-x
HRB3-x

5–9

Resistance braking
unit

BRD–xxx

5–8

RF noise filter,
output side

ZCL–xxx

5–4

AC reactor, output
side

ALI–xxx

HRL–xxx

5–3

—

HRL–xxxC

5–3

LCR filter

GND
A

USA

AC reactor, input
side

AC reactor

AC reactor, or
LCR filter

Motor
Encoder
Thermal switch

See
page

Europe,
Japan

Encoder feed-back
expansion

SJ-FB

5–5

Digital input
expansion card

SJ-DG

5–5

NOTE: The Hitachi part number series for accessories
includes different sizes of each part type, specified by the
–x suffix. Hitachi product literature can help match size
and rating of your inverter to the proper accessory size.
Each inverter accessory comes with its own printed
instruction manual. Please refer to those manuals for complete installation details. This chapter gives only an overview of these optional system devices. For more
information on Hitachi inverter system accessories, please
contact your Hitachi sales office or distributor.

SJ300 Inverter

5–3

Component Descriptions
AC Reactors,
Input Side

This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines, or when the main
power voltage imbalance exceeds 3% (and power source capacity is more than 500 kVA), or to
smooth out line fluctuations. It also improves the power factor.
In the following cases for a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current flows on the main
power supply side, and is able to destroy the inverter module:
• If the unbalanced factor of the power supply is 3% or higher
• If the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (the power
supply capacity is 500 kVA or more)
• If abrupt power supply changes are expected
Examples of these situations include:
1. Several inverters are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
2. A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
3. An installed phase-advance (power factor correction) capacitor opens and closes
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable, install
an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter. Also, where the effects of an indirect
lightning strike is possible, install a lightning conductor.
Example calculation:
VRS = 205V, VST = 203V, VTR = 197V,
where VRS is R-S line voltage, VST is S-T line voltage, VTR is T-R line voltage
Max. line voltage (min.) – Mean line voltage
Unbalance factor of voltage = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100
Meanline voltage
V RS – ( V RS + V ST + V TR ) ⁄ 3
205 – 202
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100 = ------------------------ × 100 = 1.5%
( V RS + V ST + V TR ) ⁄ 3
202
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions.
This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter’s switching waveforms,
by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commercial power quality. It is also useful to
reduce the reflected voltage wave phenomenon when wiring from the inverter to the motor is
more than 10m in length. Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for
installation instructions.

Motor Control
Accessories

AC Reactor or
LCR Filter,
Output Side

5–4

Component Descriptions

Zero-phase
Reactor (RF
Noise Filter)

EMI Filter

Electrical noise interference may occur
on nearby equipment such as a radio
receiver. The zero-phase reactor helps
reduce radiated noise from the inverter
wiring. It can be used on the input or
output side of the inverter. The example
zero-phase reactor shown to the right
comes with a mounting bracket. The
wiring must go through the opening to
reduce the RF component of the electrical noise. Loop the wires three times
(four turns) to attain the full RF filtering
effect. For larger wire sizes, place
multiple zero-phase reactors (up to
four) side-by-side for a greater filtering
effect.

ZCL–x

The EMI filter reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring generated by the
inverter. Connect the EMI filter to the inverter primary (input side). The NF–CEH–x series
filter is required for compliance to the EMC Class A directive (Europe) and C-TICK (Australia). See “CE–EMC Installation Guidelines” on page D–2.

Motor Control
Accessories

WARNING: The EMI filter has high internal leakage current from power wiring to the chassis.
Therefore, connect the chassis ground of the EMI filter before making the power connections to
avoid danger of shock or injury.

NF–CEHxx

Ferrite Core

To meet EMC Class B limit an optional ferrite core (FC–Hx) must be inserted between the
NF–CEHx filter (above) and the inverter.

RF Noise Filter
(Capacitive)

This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the main power wires in the inverter input
side. This filter is not for achieving CE compliance and is applicable only to the input side only
of the inverter. It comes in two versions—for 200V class inverters or 400V class inverters.
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the radio noise filter for installation instructions.

DC Link Choke

The DC choke (reactor) suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter. It attenuates the highfrequency components on the inverter’s internal DC bus (link). However, note that it does not
protect the diode rectifiers in the inverter input circuit.

SJ300 Inverter

Expansion Cards The SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Board installs in
the inverter’s expansion bay, which can accept
up to two expansion cards. The encoder card
accepts two-channel incremental encoder
signals. Position feedback is essential for certain
torque-control algorithms, and is useful for
improving low-speed performance. The card can
also generate linear acceleration/deceleration
ramps for velocity control.
All wiring associated with this card connects to
its PWB connectors as shown. Some related
signals may be assigned to the intelligent I/O
terminals, as described in Chapter 4. For more
information, refer to the SJ–FB manual.
The SJ–DG Digital Input Card installs in the
inverter’s expansion bay. This card accepts up to
eight digital input signals, in addition to the intelligent inputs on the inverter’s control terminal
connector. All wiring associated with card
connects to its PWB connectors as shown.

5–5

PWB connector
to external wiring

SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Card

PWB connector
to external wiring

SJ–DG Digital Input Card
The SJ–DN DeviceNet Interface Card (not shown) installs in the inverter’s expansion bay. It
connects directly to a DeviceNet network. Inverter parameters P044 to P049 configure the card.
Only one DeviceNet card may be installed in an inverter. For more information, please refer to
the DeviceNet Expansion Card Instruction Manual.
Motor Control
Accessories

5–6

Dynamic Braking

Dynamic Braking
Introduction

The purpose of dynamic braking is to improve the ability of the inverter
to stop (decelerate) the motor and load. This becomes necessary when an
application has some or all of the following characteristics:
• High load inertia compared to the available motor torque
• The application requires frequent or sudden changes in speed
• System losses are not great enough to slow the motor as needed
When the inverter reduces its output frequency to decelerate the load, the
motor can temporarily become a generator. This occurs when the motor
rotation frequency is higher than the inverter output frequency. This
condition can cause the inverter DC bus voltage to rise, resulting in an
over-voltage trip. In many applications, the over-voltage condition
serves as a warning signal that we have exceeded the deceleration
capabilities of the system. SJ300 inverters rated 15hp (11kW) and below
have a built-in braking unit that sends the regenerative energy from the
motor during deceleration to the optional braking resistor(s). External
braking units may also be used if higher braking torques and/or duty
cycles are required. The dynamic braking resistor serves as a load, developing heat to stop the motor just as brakes on an automobile develop
heat during braking.
The braking resistor is the main component of a braking resistor assembly, which includes an integral thermal fuse and thermally activated
alarm relay for safety. However, be careful to avoid overheating its resistor. The thermal fuse and thermal relay are safeguards for extreme conditions, but the inverter can maintain braking usage in a safe zone.
Braking
Resistor

Motor Control
Accessories

Dynamic Braking The inverter controls braking via a duty cycle
method (percent of the time braking is ON
Usage Ratio
versus total time). Parameter B090 sets the
dynamic braking usage ratio. In the graph to
the right, the example shows three uses of
dynamic braking in a 100-second period. The
inverter calculates the average percentage
usage in that time (T%). The percentage of
usage is proportional to the heat dissipated. If
T% is greater than the B090 parameter
setting, the inverter enters the Trip Mode and
turns OFF the frequency output.

BRD

ON
OFF

100s
t

B90

( t1 + t2 + t3 + ... )
T% = ------------------------------------------ × 100
100 seconds

Please note the following (for SJ300–004LF/HF to SJ300–110LF/HF).
• When B090 is set for 0%, dynamic braking is not performed.
• When the T% value exceeds the limit set by B090, the inverter will trip (ending the dynamic
braking).
• The cable from the external resistor to the inverter must not exceed 5 m (16 ft.) length.
• The individual wires from the resistor to the inverter must not be bundled together.
NOTE: Inverters rated 20hp (15kW) and above (SJ300–150LF/HF to SJ300–550LF/1320HFE/
1500HFU) do not include an internal braking unit. Parameters B090, B095, and B096 do not
apply to these models.

5–7

SJ300 Inverter

SJ300
The SJ300 Series 200V and 400V class inverter models in the 1/2 to 15 hp range have internal
Dynamic Braking braking units. Additional stopping torque is available by adding external resistors. The required
Selection Tables braking torque depends on your particular application. Other tables in this section will help you
choose the proper resistor.

1/2 to 15 hp (0.4 to 11 kW)

Voltage
Class

Without
External Resistor

Using Optional
External Resistor

Performance @
Minimum Resistance

External
Resistance,
Ohms

Braking
Torque
@60Hz,
%

Minimum
Resistance,
Ohms

Max.
Braking
Duty
Cycle,
%

Minimum
Resistance
@ 100%
Braking
Duty
Cycle,
Ohms

Motor
hp

Braking
Unit

Braking
Torque
@ 60Hz,
%

SJ300–004LFU

1/2

Built-in

200

150

SJ300–007LFU

Built-in

200

150

SJ300–015LFU

Built-in

200

100

SJ300–022LFU

Built-in

160

100

SJ300–037LFU

Built-in

100

SJ300–055LFU

7.5

Built-in

SJ300–075LFU

Built-in

SJ300–110LFU

Built-in

SJ300–007HFU/E

Built-in

100

200

100

300

SJ300–015HFU/E

Built-in

100

200

100

300

SJ300–022HFU/E

Built-in

100

200

100

300

SJ300–040HFU/E

Built-in

100

140

200

SJ300–055HFU/E

7.5

Built-in

100

200

SJ300–075HFU/E

Built-in

100

150

SJ300–110HFU/E

Built-in

150

Model Number

200V

400V

Motor Control
Accessories

5–8

Dynamic Braking

Choosing a
Braking Unit

The SJ300 Series 200V and 400V class inverter models in the 20 to 200 hp range require
external braking units to increase their braking torque. Braking units come in sizes corresponding to the power handing requirements for particular resistor selections. Be sure to follow the
installation instructions accompanying each braking unit. The following table lists the SJ300
inverter models and their applicable braking units.

Performance Versus External Braking Units
20 to 200 hp (15 to 1500 kW)

Voltage
Class

Model Number
SJ300

Motor
hp

–150LFU

Without
Braking
Unit

Braking
Torque,
%

With Braking Unit

Braking Unit
Model

Minimum
Resistance,
Ohms

Max.
Braking
Duty Cycle,
%

Minimum
Resistance
@ 100%
Braking
Duty Cycle,
Ohms

BRD–E2

BRD–E2–30K

BRD–E2

BRD–E2–30K

BRD–E2

BRD–E2–30K

BRD–E2–55K

20
–185LFU
25
–220LFU
30
200V

Motor Control
Accessories

–300LFU

–370LFU

BRD–E2–55K

–450LFU

BRD–E2–55K

–550LFU

BRD–E2–55K

–150HFU/HFE

BRD–EZ2

BRD–EZ2–30K

BRD–EZ2

BRD–EZ2–30K

BRD–EZ2

BRD–EZ2–30K

–185HFU/HFE

–220HFU/HFE

400V

–300HFU/HFE

BRD–EZ2–55K

–370HFU/HFE

BRD–EZ2–55K

–450HFU/HFE

BRD–EZ2–55K

–550HFU/HFE

BRD–EZ2–55K

–750HFU/HFE

100

BRD–EZ2–55K

–900HFU/HFE

125

BRD–EZ2–55K

–1100HFU/HFE

150

BRD–EZ2–55K

–1320HFE

175

BRD–EZ2–55K

–1500HFU

200

BRD–EZ2–55K

5–9

SJ300 Inverter

Selecting a
You can add one or more resistors to your inverter configuration to increase braking torque
Braking Resistor performance. The number of resistors and their configuration (series or parallel) depends on the
desired braking torque. The tables below list the resistor types for inverter models with internal
braking units. Tables for inverters with external braking units are on the next two pages.
• Total Ohms – lists the resistance value of the resistor or, if using multiple resistors, their
combined resistance
• Total Watts – lists the power dissipation of the resistor or, if using multiple resistors, their
combined power dissipation
• Maximum Duty Cycle – the maximum allowable percentage of braking time over any 100second interval to avoid overheating the resistor(s)
• Maximum braking torque – the maximum braking torque that the inverter / resistor combination can deliver
NOTE: If your application requires resistors with NEMA ratings, be sure to use the HRB type.

200V Class

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
JRB Series

Model
Number
SJ300

SRB/NSRB Series

HRB Series

Max.
Max.
Max.
Type
Total Total Duty
Type
Total Total Duty
Type
Total Total Duty
& (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle, & (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle, & (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle,
%
%
%

Max.
Braking
Torque,
%

120–3

120

1.5

300–1

300

7.5

HRB1

400

200

–007LFU

120–3

120

1.5

300–1

300

7.5

HRB1

400

200

–015LFU

120–4

120

1.0

400–1

400

7.5

HRB2

600

200

–022LFU

120–4

120

1.0

400–1

400

7.5

HRB2

600

160

–037LFU

120–4

120

1.0

400–1

400

7.5

HRB2

600

100

17.5

240

1.0

17.5

800

7.5

HRB3

1200

17.5

240

1.0

17.5

800

7.5

HRB3

1200

17.5

240

1.0

17.5

800

7.5

HRB3

1200

–055LFU
–075LFU
–110LFU

120–4
x (2) in
parallel

400V Class

400–1
x (2) in
parallel

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
JRB Series

Model
Number
SJ300

SRB/NSRB Series

HRB Series

Max.
Max.
Max.
Type
Total Total Duty
Type
Total Total Duty
Type
Total Total Duty
& (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle, & (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle, & (qty) Ohms Watts Cycle,
%
%
%

–007HFU/HFE

120–2

100

120

1.5

200–2

100

200

7.5

–015HFU/HFE

120–2

100

120

1.5

200–2

100

200

7.5

–022HFU/HFE

120–2

100

120

1.5

200–2

100

200

7.5

240

1.0

800

–040HFU/HFE
–055HFU/HFE
–075HFU/HFE
–110HFU/HFE

120–4
x (2) in
series

240

1.0

240

1.0

240

1.0

400–1
x (2) in
series

800

HRB1
x (2) in
series

HRB2
x (2) in
series

Max.
Braking
Torque,
%

100

800

200

100

800

200

100

800

200

1200

140

1200

120

1200

100

1200

Motor Control
Accessories

–004LFU

5–10

Dynamic Braking

The table below lists the performance of 200V-class inverter models with the optional external
braking units. In some cases, the resistor selection specifies multiple resistors in a parallel,
series, or combination parallel/series configuration. The example diagram shows a parallel
configuration. Please refer to the braking resistor documentation for detailed wiring diagrams.
Example configuration
HRB3 x (4) parallel
Braking
Unit

Inverter

200V Class

Braking Unit

Model Number
Type
SJ300

BRD–E2

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection

Type
x (quantity)

Max.
Max. Braking
Duty Torque,
Cycle,
%
%

Series or
Parallel

Total
Ohms

Total
Watts

HRB1

—

400

HRB2

—

600

HRB3

—

1200

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

110

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

150

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

200

HRB1

—

400

HRB2

—

600

HRB3

—

1200

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

130

HRB3 x (4)

–150LFU
BRD–E2–30K

BRD–E2
–185LFU

Motor Control
Accessories

BRD–E2–30K

BRD–E2

parallel

4.3

4800

170

HRB1

—

400

HRB2

—

600

HRB3

—

1200

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

110

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

150

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

110

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

–220LFU
BRD–E2–30K

–300LFU

–370LFU

–450LFU

BRD–E2–30K

5–11

SJ300 Inverter

200V Class

Braking Unit

Model Number

Type
x (quantity)

Type
SJ300

–550LFU

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection

BRD–E2–30K

Max.
Max. Braking
Duty Torque,
Cycle,
%
%

Series or
Parallel

Total
Ohms

Total
Watts

HRB3 x (2)

parallel

8.5

2400

HRB3 x (3)

parallel

5.7

3600

HRB3 x (4)

parallel

4.3

4800

The table below lists the performance of 400V-class inverter models with the optional external
braking units. In some cases, the resistor selection specifies multiple resistors in a parallel,
series, or combination parallel/series configuration. The example diagram shows a combination
parallel / series configuration. Please refer to the braking unit manual for detailed wiring
diagrams.
Example configuration

Inverter

400V Class

Braking Unit

Model Number
Type
SJ300

BRD–EZ2

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection

Type
x (quantity)

Max.
Max. Braking
Duty Torque,
Cycle,
%
%

Series /
Parallel

Total
Ohms

Total
Watts

HRB1 x (2)

series

100

800

HRB2 x (2)

series

1200

HRB3 x (2)

series

2400

110

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

190

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

200

HRB1 x (2)

series

100

800

HRB2 x (2)

series

1200

HRB3 x (2)

series

2400

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

170

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

200

HRB1 x (2)

series

100

800

HRB2 x (2)

series

1200

HRB3 x (2)

series

2400

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

150

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

200

BRD–EZ2–30K

BRD–EZ2
–185HFU/HFE
BRD–EZ2–30K

BRD–EZ2
–220HFU/HFE
BRD–EZ2–30K

Motor Control
Accessories

–150HFU/HFE

HRB3 x (6)...
(3) parallel x 2 series

Braking
Unit

5–12

Dynamic Braking

400V Class

Braking Unit

Model Number
Type
SJ300

–300HFU

–370HFU/HFE

–450HFU/HFE

–550HFU/HFE

–750HFU/HFE

Motor Control
Accessories

–900HFU/HFE

Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection

Type
x (quantity)

Max.
Max. Braking
Duty Torque,
Cycle,
%
%

Series /
Parallel

Total
Ohms

Total
Watts

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

110

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

170

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

150

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

120

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

100

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

HRB3 x (4)

(2) parallel
x 2 series

4800

HRB3 x (6)

(3) parallel
x 2 series

11.3

7200

BRD–EZ2–55K

–1100HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K

–1320HFU

–1500HFE

BRD–EZ2–55K

NOTE: Other braking units and resistors are also available. For braking requirements beyond
those in the tables, contact your Hitachi distributor.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
In This Chapter....

6
page

— Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2
— Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions................................... 5
— Restoring Factory Default Settings ................................................... 9
— Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................... 10
— Warranty ......................................................................................... 18

6–2

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Safety Messages Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or performing maintenance
on the inverter and motor system.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance, inspection,
and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove any metallic objects from your person
(wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise, there is a
danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires for cooling fan and
logic P.C. board). Otherwise, there is danger of fire due to wire breakage and/or injury to
personnel.

General Precautions and Notes

• Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the inverter.
• Take special care to avoid breaking wires or making connection mistakes.
• Firmly connect terminals and connectors.
• Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil. Dust, steel filings and other foreign
matter can damage the inverter, causing unexpected accidents, so take special care.

Inspection Items

This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items:
• Daily inspection
• Periodic inspection (approximately once a year)

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

• Insulation resistance test

SJ300 Inverter

Troubleshooting
Tips

The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution(s).

Symptom/condition

The motor
will not run.

6–3

The inverter
outputs U, V, W
are not supplying
voltage.

Probable Cause

Solution

• Is the frequency command source
A001 parameter setting correct?
• Is the Run command source A002
parameter setting correct?

• Make sure the parameter
setting A001 is correct.
• Make sure the parameter
setting A002 is correct.

• Is power being supplied to terminals
[R], [S], and [T] ([L1], [L2], and
[L3])? If so, the POWER lamp should
be ON.

• Check terminals [R], [S], and
[T] ([L1], [L2], and [L3]), then
[U], [V], and [W] ([T1], [T2],
and [T3]).
• Turn ON the power supply or
check fuses.

• Is there an error code EXX.X
displayed?

• Press the Func. key and determine the error type. Eliminate
the error cause, then clear the
error (Reset).

• Are the signals to the intelligent input
terminals correct?
• Is the Run Command active?
• Is the [FW] terminal (or [RV])
connected to P24 (via switch, etc.)

• Verify the terminal functions
for C001 - C008 are correct.
• Turn ON Run command
enable.
• Supply 24V to [FW] or [RV]
terminal, if configured.

• Has the frequency setting for F001
been set greater than zero?
• Are the control circuit terminals [H],
[O], and [L] connected to the potentiometer?

• Set the parameter for F001 to a
safe, non-zero value.
• If the potentiometer is the
frequency setting source, verify
voltage at [O] > 0V.

• Is the RS (reset) function or FRS (free- • Turn OFF the command(s).
run stop) function ON?
Inverter outputs
• Is the motor load too heavy?
U, V, W are
supplying voltage.
• Are the connections of output terminals [U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3]
correct?
• Is the phase sequence of the motor
forward or reverse with respect to
[U/T1],[V/T2], and [W/T3]?

• Make connections according to
the phase sequence of the
motor. In general:
FWD = U-V-W, and REV=UW-V.

• Are the control terminals [FW] and
[RV] wired correctly?
• Is parameter F004 properly set?

• Use terminal [FW] for forward,
and [RV] for reverse.
• Set motor direction in F004.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

The direction of the motor is
reversed.

• Reduce load or test the motor
independently of the load.

6–4

Troubleshooting

Symptom/condition

The motor speed will not reach the
target frequency (desired speed).

Probable Cause

Solution

• If using the analog input, is there
current or voltage at [O] or [OI]?

• Check the wiring.
• Check the potentiometer or
signal generating device.

• Is the load too heavy?

• Reduce the load.
• Heavy loads activate the
overload restriction feature
(reduces output as needed).

• Is the inverter internally limiting the
output frequency?

• Check max frequency setting
(A004)
• Check frequency upper limit

setting (A061)
• If using analog inputs, check

their settings (A101– A104)
or (A111–A114), or (A011–
A014)
• Is the load fluctuation too great?

The rotation is unstable.

The RPM of the motor does not
match the inverter output
frequency setting.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

A parameter
will not
change after
an edit
(reverts to old
setting).

• Is the supply voltage unstable?
• Is the problem occurring at a particular
frequency?

• Increase the motor capacity
(both inverter and motor).
• Fix power supply problem.
• Change the output frequency
slightly, or use the jump
frequency setting to skip the
problem frequency.

• Is the maximum frequency setting
• Verify the V/F settings match
A004 correct?
motor specifications.
• Does the monitor function D001
• Make sure all scaling (such as
display the expected output frequency?
A011 to A014) is properly set.

True for certain
parameters

• Is the inverter in Run Mode? Some
parameters cannot be edited during
Run Mode.

• Put inverter in Stop Mode
(press the Stop/reset key). Then
edit the parameter.

True for all
parameters

• If you’re using the [SFT] intelligent
input (software lock function)—is the
[SFT] input ON?

• Change the state of the SFT
input, and check the B031
parameter (SFT mode).

SJ300 Inverter

6–5

Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Fault Detection
and Clearing

The microprocessor in the inverter detects a
variety of fault conditions and captures the event,
STOP
RESET
recording it in a history table. The inverter output
Run
Stop
RUN
turns OFF, or “trips” similar to the way a circuit
breaker trips due to an over-current condition.
STOP
Most faults occur when the motor is running (refer
RESET
to the diagram to the right). However, the inverter
Fault
Trip
could have an internal fault and trip in Stop Mode.
Fault
In either case, you can clear the fault by pressing
the Stop/Reset key. Additionally, you can clear the
inverter’s cumulative trip history by performing the procedure “Restoring Factory Default
Settings” on page 6–9 (setting B_84=00 will clear the trip history but leave inverter settings
intact).

Error Status
Codes

The conditions at the time of an error provide important clues to help you understand the cause.
The SJ300 inverter displays a “status at trip point” digit to the right of the decimal point for
some error codes. For example, E07.2 means Error 7 occurred and the inverter status was
condition # “2” when the error occurred.
Status
Codes

---.0
---.1
---.2
---.3
---.4
Error Codes

Inverter Status
Reset
Stop
Deceleration
Constant speed

Status
Codes

---.5
---.6
---.7
---.8

Inverter Status
f0 stop
Starting
DC braking
Overload restriction

Acceleration

An error code will appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to trip.
The following table lists the cause associated with the error.
Error
Code

Name

Probable Cause(s)

Over current event while at
constant speed

E02

Over current event during
deceleration

E03

Over current event during
acceleration

The dual-voltage motor is wired incorrectly.

Over current event during
other conditions

DC braking power(A054) is set too high, or a
current transformer error occurred, or a noise
source induced the error.

E04

The inverter output was short-circuited, or the
motor shaft is locked or has a heavy load. These
conditions cause excessive current for the inverter,
so the inverter output is turned OFF.

Note: The SJ300 will over current trip at
nominally 200% of rated current for models up to
–550xxx;
nominally 180% of rated current for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

E01

6–6

Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions

Error
Code

Probable Cause(s)

E05

Overload protection

When a motor overload is detected by the
electronic thermal function, the inverter trips and
turns OFF its output.

E06

Braking resistor overload

When the regenerative braking resistor exceeds
the usage time allowance or usage ratio, the
inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.

E07

Over voltage protection

When the DC bus voltage exceeds a threshold, due
to regenerative energy from the motor.

E08

EEPROM error

When the built-in EEPROM memory has
problems due to noise or excessive temperature,
the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.

E09

Under-voltage error

A decrease of internal DC bus voltage below a
threshold results in a control circuit fault. This
condition can also generate excessive motor heat
or cause low torque. The inverter trips and turns
OFF its output.

CT (current transformer)
error

If a strong source of electrical interference is close
to the inverter or a fault occurs in a built-in CT
(current transformer), the inverter trips and turns
its output OFF.

E11

CPU error

A malfunction in the built-in CPU has occurred,
so the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.

E12

External trip

A signal on an intelligent input terminal configured as EXT has occurred. The inverter trips and
turns OFF the output to the motor.

E13

USP

When the Unattended Start Protection (USP) is
enabled, an error occurred when power is applied
while a Run signal is present. The inverter trips
and does not go into Run Mode until the error is
cleared.

E14

Ground fault

The inverter is protected by the detection of
ground faults between the inverter output and the
motor during powerup tests. This feature protects
the inverter, and does not protect humans.

E15

Input over-voltage

When the input voltage is higher than the specified
value, it is detected 60 seconds after powerup and
the inverter trips and turns OFF its output.

E16

Instantaneous power failure

When the input power is removed for more than
15ms, the inverter trips and the output to the motor
turns OFF. If the power failure duration exceeds
the duration set in parameter B002, it is considered a power failure. When input power is
restored, the inverter restarts if the Run signal is
present, depending on the restart condition.

E21

Inverter thermal trip

When the inverter internal temperature is above
the threshold, the thermal sensor in the inverter
module detects the excessive temperature of the
power devices and trips, turning the inverter
output OFF.

E10

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Name

SJ300 Inverter

Error
Code

E23

Name

6–7

Probable Cause(s)

Gate array error

An internal inverter error has occurred in communications between the CPU and gate array IC.

Phase failure detection

One of three lines of the 3-phase power is missing.

IGBT error

When an instantaneous over-current condition
occurs on any IGBT (output transistor) device, the
inverter alarm trips. then it turns the outputs OFF
in order to protect the circuitry.

E35

Thermistor

When a thermistor is connected to terminals [TH]
and [CM1] and the inverter has sensed the temperature is too high, the inverter trips and turns OFF
the output.

E36

Brake error

When the inverter releases the brake and cannot
detect whether the external brake is ON or OFF
within the waiting time (set by parameter B024),
the inverter trips and turns OFF the output to the
motor.

Under-voltage (brownout)
with output shutoff

Due to low input voltage, the inverter turns its
output OFF and tries to restart. If it fails to restart,
then the alarm trips to record the under-voltage
error event.

Automatic restart and phase
loss

The inverter is restarting, due to an over-current,
over-voltage, under-voltage, or a phase loss event.
See parameter B001 setting in “Automatic Restart
Mode and Phase Loss” on page 3–29.

E6X

Expansion card #1
connection error

E7X

Expansion card #2
connection error

An error has occurred in an expansion card or at
its connecting terminals. Please refer to the
manual for the expansion card for additional
details.

E24
E30

––––

NOTE: If an EEPROM error (E08) occurs, be sure to confirm the parameter data values are
still correct.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

6–8

Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions

Trip History and
Inverter Status

We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before attempting clearing it. When a
fault occurs, the inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault. To
access the data, use the monitor functions (Dxxx) and select D081 for details about the present
fault (En). The previous five faults are stored in D081 to D086, with D (En-1 to En-5). Each error
shifts D081–D085 to D082–D086, and writes the new error to D081.
The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes. When fault(s) exist,
you can review their details by first selecting the proper function: D081 is most recent, and
D086 is the oldest.

Monitor Menu
2

d 086

d 081

Trip History

d 082

FUNC.

No error
Error
exists?

____

Yes

Current Trip
Conditions

E 0 7.2

Error Code

6 0.00

Output frequency at
trip point

4.00

Motor current at
trip point

2 7 0.0

DC bus voltage at
trip point

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

15
1

Cumulative inverter
operation time
at trip point
Cumulative powerON time at trip point

1
FUNC.

FUNC.

SJ300 Inverter

6–9

Restoring Factory Default Settings
You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory (default) settings for the intended
country of use. After initializing the inverter, use the powerup test in Chapter 2 to get the motor
running again. To initialize the inverter, follow the steps below.

No.

Action

Use the FUNC. , 1 , and 2 keys to
navigate to the “B” Group.

2
3
4
5

Press the

FUNC.

Display

key.

Press and hold the 1 key until ->
Press the

FUNC.

b- - -

“B” Group selected

b 001

First “B” parameter selected

b 085

Country code for initialization selected

key.

Func./Parameter

00 = Japan, 01 = Europe,
02 = U.S.

Confirm the country code is correct. Do not change it unless you are absolutely sure
the power input voltage range and frequency match the country code setting.
To change the country code, press 1 or 2 to set; STR to store.

6
7
8
9
10
11

key.

b 085

Country code for initialization selected

Press the 2 key.

b 084

Initialization function selected

Press the

FUNC.

key.

Press the 1 key.
Press the STR key.
Press and hold the 1 and 2
keys together, and immediately

00 = initialization disabled,
clear trip history only

01 = enable initialization

b 084

Initialization now enabled to
restore all defaults

b 084

First part of special key
sequence, the “B” in the
display begins flashing

b 084

Entire “B084” display will
begin flashing

0 eu

Default parameter country
code shown during initialization process (left-most character displays alternating
pattern)

press and hold the FUNC. key. Do not
release these keys yet.
12

Holding the keys above, press and

STOP

RESET

(STOP) key for 3 sec.

When the b 084 display begins
flashing, release the

STOP

RESET

key.

0USA
14

Release the 1
keys together.

, and

FUNC.

d 001

Final part of key sequence,
function code for output
frequency monitor shown after
initialization is complete

NOTE: Initialization cannot be performed with a remote operator panel. Disconnect the device
and use the inverter’s front panel keypad.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

hold the

6–10

Maintenance and Inspection

Maintenance and Inspection
Monthly and
Yearly Inspection
Chart

Item Inspected

Check for...

Inspection
Cycle
Month

Overall

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Main
circuit

Control
circuit

Inspection Method

Criteria

Year

Ambient
environment

Extreme
temperatures
& humidity

✔

Thermometer,
hygrometer

Ambient temperature
between -10 to 50°C,
non-condensing

Major devices

Abnormal
vibration,
noise

✔

Visual and aural

Stable environment for
electronic controls

Power supply
voltage

Voltage tolerance

✔

Digital volt meter,
measure between
inverter terminals
[L1], [L2], [L3]

200V class:
200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
400V class:
380 to 460V 50/60 Hz

Ground
Insulation

Adequate
resistance

✔

Megger test

500VDC, reading of 5M
ohms or greater, see next
section for test details

Mounting

No loose
screws

✔

Torque wrench

M3: 0.5 – 0.6 Nm
M4: 0.98 – 1.3 Nm
M5: 1.5 – 2.0 Nm

Components

Overheating

✔

Thermal trip events

No trip events

Housing

Dirt, dust

✔

Visual

Vacuum dust and dirt

Terminal block

Secure
connections

✔

Visual

No abnormalities

Smoothing
capacitor

Leaking,
swelling

Visual

No abnormalities

Relay(s)

Chattering

✔

Aural

Single click when
switching ON or OFF

Resistors

Cracks or
discoloring

✔

Visual

Use Ohm meter to check
braking resistors

Cooling fan

Noise

✔

Power down,
manually rotate

Rotation must be smooth

Dust

✔

Visual

Vacuum to clean

Visual

No abnormalities

✔

Overall

No odor,
discoloring,
corrosion

Capacitor

No leaks or
deformation

✔

Visual

Undistorted appearance

Legibility

✔

Visual

All LED segments work

Display LEDs

Note 1: The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature. See “Capacitor Life
Curve” on page 6–12.
Note 2: The inverter must be cleaned periodically. If dust accumulates on the fan and heat
sink, it can cause overheating of the inverter.

SJ300 Inverter

Megger Test

6–11

The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if an insulation
degradation has occurred. For inverters, it is important that the power terminals be isolated
from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation.
The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test. Just follow
the steps to perform the test:
1. Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes before proceeding.
2. Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring.
3. Remove all wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W]. Most importantly, the
input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter.
4. Remove the jumper at connector J61. It is located on the main circuit board beside the
power terminals.
5. Use a bare wire and short terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W] together as shown
in the diagram.
6. Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as shown.
Then perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5MΩ or greater resistance.

Add test
jumper wire
Disconnect
power source

SJ300

Disconnect
motor wires
Motor

P
Megger, 500VDC
J61

PD
RB

Disconnect jumper at
J61 before performing
the megger test

N
Earth
GND

7. After completing the test, disconnect the megger from the inverter.
8. Reconnect the jumper at connector J61 as before.

CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I/O,
analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the inverter.

CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The inverter has a surge
protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

9. Reconnect the original wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W].

6–12

Maintenance and Inspection

Spare parts

We recommend that you stock spare parts to reduce down time, including parts listed below:
Quantity
Part description

Capacitor
Life Curve

Symbol

Notes
Used

Spare

Cooling fan

FAN

1, 2, 3... (depends
on model)

1 or 2

Fan unit at top of housing
in all models

Auxiliary cooling fan

FAN

0 or 1... (depends
on model)

0 or 1

–150Lxx, –185Lxx, and
–220Lxx models

Capacitor bank

All models

The DC bus inside the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the diagram below. The
capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smooths the power for use by the inverter. So,
any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter. The capacitor bank
in SJ300 series inverters is replaceable. This section will show you how to replace it in the field.

Variable-frequency Drive

Power
Input
L1/R

Converter

Inverter

Internal DC Bus

Motor

+
+

L2/S

U/T1

Rectifier

V/T2

L3/T

W/T3
–

Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures, as the graph below demonstrates. Be
sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels, and perform maintenance inspections
on the fan, heat sink, and other components. If the inverter is installed on a cabinet, the ambient
temperature is the temperature inside the cabinet.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Capacitor Life Curve
Ambient
temperature, °C

12 hrs / day operation

20
0
1

Years

SJ300 Inverter

Capacitor
Replacement

6–13

The capacitor bank consists of an assembly that slides out of the SJ300 unit. This means that no
soldering is required!
1. First, make sure that all power is removed
from the unit, and that you have waited 5
minutes before accessing the wiring area. Then
you’ll need to remove the metal wire entry
plate located at the bottom of the unit. This
may require you to disconnect all wires to the
power terminals. Then, just loosen the screws
as shown, and slide the wire entry plate
outward on its guides to remove.

Retention screws for wire entry plate

WARNING: The screws that retain the capacitor bank assembly are part of the electrical
circuit of the high-voltage internal DC bus. Be sure that all power has been disconnected from
the inverter, and that you have waited at least 5 minutes before accessing the terminals or
screws. Be sure the charge lamp is extinguished. Otherwise, there is the danger of electrocution
to personnel.
2. The capacitor bank assembly is locked into
the inverter via two screws that also make the
electrical connection to the internal DC bus.
These two screws are accessible just below
the power terminals as shown to the right.

Retention screws for capacitor bank

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

3. Grasp the capacitor bank assembly and gently
slide it out of the unit as shown to the right. DO
NOT try to force the removal; it will slide out
easily if all the screws in the steps above have
been removed.

4. Then slide in the new unit and replace all the
screws removed in steps 1) and 2).
CAUTION: Do not operate the inverter unless
you have replaced the two screws that connect
the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC
bus. Otherwise, damage to the inverter may
occur.

Pull capacitor bank assembly outward
from SJ300 unit to remove

6–14

Maintenance and Inspection

Fan Assembly
Replacement

The SJ300 Series inverters have field-replaceable fan units. They include an internal connector
for easy removal and replacement. You will need to remove the front panel covers to remove
the fan assembly. First, be sure to remove power from the unit and wait at least 5 minutes
before accessing the wiring area.
1. Remove the digital operator from the front
Digital operator keypad removal
panel. Then remove the bottom front panel
to expose the wiring area as shown. This
will also expose the retention screws for the
top front panel. Remove these screws,
Upper panel
which will allow the front panel to hinge
retention screws
upward and unfasten from the unit.

2. After removing all front panel pieces, locate
the thumb latches in the top of the inverter
housing. Grasp and push the releases inward as
shown to the right, and gently pull upward to
remove the fan assembly.
CAUTION: Remove the fan assembly carefully,
since it is attached to the unit via connecting
wires.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

3. After unfastening the fan assembly, turn it over
to expose the connecting wires. Then locate the
PWB connector as shown. Disconnect the
wiring.
4. Connect the new fan assembly wiring. The
polarized plug will ensure a proper connection.
5. Snap the replacement fan into place.
6. Replace all front panel pieces and retention
screws.

PWB connector for fan assembly wiring

SJ300 Inverter

General Inverter
Electrical
Measurements
Parameter

The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parameters. The diagrams
on the next page show inverter-motor systems and the location of measurement points for these
parameters.
Circuit location
of measurement

Measuring
instrument

Notes

Reference Value

Supply voltage
E1

ER – across L1 and L2
ES – across L2 and L3
ET – across L3 and L1

Moving-coil type Fundamental
voltmeter or recti- wave effective
fier type voltmeter value

Supply current
I1

Ir – L1, Is – L2, It – L3

Moving-coil type
ammeter

Total effective
value

—

Electronic type
wattmeter

Total effective
value

—

Supply power W1 W11 – across L1 and L2
W12 – across L2 and L3
Supply power
factor Pf1

Commercial supply
voltage (200V class)
200-240V, 50/60 Hz
400V class 380460V, 50/60 Hz

—

W1
Pf 1 = ------------------------------ × 100%
3 × E1 × I1
Rectifier type
voltmeter

Total effective
value

—

Output current Io IU – U
IV – V
IW – W

Moving-coil type
ammeter

Total effective
value

—

Output power Wo W01 – across U and V
W02 – across V and W

Electronic type
wattmeter

Total effective
value

—

Output voltage
E0

Output power
factor Pfo

6–15

EU – across U and V
EV – across V and W
EW – across W and U

Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E, output
current I, and output power W.

—

W0
Pf 0 = ------------------------------ × 100%
3 × E0 × I0

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Note 1: Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage, and meters
indicating total effective values for current and power.
Note 2: The inverter output has a distorted waveform, and harmonic frequencies may cause
erroneous readings. However, the measuring instruments and methods listed above
provide reasonably accurate results.
Note 3: A general-purpose digital volt meter (DVM) is not usually suitable to measure a
distorted waveform (not pure sinusoid).

6–16

Maintenance and Inspection

The figure below shows measurement locations for voltage, current, and power measurements
listed in the table on the previous page. The voltage to be measured is the fundamental wave
effective voltage. The power to be measured is the total effective power.
Three-phase measurement diagram
Inverter

EU-V
S

EU-V
T

W01

W02

W01

W02
T3

Motor

EU-V

Inverter Output
Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and a safe
Voltage Measure- approach. You are working with high voltages and high-frequency switching waveforms that
ment Techniques are not pure sinusoids. Digital voltmeters will not usually produce reliable readings for these
waveforms. And, it is usually risky to connect high voltage signals to oscilloscopes. The
inverter output semiconductors have some leakage, and no-load measurements produce
misleading results. So, we highly recommend using the following circuits to measure voltage
for performing the equipment inspections.

Voltage measurement with load
L1/R
L2/S

Inverter

L3/T

Voltage measurement without load

U/T1

L1/R

V/T2

L2/S

W/T3

L3/T

U/T1
Inverter

V/T2
W/T3

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

5kΩ
30W

220kΩ
2W

V class
200V class
400V class

Diode bridge
600V 0.01A min.
1000V 0.1 A min.

–

Voltmeter
300V range
600V range

V class
200V class
400V class

–

Diode bridge
Voltmeter
600V 0.01A min. 300V range
1000V 0.1 A min. 600V range

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with
the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place the measurement circuitry above in an
insulated housing before using them.

SJ300 Inverter

6–17

IGBT Test Method The following procedure will check the inverter transistors (IGBTs) and diodes:
1. Disconnect input power to terminals [R, S, and T] and motor terminals [U, V, and W].
2. Disconnect any wires from terminals [P] and [RB] for regenerative braking.
3. Use a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) and set it for 1 ohm resistance range. You can check the
status of the charging state of terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, RB, P, and N] of the inverter and
the probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state.
Almost infinite ohms = “non-conducting,” and 0 to 10 ohms = “conducting.”
NOTE: The resistance values for the diodes or the transistors will not be exactly the same, but
they will be close. If you find a significance difference, a problem may exist.
NOTE: Before measuring the voltage between [P] and [N] with the DC current range, confirm
that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully, then execute the tests.

DVM Probe
Circuit Type
PD

P RB

Converter
D1 D2

Inverter
D3

TR1

TR2

TR3

U
+

Measured Value

Converter
D4

W
D5

D4 D5

TR7

TR4

TR5

TR6
TR1

N
TR2

Inverter
TR4

TR5

TR6

TR7

Dynamic
Braking
(0.4kW–11kW)

–

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conduct

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Conducting

Non-conducting

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

TR3

6–18

Warranty

Warranty Terms
The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions shall be two (2)
years from the date of manufacture (“DATE” on product nameplate), or one (1) year
from the date of installation, whichever occurs first. The warranty shall cover the repair
or replacement, at Hitachi's sole discretion, of ONLY the inverter that was installed.
1. Service in the following cases, even within the warranty period, shall be charged to
the purchaser:
a. Malfunction or damage caused by mis-operation or modification or improper
repair
b. Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transportation
c. Malfunction or damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood, lightning, abnormal
input voltage, contamination, or other natural disasters
2. When service is required for the product at your work site, all expenses associated
with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

3. Always keep this manual handy; please do not lose it. Please contact your Hitachi
distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals.

Glossary and
Bibliography
In This Appendix....

A
page

— Glossary............................................................................................ 2
— Bibliography ...................................................................................... 6

A–2

Glossary

Appendix A

Glossary
Ambient
Temperature

The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic unit. A unit’s heat sinks
rely on a lower ambient temperature in order to dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics.

Arrival Frequency The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the inverter for the constant speed
setting. The arrival frequency feature turns ON an output when the inverter reaches the set
constant speed. The inverter has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched logic options.

Auto-tuning

The ability of a controller to execute a procedure that interacts with a load to determine the
proper coefficients to use in the control algorithm. Auto-tuning is a common feature of process
controllers with PID loops. Hitachi inverters feature auto-tuning to determine motor parameters
for optimal commutation. Auto-tuning is available as a special command from a digital
operator panel. See also digital operator panel.

Base Frequency

The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is designed to operate. Most
motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value. The Hitachi inverters have a programmable base
frequency, so you must ensure that parameter matches the attached motor. The term base
frequency helps differentiate it from the carrier frequency. See also carrier frequency and
frequency setting.

Braking Resistor An energy-absorbing resistor that dissipates energy from a decelerating load. Load inertia
causes the motor to act as a generator during deceleration. See also four-quadrant operation
and dynamic braking.

Break-away
Torque

The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a load in order to start the
load moving.

Carrier
Frequency

The frequency of the constant, periodic, switching waveform that the inverter modulates to
generate the AC output to the motor. See also PWM.

A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic products in Europe. Drive
installations designed to have CE approval must have particular filter(s) installed in the application.

Choke

An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a “choke,” since it attenuates
(chokes) frequencies above a particular threshold. Tuning is often accomplished by using a
movable magnetic core. In variable-frequency drive systems, a choke positioned around highcurrent wiring can help attenuate harmful harmonics and protect equipment. See also harmonics.

DC Braking

The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the motor, and sends a DC
current through the motor windings in order to stop the motor. Also called “DC injection
braking,” it has little effect at high speed, and is used as the motor is nearing a stop.

DC Link

The portion of the variable frequency drive between the input rectifiers and the output stages. It
delivers smoothed DC power to the control and output stages of the drive.

Deadband

In a control system, the range of input change for which there is no perceptible change in the
output. In PID loops, the error term may have a deadband associated with it. Deadband may or
may not be desirable; it depends on the needs of the application.

Digital Operator
Panel

For Hitachi inverters, “digital operator panel” (DOP) refers first to the operator keypad on the
front panel of the inverter. It also includes hand-held remote keypads, which connect to the
inverter via a cable. Finally, the DOP Professional is a PC-based software simulation of the
keypad devices.

SJ300 Inverter

A–3

A semiconductor device that has a voltage-current characteristic that allows current to flow
only in one direction, with negligible leakage current in the reverse direction. See also rectifier.

Duty Cycle

1. The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON (high) versus OFF (low). 2. The
ratio of operating time of a motor, braking resistor, etc. to its resting time. This parameter
usually is specified in association with the allowable thermal rise for the device.

Dynamic Braking The inverter dynamic braking feature shunts the motor-generated EMF energy into a special
braking resistor. The added dissipation (braking torque) is effective at higher speeds, having a
reduced effect as the motor nears a stop.

Error

In process control, the error is the difference between the desired value or setpoint (SP) and the
actual value of a the process variable (PV). See also process variable and PID Loop.

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference - In motor/drive systems, the switching of high currents and
voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated electrical noise that may interfere with
the operation of nearby sensitive electrical instruments or devices. Certain aspects of an installation, such as long motor lead wire lengths, tend to increase the chance of EMI. Hitachi
provides accessory filter components you can install to decrease the level of EMI.

Four-quadrant
operation

Referring to a graph of torque versus speed, a four-quadrant drive can turn the motor either
forward or reverse, as well as decelerate in either direction (see also reverse torque). A load that
has a relatively high inertia and must move in both directions and change directions rapidly
requires four-quadrant capability from its drive.

Free-run Stop

A method of stopping a motor, caused when the inverter simply turns OFF its motor output
connections. This may allow the motor and load to coast to a stop, or a mechanical brake may
intervene and shorten the deceleration time.

Frequency
Setting

While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics, it typically refers to motor speed for
variable-frequency drives (inverters). This is because the output frequency of the inverter is
variable, and is proportional to the attained motor speed. For example, a motor with a base
frequency of 60 Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter output varying form 0 to 60 Hz.
See also base frequency, carrier frequency, and slip.

Harmonics

A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental frequency. The square waves
used in inverters produce high-frequency harmonics, even though the main goal is to produce
lower-frequency sine waves. These harmonics can be harmful to electronics (including motor
windings) and cause radiated energy that interferes with nearby electronic devices. Chokes, line
reactors, and filters are sometimes used to suppress the transmission of harmonics in an electrical system. See also choke.

Horsepower

A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per unit of time. You can
directly convert between horsepower and Watts as measurements of power.

IGBT

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) - A semiconductor transistor capable of conducting very large currents when in saturation and capable of withstanding very high voltages when
it is OFF. This high-power bipolar transistor is the type used in Hitachi inverters.

Inertia

The natural resistance of an object to being accelerated or decelerated by an external force. See
also momentum.

Intelligent
Terminal

A configurable input or output logic function on the Hitachi inverters. Each terminal may be
assigned one of several functions.

Inverter

A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through a alternating process of switching the input to the output, inverted and non-inverted. A variable speed drive such as the Hitachi
SJ300 is also called an inverter, since it contains three inverter circuits to generate 3-phase
output to the motor.

Appendix A

Diode

Appendix A

A–4

Glossary

Isolation
Transformer

A transformer with 1:1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation between its primary and
secondary windings. These are typically used on the power input side of the device to be
protected. An isolation transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault or other
malfunction of nearby equipment, as well as attenuate harmful harmonics and transients on the
input power.

Jogging
Operation

Usually done manually, a jog command from an operator’s panel requests the motor/drive
system to run indefinitely in a particular direction, until the machine operator ends the jog
operation.

Jump Frequency

A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range that you want the inverter to
skip around. This feature may be used to avoid a resonant frequency, and you can program up
to three jump frequencies in the inverter.

Line Reactor

A three-phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of an inverter to minimize
harmonics and to limit short-circuit current.

Momentum

The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to continue to remain in motion. In the
case of motors, the rotor and attached load are rotating and possess angular momentum.

Multi-speed
Operation

The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for the motor, and control
motor speed according to the currently selected speed preset. The Hitachi inverters have 16
preset speeds.

Motor Load

In motor terminology, motor load consists of the inertia of the physical mass that is moved by
the motor and the related friction from guiding mechanisms. See also inertia.

NEC

The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs electrical power and device
wiring and installation in the United States.

NEMA

The National Electric Manufacturer’s Association. NEMA Codes are a published series of
device ratings standards. Industry uses these to evaluate or compare the performance of devices
made by various manufacturers to a known standard.

Open-collector
Outputs

A common logic-type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor that acts as a switch to a
power supply common, usually ground. The transistor’s collector is open for external connection (not connected internally). Thus, the output sinks external load current to ground.

Orientation

When using the expansion card SJ-FB with encoder feedback, the orientation feature is available. Also called home search in motion terminology, you can specify a search direction and a
stop position. Typically the orientation procedure is necessary after each inverter powerup.

Power Factor

A ratio that expresses a phase difference (timing offset) between current and voltage supplied
by a power source to a load. A perfect power factor = 1.0 (no phase offset). Power factors less
than one cause some energy loss in power transmission wiring (source to load).

PID Loop

Proportional-Integral-Derivative – a mathematical model used for process control. A process
controller maintains a process variable (PV) at a setpoint (SP) by using its PID algorithm to
compensate for dynamic conditions and varies its output to drive the PV toward the desired
value. See also error.

Process Variable

A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects the quality of the primary
task accomplished by the process. For an industrial oven, temperature is the process variable.
See also PID Loop and error.

PWM

Pulse-width modulation: A type of AC adjustable frequency drive that accomplishes frequency
and voltage control at the output section (inverter) of the drive. The drive output voltage
waveform is at a constant amplitude, and by “chopping” the waveform (pulse-width-modulating), the average voltage is controlled. The chopping frequency is sometimes called the carrier
frequency.

SJ300 Inverter

A–5

The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components. The resistive part is constant,
while the reactive part changes with applied frequency. These devices have a complex impedance (complex number), where the resistance is the real part and the reactance is the imaginary
part.

Rectifier

An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC power into DC power.
Rectifiers are usually used in combination with capacitors to filter (smooth) the rectified
waveform to closely approximate a pure DC voltage source.

Regenerative
Braking

A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor, an inverter will switch internally to
allow the motor to become a generator and will either store the energy internally, deliver the
braking energy back to the main power input, or dissipate it with a resistor.

Regulation

The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at a desired value. Usually
expressed as a percent (+/-) from the nominal, motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed.

Reverse Torque

The torque applied in the direction opposite to motor shaft rotation. As such, reverse torque is a
decelerating force on the motor and its external load.

Rotor

The windings of a motor that rotate, being physically coupled to the motor shaft. See also
stator.

Saturation
Voltage

For a transistor semiconductor device, it is in saturation when an increase in input current no
longer results in an increase in the output current. The saturation voltage is the voltage drop
across the device. The ideal saturation voltage is zero.

Sensorless
Vector Control

A technique used in variable-frequency drives to rotate the force vector in the motor without the
use of a shaft position sensor (angular). Benefits include an increase in torque at the lowest
speed and the cost savings from the lack of a shaft position sensor.

Setpoint (SP)

The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest. See also Process Variable
(PV) and PID Loop.

Single-phase
Power

An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires. An Earth Ground connection usually
accompanies them. In theory, the voltage potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground,
while Hot varies sinusoidally above and below Neutral. This power source is named Single
Phase to differentiate it from three-phase power sources. Some Hitachi inverters can accept
single phase input power, but they all output three-phase power to the motor. See also threephase.

Slip

The difference between the theoretical (synchronous) speed of a motor at no load (determined
by its inverter output waveforms) and the actual speed. Some slip is essential in order to
develop torque to the load, but too much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and/or
cause the motor to stall.

Squirrel Cage

A “nick-name” for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for an AC induction motor.

Stator

The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the power input of the motor. See
also rotor.

Start Frequency

The output frequency that the inverter first produces as the frequency command setting
increases from zero. The start frequency is programmable, and is important to set properly for
the load, etc.

Tachometer

1. A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the purpose of providing feedback
to the speed controlling device of the motor. 2. A speed-monitoring test meter that may
optically sense shaft rotation speed and display it on a readout.

Appendix A

Reactance

Appendix A

A–6

Bibliography

Thermal Switch

An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow when the temperature at the
device reaches a specific temperature threshold. Thermal switches are sometimes installed in
the motor in order to protect the windings from heat damage. The inverter can use thermal
switch signals to trip (shut down) if the motor overheats. See also trip.

Thermistor

A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according to its temperature. The
sensing range of thermistors and their ruggedness make them ideal for motor overheating
detection. Hitachi inverters have built-in thermistor input circuits, which can detect an
overheated motor and shut OFF (trip) the inverter output.

Three-phase
Power

An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase offsets of 120 degrees is a 3phase power source. Usually, Neutral and Earth Ground wires accompany the three Hot
connections. Loads may be configured in a delta or Y configuration. A Y-connected load such
as an AC induction motor will be a balanced load; the currents in all the Hot connections are the
same. Therefore, the Neutral connection is theoretically zero. This is why inverters that
generate 3-phase power for motors do not generally have a Neutral connection to the motor.
However, the Earth Ground connection is important for safety reasons, and is provided.

Torque

A measure of rotational force. The units of measurement are the product of the distance (radius
from shaft center axis) and force (weight) applied at that distance. Units are usually given as
pound-feet, ounce-inches, or Newton-meters.

Transistor

A solid state, three-terminal device that provides amplification of signals and can be used for
switching and control. While transistors have a linear operating range, inverters use them as
high-powered switches. Recent developments in power semiconductors have produced transistors capable of handling high voltages and currents, all with high reliability. The saturation
voltage has been decreasing, resulting in less heat dissipation. Hitachi inverters use state-ofthe-art semiconductors to provide high performance and reliability in a compact package. See
also IGBT and saturation voltage.

Trip

An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a “trip” event (as in tripping a
circuit breaker). The inverter keeps a history log of trip events. They also require an action to
clear.

Watt Loss

A measure of the internal power loss of a component, the difference between the power it
consumes and what its output delivers. An inverter’s watt loss is the input power minus the
power delivered to the motor. The watt loss is typically highest when an inverter is delivering
its maximum output. Therefore, watt loss is usually specified for a particular output level.
Inverter watt loss specifications are important when designing enclosures.

Bibliography
Title

Author and Publisher

Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals, 2nd Ed.

Phipps, Clarence A.
The Fairmont Press, Inc. / Prentice-Hall, Inc. 1997
ISBN 0-13-636390-3

Electronic Variable Speed Drives

Brumbach, Michael E.
Delmar Publishers 1997
ISBN 0-8273-6937-9

Hitachi Inverter Technical Guide Book

Published by Hitachi, Ltd. Japan 1995
Publication SIG-E002

Serial
Communications
In This Appendix....

B
page

— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Communications Protocol ................................................................. 5
— Communications Reference Information ........................................ 17

B–2

Introduction

Appendix B

SJ300 inverters have a built-in RS485 serial communications interface. This serial communications function provides a way of controlling from 1 to 32 inverters on a common serial network.
In a typical application, a host computer or controller is the master and each of the inverter(s) is
a slave, as shown in the figure below.

SJ300

RS485 serial network

The specifications for SJ300 Series RS485 serial communications are in the following table:
Item

Specifications

User-selectable

Transmission speed

2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps

✔

Communication modes

Half duplex (one device transmits at a time)

✘

Synchronization

Direct current transmission

✘

Character code

ASCII codes

✘

LSB placement

Transmits LSB first

✘

Electrical interface

RS485 differential transceiver

✘

Data bits

7 or 8 bits

✔

Parity

None / even / odd

✔

Stop bits

1 or 2 bits

✔

Start convention

One-way start from host device command

✘

Wait time for response

10 to 1000 ms

✔

Connections

Station address numbers from 1 to 32

✔

Error check

Overrun / Fleming block check code / vertical
or horizontal parity

✘

SJ300 Inverter

B–3

Serial Connection The serial connector is to the left of the control logic connector as shown below:
Diagrams
Serial
Communications
Connector

Appendix B

SP SN RP SN
Termination resistor (–)
Termination resistor (+)
Send/receive (–) Negative
Send/receive (+) Positive

Each device requires just two connections for data transmission and reception. Additionally, the
device at each physical end of the wiring requires a termination resistor. The SJ300 has built-in
termination resistors that become part of the circuit when you add a jumper as shown.

SJ300

SP SN RP SN

SJ300

SP SN RP SN

Send/receive (–)
Send/receive (+)
Termination jumper

TIP: Each slave device on the serial network must have a unique node address, set by parameter C072. If this is a new application, we recommend connecting one new device at a time and
checking the communications after each addition.

B–4

Introduction

Serial Network
Parameter
Settings

Several parameter settings are necessary to configure serial communications, listed below.
Function
Code

Appendix B

C070

C071

Item

Data command source

Baud rate

Value
02

Digital operator

RS485 connector

Expansion card #1

Expansion card #2

Loop-back test

2400 bps

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

1 to 32,
FF
C072

Node address

C073

Data bits

C074

Parity

C075

Stop bits

C078

Wait time

Description

1 to 32 – Node or station address (unique
to each inverter or device)
FF – Automatic broadcast (to all nodes on
transmit, allowed only on certain
commands (refer to each command
description in this appendix)

7 bits

8 bits

none

Even parity

Odd parity

1 bit

2 bits

0 to 1000

0 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits
to respond to network master

For inverters on the same network, some settings must match from inverter to inverter. These
include:
• Baud rate
• Data bits
• Parity
• Stop bits
However, the node address on each inverter must be unique, used only once on the network.

SJ300 Inverter

B–5

Communications Protocol
Introduction to
Command List

The network master sends a frame to initiate
communications with a slave, as shown in the
figure to the right. After the set waiting time
Host
(per parameter C078, the inverter responds.
(master)

frame

wait
time
frame

The following table lists the commands, single-character codes sent to a particular device on
the network.
Command
Code

Description

User-selectable

Forward / Reverse / Stop command

✔

Setting of frequency in standard profile

✔

Setting of intelligent terminal state

✔

Read all monitor data (block read)

—

Read inverter status

—

Read trip history

—

Read a single parameter value

—

Write a single parameter value

✔

Set inverter parameters to default values

✔

Verifies that the requested setting can be
written to EEPROM.

—

Writes a parameter value to EEPROM

✔

Requests the recalculation of internal constant

✔

NOTE: Use of command 08 – set inverter parameters to default values first requires setting the
initialization mode parameter B084 to 01 (initializes parameters only) or 02 (initializes parameters and clears the trip history).

Appendix B

Inverter
(slave)

B–6

Communications Protocol

Command – 00

The 00 command controls the Forward, Reverse and Stop mode of the inverter. You must set
parameter A002=03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply.
The frame format of command 00 follows the Frame format
timing diagram and specification table.
STX Node

Appendix B

Element

Description

Command

Size

Data

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 00

Data

Transmission data

1 byte

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

00 = Stop command
01 = Forward command
02 = Reverse command

[CR] (0x0D)

The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to rotate the motor
in the forward direction.
(STX) | 01 | 00 | 1 | (BCC) | [CR]

Command – 01

to ASCII

02 | 30 31 | 30 30 | 31 | 33 30 | 0D

The 01 command sets the output frequency for the standard profile. You must set parameter
A002=03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply.
The frame format of command 01 follows the Frame format
timing diagram and specification table.
STX Node

Element

Description

Command

Size

Data

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 01

Data

Transmission data

6 bytes ASCII code for ten times the
frequency (accommodates two
decimal places)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the output
frequency for 5 Hz. We use a value of 500 in ASCII to represent 5.00 Hz.
(STX) | 01 | 01 | 000500 | (BCC) | [CR]
to ASCII

02 | 30 31 | 30 31 | 30 30 30 35 30 30 | 30 35 | 0D

SJ300 Inverter

Command – 02

B–7

The 02 command assigns the function of the intelligent input terminals.
The frame format of command 02 follows the Frame format
timing diagram and specification table.
STX Node

Element

Description

Command

Size
1 byte

Data

BCC [CR]

Value

Control code (STart of TeXt)

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes

01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes

Data

Transmission data

16 bytes

(see table below)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes

Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

The 16-byte data string is specified in the following table:
Data (Hex)

Description

Data (Hex)

Description

0000000000000001

[FW] Forward command

0000000001000000

0000000000000002

[RV] Reverse command

0000000002000000

—

0000000000000004

[CF1] Multi-speed 1

0000000004000000

[CAS] control gain switching function

0000000000000008

[CF2] Multi-speed 2

0000000008000000

[UP] remote control increment speed

0000000000000010

[CF3] Multi-speed 3

0000000010000000

[DWN] remote control decrement
speed

0000000000000020

[CF4] Multi-speed 4

0000000020000000

[UDC] remote control clear up/down

0000000000000040

[JG] Jog operation

0000000040000000

0000000000000080

[DB] Dynamic braking

0000000080000000

[OPE] Force from operator terminal

0000000000000100

[SET] set 2nd motor

0000000100000000

[SF1] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000000000200

[2CH] 2-stage adjustable speed

0000000200000000

[SF2] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000400000000

[SF3] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000800000000

[SF4] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000000000400
0000000000000800

—
[FRS] Free-run stop

[PIDC] PID integrator reset

—

0000000000001000

[EXP] External trip

0000001000000000

[SF5] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000000002000

[USP] Unattended start protection

0000002000000000

[SF6] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000000004000

[CS] Commercial power change

0000004000000000

[SF7] Multi-speed bit-level

0000000000008000

[SFT] Software lock

0000008000000000

[OLR] Overload restriction setting

0000000000010000

[AT] analog input voltage/current

0000010000000000

[TL] Torque limit

0000000000020000

[SET3] Set 3rd motor

0000020000000000

[TRQ1] Torque limit select 1

0000000000040000

[RS] Reset

0000040000000000

[TRQ2] Torque limit select 2

0000080000000000

[PPI P/PI] inverter mode select

0000000000080000

—

0000000000100000

[STA] 3-wire Start

0000100000000000

[BOK] Brake confirmation

0000000000200000

[ST]P 3-wire Hold

0000200000000000

[ORT] Orientation (home) command

0000000000400000

[F/R] 3-wire FWD/REV

0000400000000000

[LAC] Linear Accel/decel Cancel

0000000000800000

[PID] PID enable

0000800000000000

[PCLR] Position error clear

0001000000000000

[STAT] Pulse train input enable

—

Appendix B

STX

B–8

Communications Protocol

The arrangement of the terminal assignment data permits you to assign all inputs in a single
command. The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the
Forward command, Multi-speed 1 and Multi-speed 2.

Sum the three data strings:

0x0000000000000001
+ 0x0000000000000004
+ 0x0000000000000008
= 0x000000000000000D

Appendix B

(STX) | 01 | 02 | 0x000000000000000D | (BCC) | (CR)

to ASCII

02 | 30 31 | 30 31 | 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 68 | 30 35 | 0D

Command – 03

The 03 command reads the monitor data as a single block.
The frame format of command 03 follows the
diagram and specification table. The transmit
frame has no data field.

Element

Description

Transmit frame format
STX Node

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 03

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The receive frame has a 104-byte data field,
containing values for 13 items.

STX (0x02)

[CR] (0x0D)

Receive frame format
STX Node

Element

Description

Data

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Data

Transmission data

104
bytes

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

(see next table)

[CR] (0x0D)

SJ300 Inverter

B–9

The data in the receive frame contains 8-byte values for 13 items, listed in the table below:
No.

Monitor Item

Units

Multiplier

Output frequency

100

Output current

Direction of rotation

—

PID feedback monitor

100

Intelligent input monitor

—

Intelligent output monitor

—

Frequency converting monitor

—

100

Output torque monitor

Output voltage monitor

Electric power monitor

Reserved

—

Run Mode time monitor

hours

Power ON time monitor

hours

The eight bytes for intelligent input or intelligent output data have a bit set in the data field for
each I/O point that is ON, according to the following table:
Terminal
[FW]

Monitor Item

Data

Forward input

00000001

[1]

Input 1

00000002

[2]

Input 2

00000004

[3]

Input 3

00000008

[4]

Input 4

00000010

[5]

Input 5

00000020

[6]

Input 6

00000040

[7]

Input 7

00000080

[8]

Input 8

00000100

[AL]

Alarm relay

00000001

[11]

Output 1

00000002

[12]

Output 2

00000004

[13]

Output 3

00000008

[14]

Output 4

00000010

[15]

Output 5

00000020

Appendix B

B–10

Communications Protocol

Command – 04

The 04 command reads the status of the inverter.
The frame format of command 04 follows the
diagrams and specification tables. The transmit
frame has no data field.

Appendix B

Element

Transmit frame format
STX Node

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 04

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The receive frame has an 8-byte data field,
containing values for three trip items (plus a
reserved field).

Element

STX (0x02)

[CR] (0x0D)

Receive frame format
STX Node

Description

Data

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Data

Transmission data

8 bytes (see next table)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

Trip data is organized as shown. The
table below lists the codes and their
meanings.

Code
00

Status A Definition
Initial status

—

STX (0x02)

[CR] (0x0D)

Data field contents
Status A

Status B

Status B Definition

Status C

(reserved)

Status C Definition

On stopping

—

On running

Stop

On tripping

Deceleration speed

On Stopping

On running

—

Constant speed

On free-run stop

—

Acceleration speed

On jog

—

Forward

On dynamic braking

—

Reverse

On retry

—

Reverse from forward

On trip

—

Forward from reverse

On under-voltage

—

Forward start

—

Reverse start

—

SJ300 Inverter

Command – 05

The 05 command reads the inverter’s trip history.
The frame format of command 05 follows the
diagrams and specification tables. The transmit
frame has no data field.
Element

B–11

Transmit frame format
STX Node

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 05

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The receive frame has a 440-byte data field. This
consists of an 8-byte total accumulated number of
trip events, followed by six 72-byte strings for the
six most recent trip events as shown below.

STX (0x02)

Appendix B

STX

[CR] (0x0D)

Receive frame format
STX Node

Data

BCC [CR]

Data field contents
Total count

Trip 1

Element

Trip 2

Trip 4

Trip 3

Description

Trip 5

Size

Trip 6

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Data

Transmission data

440
bytes

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

(see next table)

[CR] (0x0D)

The nine bytes of data for each trip event history is listed below. The data contains the multiplier to adjust the decimal point. Divide the data by that factor to derive the actual value.
No.

Monitor Item

Units

Multiplier

Trip factor

—

Inverter Status A

—

Inverter Status B

—

Inverter Status C

—

Output frequency

Accumulated Run Mode time

hours

Output current

Output voltage

Power ON time

hours

B–12

Communications Protocol

For Command 05, bytes 2, 3, and 4 of
the event history are status codes A, B,
and C, respectively. The tables below
provide status code descriptions.

Code
00

Status A Definition
Initial status

Appendix B

Data field contents
byte 2

byte 3

byte 4

Status A

Status B

Status C

Status C Definition
On reset

—

On stopping

On Stopping

On deceleration

On running

Constant speed

On free-run stop

On acceleration

On jog

On 0 Hz running

On dynamic braking

On running

On retry

On dynamic braking

On trip

On overload restriction

On under-voltage

Bit

Status B Definition

—

Error
Code

Ground fault

E14

IGBT error, U phase

E30

Under-voltage error

E09

Over-voltage protection

E07

Thermal trip

E21

IGBT error, V phase

E30

IGBT error, W phase

E30

Gate array error

E23

SJ300 Inverter

Command – 06

The 06 command reads a single parameter
value from the inverter, which is specified by
the data field this read command.

Element

Transmit frame format
STX Node

Description

Command

Data

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 06

Data

Parameter specified to be read

4 bytes (see tables below)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

Element

STX (0x02)
Appendix B

STX

The receive frame includes an ACK
(acknowledge) character, followed by an
8-byte data field.

B–13

[CR] (0x0D)

Receive frame format
STX Node

Description

ACK

Data

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

ACK

Control code (ACKnowledge)

1 byte

Data

Parameter value

8 bytes Value of parameter times ten,
returned as ASCII char. code,
except for H003 and H203 (see
table below)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

ACK (0x06)

[CR] (0x0D)

Use the codes in the table below to return parameters for H03 and H203 (motor capacity selection).
Code Data

U.S. mode (B85=00, 02)

0.2 kW

EU mode (B85=01)

0.2 kW

0.37

0.4

Code Data

U.S. mode (B85=00, 02)

5.5 kW

7.5

EU mode (B85=01)

5.5 kW

7.5

0.75

1.5

2.,2

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

18.5

0.55 0.75

3.7
4.0

B–14

Communications Protocol

Command – 07

The 07 command sets a parameter value equal to the value specified in the transmission.The
frame format of command 07 follows the diagram and specification table.
Frame format
STX Node

Appendix B

Element

Command

Parameter

Description

Data

BCC [CR]

Size

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 07

Parameter

Function code of parameter

4 bytes F002..., A001..., B001..., C001...,
H003..., P001...

Data

Transmission data

8 bytes Value of parameter times ten as
ASCII char. code, except for
H003 and H203 (see table below)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

Note that the parameter F001, the output frequency, can be set more directly with host
command 01 instead of with this command. Use the codes in the following table for setting
parameters associated with H003 and H203.
Code Data

U.S. mode (B85=00, 02)

0.2 kW

EU mode (B85=01)

0.2 kW

0.37

Code Data

U.S. mode (B85=00, 02)

5.5 kW

7.5

EU mode (B85=01)

5.5 kW

7.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.,2

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

18.5

0.55 0.75

3.7
4.0

SJ300 Inverter

Command – 08

The 08 command initializes the inverter parameters to the factory default values. First, you
must set B84 (use command 07) to specify whether you want to clear the trip history at the
same time. Also, set B85 to specify the country code for the initialization (use command 07).
The frame format of command 08 follows the
diagram and specification table.

Frame format
STX Node

Element

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 08

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The 09 command verifies whether or not it is
possible to set a particular parameter in the
EEPROM. The frame format of command 08
follows the diagram and specification table.
Element

STX (0x02)

[CR] (0x0D)

Transmit frame format
STX Node

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 09

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The receive frame includes an ACK
(acknowledge) character, followed by a
2-byte data field with the result.

Element

STX (0x02)

[CR] (0x0D)

Receive frame format
STX Node

Description

ACK

Data

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

ACK

Control code (ACKnowledge)

1 byte

Data

Parameter value

2 bytes 00 = setting not allowed,
01 = setting is allowed

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

ACK (0x06)

[CR] (0x0D)

Appendix B

Command – 09

B–15

B–16

Communications Protocol

Command – 0A

The 0A command sets a value in the EEPROM.
The frame format of command 0A follows the
diagram and specification table.

Frame format
STX Node

Appendix B

Element

Command – 0B

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 0A

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

The 0B command recalculates the inverter’s internal motor constants. Use this function after
the base frequency or any Hxxx parameters are changed via the serial link commands.
The frame format of command 0B follows the
diagram and specification table.

Frame format
STX Node

Element

Description

Command

Size

BCC [CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Command

Transmission command

2 bytes 0B

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

B–17

SJ300 Inverter

Communications Reference Information
Inverter
The standard affirmative reply from the inverter
Affirmative Reply uses the ACK character (acknowledge) in the data

Frame format

field. The frame format of this reply follows the
diagram and specification table.

Element

ACK

Size

BCC [CR]

Value
Appendix B

Inverter
Negative Reply

Description

STX Node

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

ACK

Control code (ACKnowledge)

1 byte

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node and ACK

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

The standard negative reply from the inverter
uses the NAK character (negative acknowledge) in the data field. The frame format of
this reply follows the diagram and specification table.
Element

Description

STX (0x02)

ACK (0x06)

[CR] (0x0D)

Frame format
STX Node NAK

Error
code

Size

BCC

[CR]

Value

STX

Control code (STart of TeXt)

1 byte

STX (0x02)

Node

Node (station) address of inverter

2 bytes 01 to 32

Data

Error code – reason for negative
acknowledge

2 bytes (see error codes in next table)

NAK

Control code
(Negative ACKnowledge)

1 byte

NAK (0x15)

Error code

Code representing error type

1 byte

(See next table below)

BCC

Block check sum code

2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node, Data,
and NAK

[CR]

Control code (carriage return)

1 byte

[CR] (0x0D)

The error codes for a NAK (negative acknowledge) are:
Error
Code

Error Description

Error
Code

Error Description

01H

Parity error

07H

Receive buffer overrun error

02H

Check sum error

08H

Receive time-out error

03H

Framing error

11H

Abnormal command code error

04H

Overrun error

13H

Test error code

05H

Protocol error

16H

Abnormal parameter code/value
error

06H

ASCII code error

—

B–18

Communications Reference Information

Block Check
Code (BCC)

This section shows how the inverter protocol computes defines a BCC—block check code. The
BCC is calculated for each frame transmitted and can be used to verify the integrity of data
transmission. The example below shows command 01 setting the inverter frequency to 5Hz.
Frame format
STX Node

Command

Data

BCC [CR]
ASCII Code

Appendix B

(0x 02)
01

(0x 30 31)

000500

(0x 30 30 30 35 30 30)

(0x 30 35)
(0x 0D)

The block check code is computed by using the ASCII codes (shown above) and applying
eXclusive OR (XOR) operations. Beginning with the first pair of bytes, the result of their XOR
result is then used in an XOR operation with the third byte, and so on. For this example, the
BCC calculation is shown below.
Data bytes:
30

01
31
XOR
intermediate results

00
30
00
30
05
35

BCC

ASCII Code Table The table below shows only the ASCII codes used for function codes and parameter data.
Character

ASCII Code

Character

ASCII Code

Character

ASCII Code

STX

ACK

NAK

—

SJ300 Inverter

Communication
Test Mode

B–19

The communication test mode verifies that the inverter can properly send and receive data via
the RS485 serial port. Follow the steps below to perform the communication test.
1. Remove the serial cable (if present) connected to the TM2 connector block of the control
terminals, as shown below.

TM2

Appendix B

SP SN RP SN

Serial
communications

NOTE: It is not necessary to connect a loopback jumper. The RS485 port uses a transceiver for
communications, which already allows simultaneous transmitting and receiving.
2. Use the front panel keypad to navigate to parameter C071, Communication Speed
Selection. Change parameter C071=02 and press Store. Value 02 is the Test option. Now the
inverter is ready to conduct the loopback test.
3. Turn the inverter power OFF and then ON again. Observe the keypad display and compare
to the results shown below.
PASS

FAIL

4. Press the Stop/Rest button on the keypad to return the inverter keypad/ display to normal
operation.
5. Change C071 to its original setting (default is C071=04). Otherwise, while C071=02, the
inverter will perform the communications loopback test at each powerup.

Drive Parameter
Settings Tables
In This Appendix....

C
page

— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry ............................................... 2

C–2

Introduction

Introduction
This appendix lists the user-programmable parameters for the SJ300 series inverters and the
default values for European, U.S. and Japanese product types. The right-most column of the
tables is blank so you can record values you have changed from the default. This involves just a
few parameters for most applications.

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
SJ300 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be configured by the
user. We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited, in order to help in
troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data.

Appendix C

Inverter model

}

SJ300

MFG. No.

This information is printed on
the specification label located
on the right side of the inverter.

Main Profile
Parameters
“F” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

F001

Output frequency setting

0.00

F002

Acceleration (1) time setting

30.0

F202

Acceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor

30.0

F302

Acceleration (1) time setting, 3rd
motor

30.0

F003

Deceleration (1) time setting

30.0

F203

Deceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor

30.0

F303

Deceleration (1) time setting, 3rd
motor

30.0

F004

Keypad Run key routing

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

C–3

Standard
Functions
“A” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Frequency source setting

A002

Run command source setting

A003

Base frequency setting

50.

60.

A203

Base frequency setting, 2nd motor

50.

60.

A303

Base frequency setting, 3rd motor

50.

60.

A004

Maximum frequency setting

50.

60.

A204

Maximum frequency setting, 2nd
motor

50.

60.

A304

Maximum frequency setting, 3rd
motor

50.

60.

A005

[AT] selection

A006

[O2] selection

A011

[O]–[L] input active range start
frequency

0.00

A012

[O]–[L] input active range end
frequency

0.00

A013

[O]–[L] input active range start
voltage

A014

[O]–[L] input active range end
voltage

100.

A015

[O]–[L] input start frequency enable

A016

External frequency filter time const.

A019

Multi-speed operation selection

A020

Multi-speed frequency setting

0.00

A220

Multi-speed frequency setting, 2nd
motor

0.00

A320

Multi-speed frequency setting, 3rd
motor

0.00

A021

Multi-speed 1 setting

0.00

A022

Multi-speed 2 setting

0.00

A023

Multi-speed 3 setting

0.00

A024

Multi-speed 4 setting

0.00

A025

Multi-speed 5 setting

0.00

A026

Multi-speed 6 setting

0.00

A027

Multi-speed 7 setting

0.00

Appendix C

A001

User
Setting

C–4

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“A” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

A028

Multi-speed 8 setting

0.00

A029

Multi-speed 9 setting

0.00

A030

Multi-speed 10 setting

0.00

A031

Multi-speed 11 setting

0.00

A032

Multi-speed 12 setting

0.00

A033

Multi-speed 13 setting

0.00

A034

Multi-speed 14 setting

0.00

A035

Multi-speed 15 setting

0.00

A038

Jog frequency setting

1.00

A039

Jog stop mode

A041

Torque boost method selection

000

A241

Torque boost method selection, 2nd
motor

A042

Manual torque boost value

1.0

A242

Manual torque boost value, 2nd
motor

1.0

A342

Manual torque boost value, 3rd
motor

1.0

A43

Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment

5.0

A243

Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment, 2nd motor

5.0

A343

Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment, 3rd motor

5.0

A44

V/F characteristic curve selection,
1st motor

A244

V/F characteristic curve selection,
2nd motor

A344

V/F characteristic curve selection,
3rd motor

A045

V/f gain setting

100.

A051

DC braking enable

A052

DC braking frequency setting

0.50

A053

DC braking wait time

0.0

A054

DC braking force during
deceleration

A055

DC braking time for deceleration

0.0

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

“A” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

C–5

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

A056

DC braking / edge or level detection
for [DB] input

A057

DC braking force for starting

A058

DC braking time for starting

0.0

A059

DC braking carrier frequency setting

5.0

A061

Frequency upper limit setting

0.00

A0261

Frequency upper limit setting, 2nd
motor

0.00

A062

Frequency lower limit setting

0.00

A0262

Frequency lower limit setting, 2nd
motor

0.00

A063,
A065,
A067

Jump (center) frequency setting

0.00

A064,
A066,
A068

Jump (hysteresis) frequency width
setting

0.50

A069

Acceleration stop frequency setting

0.00

A070

Acceleration stop time frequency
setting

0.0

A071

PID Function Enable

A072

PID proportional gain

1.0

A073

PID integral time constant

1.0

A074

PID derivative gain

0.0

A075

PV scale conversion

1.00

A076

PV source setting

A081

AVR function select

A082

AVR voltage select

230/400

230/460

200/400

A085

Operation mode
selection

A086

Energy saving mode tuning

50.0

A092

Acceleration (2) time setting

15.0

A292

Acceleration (2) time setting, 2nd
motor

15.0

A392

Acceleration (2) time setting, 3rd
motor

15.0

A093

Deceleration (2) time setting

15.0

Appendix C

Name

User
Setting

C–6

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“A” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

A293

Deceleration (2) time setting, 2nd
motor

15.0

A393

Deceleration (2) time setting, 3rd
motor

15.0

A094

Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2 profile

A294

Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2, 2nd motor

A095

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point

0.0

A295

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point, 2nd motor

0.0

A096

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition
point

0.0

A296

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition
point, 2nd motor

0.0

A097

Acceleration curve selection

A098

Deceleration curve setting

A101

[OI]–[L] input active range start
frequency

0.00

A102

[OI]–[L] input active range end
frequency

0.00

A103

[OI]–[L] input active range start
current

20.

A104

[OI]–[L] input active range end
current

100.

A105

[OI]–[L] input start frequency
enable

A111

[O2]–[L] input active range start
frequency

0.00

A112

[O2]–[L] input active range end
frequency

0.00

A113

[O2]–[L] input active range start
voltage

–100.

A114

[O2]–[L] input active range end
voltage

100.

A131

Acceleration curve constants setting

A132

Deceleration curve constants setting

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

C–7

Fine Tuning
Functions
“B” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Selection of restart mode

B002

Allowable under-voltage power
failure time

1.0

B003

Retry wait time before motor restart

1.0

B004

Instantaneous power failure / undervoltage trip alarm enable

B005

Number of restarts on power failure /
under-voltage trip events

B006

Phase loss detection enable

B007

Restart frequency threshold

0.00

B012

Electronic thermal setting (calculated within the inverter from current
output)

Rated current
for each
inverter

B212

Electronic thermal setting (calculated within the inverter from current
output), 2nd motor

Rated current
for each
inverter

B312

Electronic thermal setting (calculated within the inverter from current
output), 3rd motor

Rated current
for each
inverter

B013

Electronic thermal characteristic

B213

Electronic thermal characteristic,
2nd motor

B313

Electronic thermal characteristic,
3rd motor

B015

Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (1)

B016

Free setting, electronic thermal
current (1)

0.0

B017

Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (2)

B018

Free setting, electronic thermal
current (2)

0.0

B019

Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (3)

B020

Free setting, electronic thermal
current (3)

0.0

B021

Overload restriction operation mode

B022

Overload restriction setting

Rated current x
1.50

Appendix C

B001

User
Setting

C–8

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“B” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Default Setting

Name

-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

B023

Deceleration rate at overload restriction

1.0

B024

Overload restriction operation mode
(2)

B025

Overload restriction setting (2)

Rated current x
1.50

B026

Deceleration rate at overload
restriction (2)

1.00

B031

Software lock mode selection

B034

Run/power-on warning time

B035

Rotational direction restriction

B036

Reduced voltage start selection

B037

Function code display restriction

B040

Torque limit selection

B041

Torque limit (1) (forward-driving in
4-quadrant mode)

150.

B042

Torque limit (2) (reverse-regenerating in 4-quadrant mode)

150.

B043

Torque limit (3) (reverse-driving in
4-quadrant mode)

150.

B044

Torque limit (4) (forward-regenerating in 4-quadrant mode)

150.

B045

Torque limit LADSTOP enable

B046

Reverse Run protection enable

B050

Controller deceleration and stop on
power loss

B051

DC bus voltage trigger level during
power loss

0.0

B052

Over-voltage threshold during power
loss

0.0

B053

Deceleration time setting during
power loss

1.00

B054

Initial output frequency decrease
during power loss

0.00

B080

[AM] terminal analog meter adjustment

180

B081

[FM] terminal analog meter adjustment

B082

Start frequency adjustment

0.50

B083

Carrier frequency setting

5.0

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

“B” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

C–9

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Initialization mode (parameters or
trip history)

B085

Country code for initialization

B086

Frequency scaling conversion factor

1.0

B087

STOP key enable

B088

Restart mode after FRS

B090

Dynamic braking usage ratio

0.0

B091

Stop mode selection

B092

Cooling fan control

B095

Dynamic braking control

B096

Dynamic braking activation level

360/720

B098

Thermistor for thermal protection
control

B099

Thermal protection level setting

3000.

B100

Free-setting V/f frequency (1)

B101

Free-setting V/f voltage (1)

0.0

B102

Free-setting V/f frequency (2)

B103

Free-setting V/f voltage (2)

0.0

B104

Free-setting V/f frequency (3)

B105

Free-setting V/f voltage (3)

0.0

B106

Free-setting V/f frequency (4)

B107

Free-setting V/f voltage (4)

0.0

B108

Free-setting V/f frequency (5)

B109

Free-setting V/f voltage (5)

0.0

B110

Free-setting V/f frequency (6)

B111

Free-setting V/f voltage (6)

0.0

B112

Free-setting V/f frequency (7)

B113

Free-setting V/f voltage (7)

0.0

B120

Brake Control Enable

B121

Brake Wait Time for Release

0.00

B122

Brake Wait Time for Acceleration

0.00

B123

Brake Wait Time for Stopping

0.00

B124

Brake Wait Time for Confirmation

0.00

B125

Brake Release Frequency Setting

0.00

Appendix C

B084

User
Setting

C–10

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“B” Group Parameters
Func.
Code
B126

Name
Brake Release Current Setting

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Rated current
for each
inverter

User
Setting

Intelligent
Terminal
Functions
“C” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

C001

Terminal [1] function

C002

Terminal [2] function

C003

Terminal [3] function

C004

Terminal [4] function

C005

Terminal [5] function

C006

Terminal [6] function

C007

Terminal [7] function

C008

Terminal [8] function

C011

Terminal [1] active state

C012

Terminal [2] active state

C013

Terminal [3] active state

C014

Terminal [4] active state

C015

Terminal [5] active state

C016

Terminal [6] active state

C017

Terminal (7) active state

C018

Terminal [8] active state

C019

Terminal [FW] active state

C021

Terminal [11] function

C022

Terminal [12] function

C023

Terminal [13] function

C024

Terminal [14] function

C025

Terminal [15] function

C026

Alarm relay terminal function

C027

[FM] signal selection

C028

[AM] signal selection

C029

[AMI] signal selection

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

“C” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

C–11

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Terminal [11] active state

C032

Terminal [12] active state

C033

Terminal [13] active state

C034

Terminal [14] active state

C035

Terminal [15] active state

C036

Alarm relay active state

C040

Overload signal output mode

C041

Overload level setting

Rated current
for each
inverter

C042

Frequency arrival setting for accel.

0.00

C043

Arrival frequency setting for decel.

0.00

C044

PID deviation level setting

3.0

C045

Frequency arrival setting for
acceleration (2)

0.00

C046

Frequency arrival setting for
deceleration (2)

0.00

C055

Over-torque (forward-driving) level
setting

100.

C056

Over-torque (reverse regenerating)
level setting

100.

C057

Over-torque (reverse driving) level
setting

100.

C058

Over-torque (forward regenerating)
level setting

100.

C061

Electronic thermal warning level
setting

80.

C062

Alarm code output

C063

Zero speed detection level

0.00

C070

Data command method

C071

Communication speed selection

C072

Node allocation

C073

Communication data length selection

C074

Communication parity selection

C075

Communication stop bit selection

C078

Communication wait time

C081

[O] input span calibration

Factory set

Appendix C

C031

User
Setting

C–12

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“C” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

C082

[OI] input span calibration

Factory set

C083

[O2] input span calibration

Factory set

C085

Thermistor input tuning

105.0

C086

[AM] terminal offset tuning

0.0

C087

[AMI] terminal meter tuning

80.

C088

[AMI] terminal offset tuning

Factory set

C091

Debug mode enable

C101

Up/Down memory mode selection

C102

Reset mode selection

C103

Restart mode after reset

C111

Overload setting (2)

Rated current
for each
inverter model

C121

[O] input zero calibration

Factory set

C122

[OI] input zero calibration

Factory set

C123

[O2] input zero calibration

Factory set

User
Setting

Do not
edit

SJ300 Inverter

C–13

Motor Constants
Functions
“H” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

Auto-tuning Setting

H002

Motor data selection, 1st motor

H202

Motor data selection, 2nd motor

H003

Motor capacity, 1st motor

Factory set

H203

Motor capacity, 2nd setting

Factory set

H004

Motor poles setting, 1st motor

H204

Motor poles setting, 2nd motor

H005

Motor speed constant, 1st motor

1.590

H205

Motor speed constant, 2nd motor

1.590

H006

Motor stabilization constant, 1st
motor

100.

H206

Motor stabilization constant, 2nd
motor

100.

H306

Motor stabilization constant, 3rd
motor

100.

H20

Motor constant R1, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H220

Motor constant R1, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H021

Motor constant R2, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H221

Motor constant R2, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H022

Motor constant L, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H222

Motor constant L, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H023

Motor constant Io

According to
inverter rating

H223

Motor constant Io, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H024

Motor Constant J

According to
inverter rating

H224

Motor constant J, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H030

Auto constant R1, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H230

Auto constant R1, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

Appendix C

H001

User
Setting

C–14

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“H” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

H031

Auto constant R2, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H231

Auto constant R2, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H032

Auto constant L, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H232

Auto constant L, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H033

Auto constant Io, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H233

Auto constant Io, 2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H034

Auto constant J, 1st motor

According to
inverter rating

H234

Auto constant J,
2nd motor

According to
inverter rating

H050

PI proportional gain for 1st motor

100.0

H250

PI proportional gain for 2nd motor

100.0

H051

PI integral gain for 1st motor

100.0

H251

PI integral gain for 2nd motor

100.0

H052

P proportional gain setting for 1st
motor

1.00

H252

P proportional gain setting for 2nd
motor

1.00

H060

Zero LV limit for 1st motor

100.

H260

Zero LV limit for 2nd motor

100.

H070

Terminal selection PI proportional
gain setting

100.0

H071

Terminal selection PI integral gain
setting

100.0

H072

Terminal selection P proportional
gain setting

1.00

User
Setting

SJ300 Inverter

C–15

Expansion Card
Functions
“P” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

P001

Operation mode on expansion card 1
error

P002

Operation mode on expansion card 2
error

P010

Feedback option enable

P011

Encoder pulse-per-revolution (PPR)
setting

1024

P012

Control pulse setting

P013

Pulse line mode setting

P014

Home search stop position setting

P015

Home search speed setting

5.00

P016

Home search direction setting

P017

Home search completion range
setting

P018

Home search completion delay time
setting

0.00

P019

Electronic gear set position selection

P020

Electronic gear ratio numerator
setting

P021

Electronic gear ratio denominator
setting

P022

Feed-forward gain setting

0.00

P023

Position loop gain setting

0.50

P025

Temperature compensation
thermistor enable

P026

Over-speed error detection level
setting

135.0

P027

Speed deviation error detection level
setting

7.50

P031

Accel/decel time input selection

P032

Positioning command input selection

P044

DeviceNet comm watchdog timer

P045

Inverter action on DeviceNet comm
error

P046

DeviceNet polled I/O: Output
instance number

Appendix C

Name

User
Setting

C–16

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“P” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Default Setting

Name

-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

P047

DeviceNet polled I/O: Input instance
number

P048

Inverter action on DeviceNet idle
mode

P049

Motor poles setting for RPM

User
Setting

Appendix C

User-selectable
Menu Functions
“P” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE (Europe)

-FU (USA)

-FR (Japan)

U001

U002

U003

U004

U005

U008

U009

U010

U011

U012

U006
U007

User-selected function...
“no” = disabled, or use any of the
functions D001 to P049

User
Setting

CE–EMC
Installation
Guidelines
In This Appendix....

D
page

— CE–EMC Installation Guidelines....................................................... 2
— Hitachi EMC Recommendations ....................................................... 4

D–2

CE–EMC Installation Guidelines

CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
You are required to satisfy the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) when using an SJ300 inverter in an
EU country. To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard, follow the guidelines in
this section.
1. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable
frequency inverter, filter, and ground is as small as possible.
• Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas (zincplated mounting plates).
2. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large
areas.
• Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
• Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or noise-prone
conductors.
3. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.

Appendix D

• Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible; i.e., do not
strip away the shield (screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary.
• With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is communicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the same control
cabinet and they are connected at the same PE-potential), connect the shields of the
control lines to ground + PE (protective earth) at both ends. With distributed systems (for
example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same
control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems), we recommend connecting
the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency
inverter. If possible, route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry
section of the supervisory controller or host computer. The shield conductor of the motor
cables always must connected to PE at both ends.
• To achieve a large area contact between shield and PE-potential, use a PG screw with a
metallic shell, or use a metallic mounting clip.
• Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type “CY”) with 85% coverage.
• The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use of
reactors, contactors, terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary, the
unshielded section should be kept as short as possible.
• Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very often,
the terminal boxes, and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections, are
painted. Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of
the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the terminal box, and the motor
housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces.
4. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through
installation cables.
• Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference.
A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances. If two cables
intersect (one crosses over the other), the interference is smallest if they intersect at an
angle of 90°. Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor
cables, intermediate circuit cables, or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be
laid parallel to them over longer distances.
5. Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink (interference-threatened device), thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on
the interference sink.
• You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance of
0.25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter.

SJ300 Inverter

D–3

6. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
• Ensure that the protective earth terminal (PE) of the filter is properly connected to the PE
terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An HF ground connection via metal
contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter, or solely
via cable shield, is not permitted as a protective conductor connection. The filter must be
solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger
of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs.
To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
• Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm2 cross-sectional area.
• Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal parallel to
the protective conductor. (The cross section of each single protective conductor terminal
must be sized for the required nominal load.)

SJ300 inverter with footprint-type filter

SJ300 inverter with book-type filter

Appendix D

M
3~

D–4

Hitachi EMC Recommendations

Hitachi EMC Recommendations
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified personal
familiar with construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.

Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and
conditions.
1. The power supply to SJ300 inverters must meet these specifications:
• Voltage fluctuation+/- 10% or less
• Voltage imbalance +/- 3% or less
• Frequency variation +/- 4% or less
• Voltage distortion THD = 10% or less
2. Installation measure:
• Use a filter designed for SJ300 inverter.
3. Wiring:
• Shielded wire (screened cable) is required for motor wiring, and the length must be less
than 50 meters.
• The carrier frequency setting must be less than 5 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements.

Appendix D

• Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal/process circuit wiring.
4. Environmental conditions—when using a filter, follow these guidelines:
• Ambient temperature: –10 to 40 °C
• Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
• Vibration: 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G) 10 ~ 55Hz, SJ300–004xxx to SJ300–220xxx
2.94 m/sec2 (0.3 G) 10 ~ 55Hz, SJ300–300xxx to SJ300–1500xxx
• Location: 1000 meters or less altitude, indoors (no corrosive gas or dust)

Index

A
A Group functions 3–9
AC reactors 5–3
Acceleration 1–15, 3–8
characteristic curves 3–26
second function 3–24
two-stage 4–19
Acceleration stop function 3–21
Access levels 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Access to terminals 2–2
Accessories 5–2
Adaptive auto-tuning 4–69
Alarm signal 4–48
Algorithms 3–62
Algorithms, torque control 3–5
Ambient temperature 2–7, A–2
Analog input settings 3–11, 3–28
Analog inputs
current/voltage select 4–26
operation 4–59
sampling filter 4–59
wiring examples 4–61
Analog outputs
FM type 4–63
operation 4–62
PWM type 4–62
Analog signal calibration 3–60
Anti-windmilling 3–18, 3–21
Arrival frequency A–2
ASCII code table B–18
Automatic restart 3–29
Automatic voltage regulation 3–23
Auto-tuning 4–67, A–2
adaptive 4–69
procedure 4–68
Auto-tuning constants 3–62
AVR 3–23

B
B Group functions 3–29
Base frequency 2–26, A–2
Bibliography A–6
Block check code B–18
Brake control, external 3–46, 4–39, 4–58
Braking 1–15
dynamic 5–6
Braking resistor 2–5, A–2
Braking resistor selection 5–7, 5–9
Braking unit 2–5
Braking unit selection 5–8
Braking, dynamic 1–18
Break-away torque A–2

C
C Group functions 3–47
Capacitor life curve 6–12
Capacitor replacement 6–13
Carrier frequency 3–41, A–2
Catching a spinning motor 3–43, 3–61
CE approval A–2
CE-EMC guidelines D–2
Chassis ground connection 2–20
Choke 2–5, A–2
Choke, DC link 5–4
Chopper frequency 3–41
Clearance 2–7
Coasting 3–43, 3–61
Commercial power source switching 4–23
Communication test mode B–19
Communications 3–59
Communications protocol B–5
Communications, serial B–2
Constant torque 3–14
Constant volts/hertz operation 1–13
Control algorithms 3–14
Control gain switching 4–31
Controlled deceleration 3–40
Controlled deceleration at power loss 4–4
Cooling fan control 3–44
Copy Unit 1–3
Current overload 3–34
Current overload restriction 4–35

Index–2
D
D Group parameters 3–6
DC braking 4–16, 4–17, A–2
derating 3–19
settings 3–18
DC link A–2
choke 5–4
Deadband A–2
Deceleration 1–15, 3–8, 4–16
characteristic curves 3–26
second function 3–24
two-stage 4–19
Default parameter values C–2
Default settings
restoring 6–9
Derating
DC braking 3–19
Derating curves 1–11
Derivative gain 3–22
DeviceNet 5–5
Digital operator 2–23, 3–3
force operation 4–34
removal 2–4
Digital operator panel A–2
Digital operators 1–3
Dimensions
inverter 2–8
terminals 2–16
Diode A–3
Display restriction 3–37
Droop control 4–32
Duty cycle A–3
Dynamic braking 5–6, A–3
usage ratio 3–44, 5–6

E
Editing parameters 2–23, 2–26
in Run Mode 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Electromagnetic compatibility D–2
Electronic thermal overload 3–30
Elevator braking 3–46
EMC installation guidelines D–2
EMC installation recommendations D–4
EMI A–3
EMI filter 5–4
Encoder feedback 3–16
Energy savings mode 3–23
Error
PID loop 4–47, A–3
Error codes
programming 3–68
trip events 6–5
Event clearing 4–27

Expansion bay 2–4
Expansion card functions 3–65
Expansion cards
digital input 5–5
encoder feedback 5–5
input signals 4–41
output signals 4–58
External brake control 4–39, 4–58
External trip 4–21

F
F Group functions 3–8
Factory settings, restoring 6–9
Fan default setting 3–44
Fan outlet 2–7, 2–20
Fan replacement 6–14
Fan unit, Filler plate 1–4
FAQ 1–17
Features 1–2, 2–2
Ferrite core 5–4
Filters
noise suppression 5–2
Fine-tuning functions 3–29
Force operation from digital operator 4–34
Forward run command 4–12
Four-quadrant operation A–3
Free-run stop 3–43, 3–61, 4–16, 4–20, A–3
Frequency arrival signals 4–44
Frequency matching 3–43, 3–61
Frequency setting A–3
Frequency-related functions 3–20
Frequently asked questions 1–17
Functions 1–15
Fuse ratings 2–14
Fuzzy logic accel/decel 3–23

G
Gain settings 4–31
Glossary of terms A–2
Grommets 2–13

H
H Group parameters 3–62
Harmonics A–3
History of trip events 3–7
Home search A–4
Horsepower A–3

SJ300 Inverter

I
IGBT 1–13, A–3
test method 6–17
Index of terminal functions 4–10
Inertia A–3
Initialization 6–9
Input active range 3–28
Input circuits 4–11
Input terminals 2–18
Inspection
electrical measurements 6–15
IGBT test method 6–17
measurement techniques 6–16
procedures 6–10
unpacking 2–2
Installation 2–6
Instantaneous power failure 4–51
Insulation test 6–11
Integral gain 3–22
Intelligent input terminals 3–47, 4–11
Intelligent input wiring examples 4–11
Intelligent output terminals 3–53, 4–42
Intelligent terminal functions 3–47
Intelligent terminal index 4–10
Intelligent terminals A–3
Inverter 1–17
Inverter definition A–3
Inverter specifications 1–6
Isolation transformer A–4

J
Jog command 4–16
Jog frequency settings 3–13
Jogging operation A–4
Jump frequency 3–20, A–4

K
Keypad
features 2–23, 3–3
navigation 2–25, 3–4
navigation, trip events 6–8
Keypad features 2–23
Keypads 1–3, 3–2

L
LEDs 2–23, 3–3
Line reactor A–4
Linear accel/decel 3–26
Logic connector 4–9
Logic terminals 3–47, 3–53
input wiring examples 4–11

M
Main profile parameters 3–8
Maintenance procedures 6–10
Megger test 6–11
Model number convention 1–5
Momentum A–4
Monitor mode 2–25, 2–29, 2–30, 3–4
Monitoring functions 3–6
Motor constants 3–62, 4–65
auto-tuning 4–67
manual setting of 4–70
Motor load A–4
Motor poles 2–28
Motor selection 1–18
Motor wiring 2–20
Mounting location 2–6
Multiple motors
configuration 4–72
Multi-speed operation 4–13, A–4
Multi-speed profiles 1–15
Multi-speed settings 3–13

N
Nameplate 1–5
Navigational map 2–25, 3–4
trip events 6–8
NEC A–4
NEMA A–4
NEMA compliance 2–13
NEMA rating 2–7
Noise filters 5–2
AC reactor 2–5
Noise suppression 1–18

O
Open-collector outputs 4–42, A–4
Operational modes 3–5
Operator interfaces 1–3
Optimal accel/decel 3–23
Optional components 2–5
Options 1–2
Orientation A–4
Output circuits 4–42
Output deviation for PID control 4–47
Output frequency 3–8
Output overload 3–34
Output terminals 2–20
Over-current trip 3–29
Overload advance notice signal 4–46
Overload restriction 3–34, 4–35
Over-torque signal 4–50

Index–3

Index–4
P
P Group functions 3–65
P/PI selection 4–31
Parameter editing 2–23, 2–26
Parameter settings tables C–2
Parameters 1–15
Phase loss 3–29
PID loop 1–18, A–4
clearing 4–30
error A–3
ON/OFF 4–30
operation 4–71
output deviation 4–47
process variable A–4
setpoint A–5
settings 3–22
PLC, connecting to 4–7
Poles 1–18
Poles of motor 2–28
Potentiometer 2–27, 4–61
Power factor A–4
Power failure 4–51
Power failure response 3–29
Power loss 4–4
Power loss response 3–40
Power source switching 4–23
Power-on time over signal 4–54
Powerup test 2–21
observations 2–30
Powerup, unattended start 4–22
Process variable A–4
Program mode 2–25, 2–30, 3–4
Programming device 3–2
Programming error codes 3–68
Programming error monitoring 3–7
Proportional gain 3–22
Pulse-width modulation 4–62
PWM A–4

R
Ratings label 1–5
Reactance A–5
Read/write copy unit 1–3, 3–2
Rectifier A–5
Reduced torque 3–14
Regenerative braking A–5
Regulation A–5
Regulatory agency approvals 1–5
Relay alarm contacts 4–48
Remote control 4–33
Removable components 1–4

Reset function 4–27
Reset Mode 3–61
Restart Mode 3–43, 3–61
Retention screws 2–4
Reverse run command 4–12
Reverse torque A–5
Reverse U-shape accel/decel 3–26
Rotor A–5
Run command 4–12
Run mode 2–30, 3–5
Run signal 4–43
Running the motor 2–29
Run-time edits 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Run-time signal 4–54

S
Safety messages i
Saturation voltage A–5
Second motor 4–18
Sensorless vector control 3–14, 3–16, A–5
Serial communications 3–59, B–2
Serial communications protocol B–5
Set 2nd/3rd motors 4–18
Setpoint A–5
Sigmoid accel/decel 3–26
Single-phase power A–5
Sinking I/O 4–7
Slip A–5
Software lock 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Sourcing I/O 4–7
Spare parts 6–12
Specifications
derating curves 1–11
general 1–9
logic signals 4–9
Speed control 1–13, 1–15, 4–13
Speed loop gains 4–31
Speed pot 2–27
Squirrel cage A–5
Standard functions 3–9
Start frequency A–5
Stator A–5
Stop command 4–12
Stop Mode 3–43
Supply wiring 2–18
Switching frequency 3–41
Symbol definitions i
System description 2–5

SJ300 Inverter

T
Tachometer A–5
Technical support 1–xviii
Term definitions A–2
Terminal block 1–4
Terminal listing 4–10
Thermal overload 3–30
Thermal protection 4–28
Thermal switch A–6
Thermal warning 4–55
Thermistor A–6
Thermistor input 4–28, 4–55
Third motor 4–18
Three-phase power A–6
motor phase connections 1–14
Three-wire interface 4–29
Torque 1–13
Torque boost 3–16
Torque control algorithms 3–5, 3–14, 3–62
tuning 4–65
Torque limit 4–37
Torque limit signal 4–54
Torque specs, terminals 2–16
Torque, definition A–6
Transistor A–6
Trip events 3–7
clearing 6–5
definition A–6
error codes 6–5
external 4–21
history 6–8
monitoring 6–5
Trip history 6–8
Trip mode 4–27
Troubleshooting tips 6–3
Two-stage accel/decel 4–19

U
U Group functions 3–67
UL instructions xii
Unattended start protection 4–22
Under-voltage signal 4–51
Under-voltage trip 3–29
Unpacking 2–2
Up/Down functions 4–33
User-selectable menu functions 3–67
U-shape accel/decel 3–26

V
V/f control 3–14
V/f control setting 3–45
V/f free-setting 3–15
Variable torque 3–14
Variable-frequency drives
introduction 1–13
Velocity profile 1–15
Ventilation 2–7, 2–20

W
Warnings
operating procedures 4–3
Warranty 6–18
Watt loss A–6
Windmilling 3–18, 3–21
Wiring
analog inputs 4–61
gauge 2–14
intelligent input wiring examples 4–11
logic 2–20
logic connector 4–9
output 2–20
power input 2–18
preparation 2–13
serial communications B–3
system diagram 4–8

Z
Zero-phase reactor 5–4

Index–5

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2003:12:11 14:11:14Z
Modify Date                     : 2011:12:27 10:49:46-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:12:27 10:49:46-07:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Bruce L. Beverly
Title                           : Hitachi SJ300 Series Inverter Instruction Manual
Description                     : Inverters
Document ID                     : uuid:0e5ab69a-8d47-4862-82b3-81c28e9d8e28
Instance ID                     : uuid:e1c41f40-a2b0-4fa5-b025-fc4787720ac3
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 289
Subject                         : Inverters
Author                          : Bruce L. Beverly

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Hitachi Welding System Sj300 037Hfe Users Manual Series Inverter Instruction

SJ300-037HFE to the manual c88dbdc4-787c-4d2d-b3f1-7341546bb418

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation